T E N D E R D O C U M E N T

1

(An autonomous Institute of Dept. of Biotechnology, Ministry of Science & Technology, Govt. of India)

T E N D E R D O C U M E N T

FOR

Design, construction, testing, commissioning, validation, and other

associated works of the Bio-Safety Level-3 (BSL-3) laboratory facility

on a turnkey basis and its comprehensive operation during the defect

liability period of two years at the NCR Biotech Science Cluster

(NCR-BSC), Faridabad, Haryana

FEBRUARY, 2014

(Tender No. : THSTI/Eng./01/BSL-3/2013-14)

EXECUTIVE DIRECTOR

TRANSLATIONAL HEALTH SCIENCE AND TECHNOLOGY INSTITUTE

496, UDYOG VIHAR, PHASE – III GURGAON, HARYANA

PHONE No. : 0124-2876 300 FAX: 0124-2876 402

2

INDEX Part No. Particulars Page No.

Part - A Notice Inviting Tender and Pre-qualification criteria 3-9

Part - B Instructions to bidders 10-13

Part - C General Conditions of Contract 14-21

Part - D Specific Conditions of Contract and Annexures-I to XIV 22-45

Part - E Technical Details 46-158

Part – F Proposed Drawings 159-169

Part – G Price bid Format 170-246

3

PART – A

(NOTICE INVITING TENDER)

4


(THSTI)

GURGAON, HARYANA

No. THSTI/Eng./01/BSL-3/2013-14 Dated : 19.02.2014

NOTICE INVITING TENDER ( for newspaper only)

Sealed bids under Two bid system are invited from eligible contractors/firms for

undertaking the works pertaining to “Design, Construction, Testing,

Commissioning, Validation and other associated works of Bio- Safety Level-3

(BSL-3) Laboratory on a ‘Turnkey Basis’ and its Comprehensive Operation

during the defect liability period of 2 years at the NCR Biotech Science Cluster

(NCR-BSC), Faridabad, Haryana”. The estimated cost of works is 13.75 crore.

The last date for submission of bids duly complete in all respect is 14/3/14 upto

14.30 hrs. For details please visit our website (http://www.thsti.res.in).

Prospective bidders are advised to regularly visit our web site since any

corrigendum /amendments will be notified only on the web site.

Executive Director, THSTI

http://www.thsti.res.in/

5


(THSTI)

GURGAON, HARYANA

No. THSTI/Eng./01/BSL-3/2013-14 Dated : 19.02.2014

NOTICE INVITING TENDER

1.0 Sealed bids under the two bid system are invited on behalf of the Executive Director-THSTI, Gurgaon from

eligible contractors/firms for the following works:

Name & description of work Completion period of work (in months)

Estimated cost (in Rs.)

Bid Security (in Rs.)

Sale of

Tender

document

Date of Submission & opening

Design, Construction, Testing,

Commissioning, Validation and other

associated works of Bio- Safety

Level-3 (BSL-3) Laboratory on a

‘Turnkey Basis’ and its

Comprehensive Operation during the

defect liability period of 2 years at the

NCR Biotech Science Cluster (NCR-

BSC), Faridabad, Haryana

18

(Eighteen

months)

13.75

Crore

23.75

Lakhs

19.02.2014

to

13.03.2014

upto 18:00

hrs.

14.03.2014

up to 14:30

hrs. and

opening on

14.03.2014

at 15:00 hrs.

2.0 Complete set of tender documents is available at THSTI website (http://www.thsti.res.in). The tender

document consists of the following parts:

Part No. Description

Part A Notice Inviting Tender and Prequalification Criteria

Part B Instructions to Bidders

Part C General Conditions of Contract

Part D Specific Conditions of Contract and Annexure I to XIV

Part E Technical Specifications

Part F Proposed drawing

Part G Price Bid Format

3.0 Tendering process

The two bid system has been adopted for invitation of bids. The whole tendering process will comprise of the

following steps:

Steps Particulars

Step 1 Sale of tender document

Step 2 Pre-bid meeting

Step 3 Notification of ammendents to the tender document, if any

Step 4 Submission of bids ( bid-I and bid-II)

Step 5 Opening of bid-I

Step 6 Evaluation of bid-I (1st stage screening, 2

nd stage screening and final short-list)

Step 7 Opening of bid-II

Step 8 Evaluation of bid-II and award of contract

4.0 Sale of tender documents

The complete tender document is available for sale at THSTI office on any working day on payment of non-refundable

fee of Rs. 1500/- through a demand draft in favour of THSTI payable at Gurgaon. In case of downloading of tender

document from website, the tender fees of Rs. 1500 should be paid through demand draft along with bid security.

http://www.thsti.res.in/

6

However in case of downloading of tender documents from website it will be the responsibility of applicants / firms to

ensure that complete tender documents has been downloaded.

5.0 Pre-bid meeting

A pre-bid meeting with all the prospective bidders is schedule to be held on 4th

of March 2014 at 14.00 hours at

THSTI, Gurgaon. Interested applicants/ firms are invited to attend the same with a written statement of their query.

6.0 Notification of ammendents to the tender document

As a consequence of the pre-bid meeting, if the technical specification requires any modification, the same will be

incorporated as an amendment to this tender and the same will form part of the tender document. Prospective bidders

are advised to regularly scan through THSTI web site. Corrigendum/amendments etc., if any, will be notified only on

the THSTI web site and no separate advertisement will be made for this.

7.0 Submission of bids

After reading the tender document in detail and attending the pre-bid meeting, interested parties may participate in the

tendering process. Under the two bid system, the bidders are required to submit their bid-I and bid-II separately. All the

documents related to BID–I (Eligibility criteria/Technical details) and BID-II (Financial bid) should be put in two

separate envelopes duly marked as “Bid-I” and “Bid-II” respectively. Both the envelopes shall then be sealed in one

outer (main) envelope which should be super subscribed clearly with the name of work and the NIT reference number

addressed to the Executive Director, THSTI. The outer envelope shall contain the name and postal address of the

tenderer with Phone/ Mobile/ Fax numbers and e-mail address, if any.

The Bid-I should consist of the following documents:

a) Application form along with documents relating to eligibility criterion (as per Annexure I to IX)

b) Bid Security

c) Tender fee Rs. 1500/- (If not already paid)

d) Power of attorney of person authorised to sign the Bid

e) Complete Tender Document (Part – A to G) duly signed and stamped

g) A work plan clearly bringing out how the bidder proposes to carry out the work to achieve the quality and the

time schedule. The work plan shall clearly spell the detailed programme in the form of a PERT/CPM network

clearly bringing out details of start & completion of all important activities and also programme showing

material & labour resources related to the above PERT/CPM network.

The Bid –II should contain the following documents:

a) Price Bid as per the prescribed format (Part ‘G’).

b) Detailed description of all items, quantity, rate and amount as per the prescribed format (Part ‘G’).

The last date for submission of bids duly complete in all respect is 14/3/2014 upto 14.30 hrs. The bid should be valid

and open for acceptance for a period of 180 days from the date of opening the bid-I.

8.0 Opening of bid-I.

Bid-1 of all tenderers shall be opened on 14/3/2014 at 15.00 hrs at THSTI, Gurgaon in the presence of tenderers or

their authorise representative. A two stage screening process will be adopted for evaluation of bid-I as dicussed under

clause 9.0.

9.0 Evaluation of bid-I

(a) 1st stage screening of bid-I

At this stage the bid will be evaluated for compliance with the minimum pre-qualification criteria as shown below:

(i) Average annual financial turnover during the last three financial years i.e. 2010-11, 2011-12 and

2012-13 should be at least Rs. 4.13 crores. The applicant should be able to produce solvency certificate from

the applicant’s Bank (Nationalized/Scheduled) for atleast Rs. 4.13 crores or 30 % of the project estimated cost.

7

The applicant should submit Audited Balance Sheets for the last three financial years i.e. 2010-11, 2011-12

and 2012-13. The applicant should not have incurred any loss in more than two years during the last five years

ending 31st March 2013. (Refer Annexure –VI).

(ii) Experience of having successfully completed similar work during the last seven years ending last day

of month previous to one in which tender is invited should be either of the following:

Two similar works each of a total of the BSL-3 area of not less than 90 sq. mtrs.

OR

One similar work of a total of the BSL-3 area of not less than 120 sq. mtrs.

The tenderer is required to give details of such completed work in the format as per Annexure-VII of this

tender document. Installation of modular/container-type BSL-3 facilities shall not be considered for this

purpose.

(iii) The firm should have not been blacklisted, debarred, declared non performer or expelled from any

work of Union Government/ State Governments/ PSUs etc. during the last 5 years. They should also submit a

notorized affidavit for the same. The applicant should also provide information regarding litigation / arbitration

cases for the last five years as per Annexure-VIII.

(b) 2nd

stage screening of bid-I

The bidders who qualify the 1st stage screening will be invited to give audio visual presentation before the committee of

THSTI to explain their technical capability as shown below:

(i) Architectural and technical layout plans

Concept layout plans of the proposed BSL-3 laboratory as per the requirements stated under Technical

Specification (Part – E & F)

Note: The layout drawings provided with the tender are just for illustration purpose. The contractor shall

provide the proposed drawings as per the site requirement. M/s Suresh Goel and Associates are the architects

for the NCR Biotech Science Cluster. In order to harmonize the BSL-3 building and associated services with

the rest of the campus it is mandatory that the contractor (final awardee) works with the same architect firm for

all civil construction related work, the payments for which shall be directly made by THSTI to the architect.

(ii) Men & Materials movement layout plans

Conceptual layout plans showing movement of men & materials into and within the Laboratory areas clearly

highlighting the measures for control of spread of infection/contamination into and within the laboratory.

(iii) Zoning plans

Plans indicating details of zoning and separation/isolation of different classified, non-classified and

contaminated areas/zones, relative pressurization, air change rates, air re-circulation rates and sterility

requirements, decontamination control, services etc. for different areas/zones.

(iv) Specialized Systems and Services Layout schemes

Conceptual layout plans and schematic drawings of various specialized services and utilities showing tentative

locations of equipments and furniture such as; HVAC system, Air filtration system, Pressure control system,

Fire Detection and Alarm system, Air distribution system, Building Management system, Fire Fighting system,

Un-interrupted Power Supply system, Specialized laboratory support equipments/ primary containment,

Autoclaves, Dunk tanks, Dynamic pass boxes, Entry exit protocols

(v) Services & Utilities schemes

This will include the following systems; Power supply and distribution system,Water supply and distribution

system, Internal/external communication system, Disinfection/decontamination system, Effluent treatment and

disposal system, Solid waste treatment and disposal system.

8

(vi) Laboratory Validation Procedures and Details

(vii) Laboratory Security protocols

(viii) Project Implementation Methodology in relation to the PERT chart

(ix) Availability of construction plant and equipments.

The details given by the bidders in the Bid-I documents and explained during the presentation, will be evaluated by

scoring method. In case any information is not supported with documentary proof, it will be presumed that the bidder

does not have that particular facility/performance. Marking shall be done for each component based on documentary

evidence and presentation by the bidder wherever called for and the Technical Presentation to be given by the Bidder to

the evaluation committee of THSTI. The scores for the various criteria for the purpose of technical evaluation shall be

as follows.

S.No. Category Overall

Marks

Sub

Marks

1.0 TECHNICAL QUALIFICATION CRITERIA

1.1 Evaluation of Design & Planning Capability: 18

a. Architectural and technical layout plans

2

b. Men & materials movement plans

2

c. Zoning plans

2

d. Specialized Systems and Services

2

e. Services & utilities scheme

2

f. Laboratory validation schemes

2

g. Laboratory security schemes 2

h. Project implementation methodology 4

1.2 Evaluation of Personnel, Equipment and Financial capability 09

a. Personnel Capabilities (Annexure IV ) 3

b. Equipment Capabilities (Annexure V) 3

c. Financial Capabilities (Annexure VI)

3

1.3 Evaluation of experience of construction of projects of similar

nature & complexity : (Annexure VII)

23

a. Magnitude/Value of the project

8

b. Nature and complexity 8

c. Completion within stipulated time 7

Total Marks 50 50

(c) Final short-list

The name of firms who score minimum 35 marks or above in the evaluation at the 2nd

stage screening of bid-I will be

included in the ‘Final short list’ and will become eligible for opening of their bid-II. The final short listed bidders will

be invited to give views/comments for any effective value addition on the technical aspects of the proposed works. If

any such suggestions are accepted by THSTI, the same will be incorporated in the tender document and suitable

amendment will be issued for the same. In case there is any financial implication due to such amendment, the

shortlisted bidders will be permitted to submit their supplementary price bid and the same will be opened along with the

bid-II.

10.0 Opening of bid-II

The bid-II (inclusive of supplementary price bids, if any) of final short listed bidders only will be opened at a date and

time to be decided by the competent authority and will be communicated to the concerned parties.

9

11.0 Evaluation of bid-II and award of contract

The contract will be awarded to the Bidder whose Bid has been determined to be eligible and to be substantially

responsive to the Bid documents and who has offered the lowest evaluated bid.

Engineer (IEE)

10

PART – B

(INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS)

11

INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

1.0 The Employer

1.1 The Translational Health Science and Technology Institute (THSTI), Gurgaon shall be the employer of the subject

work. All documents relating to Labour License for obtaining necessary clearance etc is to be signed /endorsed by

representative of the Employer.

2.0 Cost of Bidding

2.1. The Bidder shall bear all costs associated with the preparation and submission of his Bids and "The Employer"

will in no case be responsible or liable for those costs, regardless of the conduct or outcome of the Bidding

process.

3.0 Site Visit

3.1. The Bidder is advised to acquaint himself with the job involved, visit the Site & examine soil conditions (No

report will be provided by Engineer), climatic conditions, labour, power, water, material availability, transport and

communication facilities, environmental regulations, laws and bye-laws of Statutory bodies of Govt. of Haryana

and the Govt. of India and collect all information that will be necessary for preparing the Bid and entering into a

Contract. The cost of visiting the Site and collecting information for the purpose of submission of the Bid shall be

to the Bidder's account.

3.2. The Bidder and any of his personnel or agents will be granted permission by the Employer to enter upon the Site

for the purpose of such inspection, but only upon the express condition that the Bidder, his personnel or agents

will release and indemnify the Employer and Employer's Personnel and agents from and against all liability in

respect thereof and will be responsible for personnel injury (Whether fatal or otherwise), loss of or damage to

property and any other loss, damage, costs and expense however caused, which, but for the exercise of such

permission would not have arisen. 4.0 Bid Prices

4.1. The Bidder shall fill the rates in the respective columns in Indian Rupees in the bid-II. Correction, if any, shall be

made by crossing out, initialing, dating, stamping and rewriting. Wherever in any head if the same items are

appearing and contractor has quoted different rates, contractor shall be paid the lowest quoted rate for such items.

4.2. All duties, taxes including works contract tax, building & construction/ labour cess etc and other levies payable by

the Contractor under the Contract including Contractors profit and over heads etc. or for any other cost shall be

included in the rates and prices and the total amount of Bid submitted by the Bidder. The evaluation and

comparison of Bids by the THSTI shall be made accordingly.

4.3. The rates and prices quoted by the Bidder shall be fixed for items complete in all respect for the duration of the

Contract and not subject to adjustment on any account except as otherwise provided in the conditions of Contract.

5.0 Bid Validity

5.1. The Bid shall remain valid and open for acceptance for a period of 180 days from the last date fixed for receiving

the same. In exceptional circumstances prior to expiry of the original Bid validity period, THSTI may request the

Bidder for a specified extension in the period of validity. The request and the responses thereto shall be made in

writing or by fax or email. A Bidder may refuse the request without forfeiting his Bid Security. A Bidder agreeing

to the request will neither be required nor permitted to modify his Bid, but will be required to extend the validity

of his Bid correspondingly.

6.0 Bid Security

6.1. The Bidder shall furnish, as part of his Bid, a Bid Security of the amount of Rs. 23,75,000/- (Twenty three lakhs

seventy five thousand Only) along with his Bid-I. The Bid Security shall be in the form of a Demand Draft in

favour of “Executive Director, Translational Health Science and Technology Institute” payable at Gurgaon from

any Nationalised bank/Scheduled bank.The Bid Securities of unsuccessful Bidders will be returned as promptly as

possible as but not later than 30 days after the expiration of the period of Bid validity prescribed by the Employer.

12

6.2. The Bid Security of the successful Bidder will be returned upon the Bidder executing the Contract and furnishing

the required Performance Security. 7.0 Format and Signing of Bid

7.1. The Tender shall be filled & signed only by the firm/ corporation in whose name the Tenders have been issued.

The Bid shall be typed or written in indelible ink and duly signed by a person or persons duly authorised to being

the Bidder to the Contract.

7.2. The complete Bid shall be without alterations interlining and erasures except those to accord with instruction

issued by the THSTI or as necessary to correct errors made by the Bidder in which case such correction shall be

initialled by person signing the Bid. 8.0 Late Bids

8.1. Any Bid received by THSTI after the prescribed deadline for submission will liable to be rejected and will be

returned unopened to the Bidder.

9.0 Modification and Withdrawal of Bid

9.1. The Bidder may modify or withdraw his Bid after Bid submission, provided that modification or notice of

withdrawal is received in writing by the THSTI prior to the prescribed deadline for submission of Bids.

9.2. The Bidder's modification or notice of withdrawal shall be prepared, sealed, marked and despatched in accordance

with the provisions for the submission of Bids. No Bid may be modified subsequent to the dead line for

submission of Bids.

9.3. Subsequent to the expiration of the period of validity of Bids prescribed in the Bid documents, a successful Bidder

who has not been notified by the THSTI of the Award of the Contract may withdraw his Bid without penalty.

10.0 Notification of Award

10.1. Prior to the expiration of the prescribed period of Bid validity, the THSTI will notify the successful Bidder by fax

or by registered letter that his Bid has been accepted. The notification of Award will constitute the formation of

the Contract. Upon the furnishing by the successful Bidder of a Performance Security in accordance with the

provisions of Clause 12, the THSTI will promptly notify the unsuccessful Bidders that their Bids have been

unsuccessful.

11.0 Signing of Agreement

11.1. Upon the receipt of the notification of Award by the successful Bidder, the successful Bidder shall fill the

Agreement in accordance with form of Agreement included in the Bid documents and submit the same to the

Employer within two weeks of the date of receipt of notification of Award. The Employer shall return the draft

duly approved within one day from the date of receipt of the draft and the successful Bidder shall get the same

engrossed, have the correct amount to stamp duly adjudicated by Superintendent of Stamps and thereafter return

the same duly signed and executed on behalf of the successful Bidder, all at his own cost within 3 days from the

receipt of the approved draft.( Refer annexure ‘XI’)

12.0 Performance Security

12.1. Within 15 days of receipt of the notification of Award from the THSTI, the successful Bidder shall furnish to the

Employer a Security in the form of a Bank Guarantee from Nationalised/Scheduled bank for an amount of 5

percent of the Contract sum as per format prescribed at Annexure-XII .

12.2. The validity of the Performance Security as per the Notification of Award for work shall be upto the end of the

Defect Liability Period with 3 months claim period after expiry of defect liability period.

12.3. In cases, where the aggregate of expected Contract payment would at any time exceed the Engineer's estimate of

actual work performed by more than the amount of Performance Security specified in Clause 12.1 such Security

shall be increased accordingly at the expense of the successful Bidder.

12.4. Failure of the successful Bidder to lodge the required Bank Guarantee shall constitute sufficient grounds for the

13

annulment of the Award and forfeiture of the Bid Security, in which event the Employer may make the Award to

the next lowest evaluated Bidder or, if there are no other Bidders, call for new Bids.

Engineer (IEE)

14

PART – C

(GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT)

15

GENERAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

1.0 Definitions and Interpretation

1.1 In the Contract (as hereinafter defined) the following words and expressions shall have the meanings hereby

assigned to them except where the context otherwise requires:

(a) i "Employer" means THSTI or any other person authorized by THSTI in this behalf.

ii.

"Engineer" means the person appointed by THSTI to act as Engineer for the purposes of the

contract.

iii. "Contractor" means an individual or firms (proprietary or partnership) whether incorporated or

not, that has entered into contract (with the employer) and shall include his/ its heirs, legal

representatives, successors and assigns, successors in interest of individuals or persons.

Composing such firms or successors of such firms or the permitted assigns of such individual or

firms. Changes in the constitution of the firm, if any shall be immediately notified to the

employer, in writing and approval obtained for continued performance of the contract.

iv.

"Subcontractor" any person to whom a part of the Works has been subcontracted by the contractor

with the consent of the Engineer and the legal successors in title to such person, but not any

assignee of any such person.

(b)

i.

"Contract" means this tender document conditions, the Specification, the Drawings (if any), the

Bill of Quantities, the Letter of Acceptance, the Contract Agreement (if completed) and such

further documents as may be expressly incorporated in the Letter of Acceptance or Contract

Agreement (if completed).

ii. "Specification" means the specification of the Works included in the Contract and any

modification thereof or addition thereto made or submitted by the Contractor and approved by the

Engineer.

iii.

"Drawings" means all drawings, calculations and technical information of a like nature provided

by the Engineer to the Contractor under the Contract and all drawings, calculations, samples,

patterns, models, operation and maintenance manuals and other technical information of a like

nature submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer.

iv.

"Tender" means the Contractor's priced offer to the Employer for the execution and completion

of the Works and the remedying of any defects therein in accordance with the provisions of

the Contract, as accepted by the Letter of Acceptance. The word Tender is synonymous with

"Bid" and the words "Tender Documents" with "Bidding Documents".

(c)

i.

"Commencement Date" means the date upon which the Contractor receives the notice to

commence the works as issued by the Employer.

ii.

"Time for Completion" means the time for completing the execution of and passing the Tests on

Completion of the Works or any Section or part thereof as stated in the Contract calculated from

the Commencement Date.

iii.

"Contract Price" means the sum stated in the Letter of Acceptance as payable to the Contractor for

the execution and completion of the Works and the remedying of any defects therein in accordance

with the provisions of the Contract.

16

iv.

"Plant" means machinery, apparatus and the like intended to form or forming part of the Permanent

Works.

v. "Contractor's Equipment" means all appliances and things of whatsoever nature (other than

Temporary Works) required for the execution and completion of the Works and the remedying of

any defects therein, but does not include Plant, materials or other things intended to form or

forming part of the Permanent Works.

vi. "Section" means a part of the Works specifically identified in the Contract as a Section.

2.0 Commencement of Works

2.1 The Contractor shall commence the Works within 2 weeks from the date of receipt of notice by him to this effect

from the Employer to proceed with the works with due expedition and without delay.

3.0 Assignment of Contract

3.1 The Contractor shall not, without the prior consent of the THSTI, assign the Contract or any part thereof, or any

benefit or interest therein or thereunder, otherwise than by:

(a) a charge in favour of the Contractor's bankers of any monies due or to become due under the Contract, or

(b) assignment to the Contractor's insurers (in cases where the insurers have discharged the Contractor's loss or

liability) of the Contractor's right to obtain relief against any other party liable. The provision of labour as

piece work basis shall not deemed to be subcontracting under this clause.

4.0 Sub-Contracting

4.1 The Contractor shall not subcontract the whole or part of the works of the Works. Except where otherwise

provided by the Contract, the Contractor shall not subcontract any other part of the works without the prior

consent of the Engineer (which consent shall be at the sole discretion of the Employer). While subcontracting, the

contractor will consider the parties / agencies depending upon their capabilities and get the works implemented

under his own overall supervision. However this shall not relieve the Contractor from any liability or obligation

under the Contract and he shall be responsible for the acts, defaults and neglects of a Subcontractor, his agents,

servants or workmen as if they were the acts, defaults or neglects of the Contractor, his agents, servants or

workmen.

Provided that the Contractor shall not be required to obtain such consent for:

(a) the provision of labour,

(b) the purchase of materials which are in accordance with the standards specified in the Contract.

5.0 Priority of Contract Documents

5.1 The several documents forming the Contract are to be taken as mutually explanatory to one another, detailed

drawings being followed in preference to small scale drawing and figured dimensions in preference to scale and

special conditions in preference to General Conditions.

5.2 In case of discrepancy between the schedule of quantities, the specifications and or the drawings, the following

order of preference shall be observed:

(a) Description of Schedule of Quantities and scope of work

(b) Particular specifications and special condition, if any

(c) Drawings

(d) C.P.W.D Specifications (Applicable to civil and electrical works)

17

(e) Indian Standard specifications of B.I.S and other relevant reference standards

5.3 If there are varying or conflicting provisions made in any one document forming part of the Contract, THSTI

shall be the deciding authority with regard to the intention of the document and his decision shall be final and

binding on the contractor.

5.4 Any error in description, quantity or rate in schedule of quantities or any omission there from shall not vitiate the

Contract or release the contractor from the execution of the whole or any part of the works comprised therein

according to drawings and specifications or from any of his obligations under the Contract.

6.0 Custody and Supply of Drawings and Documents

6.1 The Drawings shall remain in the sole custody of the Engineer, but two copies thereof shall be provided to the

Contractor free of charge. The Contractor shall make at his own cost any further copies required by him. Unless it

is strictly necessary for the purposes of the Contract, the Drawings, Specification and other documents provided

by the Employer or the Engineer shall not, without the consent of the Employer, be used or communicated to a

third party by the Contractor. Upon issue of the Defects Liability Certificate, the Contractor shall return to the

Engineer all Drawings, Specifications and other documents provided under the Contract.

7.0 One Copy of Drawings to be kept on Site

7.1 One copy of the Drawings, provided to or supplied by the Contractor as aforesaid, shall be kept by the Contractor

on the Site and the same shall at all reasonable times be available for inspection and use by the Engineer/

Employer and by any other person authorised by the Employer in writing.

8.0 Disruption of Progress

8.1 The Contractor shall give notice to the Employer through Engineer, whenever planning or execution of the

Works is likely to be delayed or disrupted due to delay in approval or issue of instruction by the Engineer within

15 days or such other reasonable time as may be decided by the Employer. The notice shall include details of the

drawing or instruction required and of why and by when it is required and of any delay or disruption likely to be

suffered if it is late.

9.0 Delay and Cost of Delay of Drawings

9.1 If, by reason of any failure or inability of the Engineer to issue, within a time reasonable in all the circumstances,

any drawing or instruction for which notice has been given by the Contractor as, the Contractor suffers delay then

the Engineer shall, after due consultation with the Employer and the Contractor, determine any extension of time

to which the Contractor is entitled to as per rules.

10.0 Supplementary Drawings and Instructions

10.1 The Engineer shall have authority to issue to the Contractor, from time to time, such supplementary drawings and

instructions as shall be necessary for the purpose of the proper and adequate execution and completion of the

Works and the remedying of any defects therein. The Contractor shall carry out and be bound by the same.

11.0 Revised Programme

11.1 If at any time it should appear to the Engineer that the actual progress of the Works does not conform to the

PERT schedule, the Contractor shall produce, at the request of the Engineer, a revised programme showing the

modifications to such programme necessary to ensure completion of the Works within the Time for Completion.

12.0 Inspection of Operations

12.1 The Engineer, and any person authorised by him, shall at all reasonable times have access to the Site and to all

workshops and places where materials or Plant are being manufactured, fabricated or prepared for the Works and

the Contractor shall afford every facility for and every assistance in obtaining the right to such access.

13.0 Rejection

18

13.1 If the materials or Plant are not ready for inspection or testing as per schedule or if, as result of the inspection or

testing referred to in this Clause, the Engineer determines that the materials or Plant are defective or otherwise

not in accordance with the Contract, he may reject the materials or Plant and shall notify the Contractor thereof

immediately. The notice shall state the Engineer’s objections with reasons. The Contractor shall then promptly

make good the defect or ensure that rejected materials or Plant comply with the Contract. If the engineer so

requests, the test of rejected materials or Plant shall be made or repeated under the same terms and conditions. All

costs incurred by the Employer by the repetition of the tests shall, after due consultation with the Employer and

the Contractor, be determined by the Engineer and shall be recoverable from the Contractor by the Employer and

may be deducted from any monies due or to become due to the Contractor and the Engineer shall notify the

Contractor accordingly, with a copy to the Employer.

14.0 Independent Inspection

14.1 The Employer/Engineer may delegate inspection and testing of materials or Plant to an independent inspector.

Any such delegation for this purpose to such independent inspector shall be considered as an assistant of the

Engineer. Notice of such appointment (no being less than 14 days) shall be given by the Employer/Engineer to

the Contractor.

15.0 Examination of Work before Covering up

15.1 No part of the Work shall be covered up or put out of view without the approval of the Engineer and the

Contractor shall afford full opportunity for the Engineer to examine and measure any such part of the Works

which is about to be covered up or put out of view and to examine foundations before any part of the work is

placed thereon. The Contractor shall give notice to the Engineer whenever any such part of the Works or

foundations is or are ready or about to be ready for examination and the engineer shall unless he considers it

unnecessary and advises the Contractor accordingly, attend for the purpose of examining and measuring such part

of the Works or of examining such foundations.

16.0 Suspension of Work

16.1 The Contractor shall, on the instructions of the Engineer/ Employer, suspend the progress of the Works or any

part thereof for such time and in such manner as the Engineer may consider necessary and shall, during

such suspension, properly protect and secure the Works or such part thereof so far as is necessary in the opinion

of the Engineer/Employer. 17.0 Time for Completion

17.1 The whole of the Works and, if applicable, any Section required to be completed within a particular time as stated

in the Appendix to Tender, shall be completed, within the time stated in the Appendix to Tender (Annexure XIV)

for completion of the whole of the Works or the Section (as the case may be), calculated from the

Commencement Date, or such extended time as may be allowed under this contract.

18.0 Liquidated Damages for Delay

18.1 If the Contractor fails to complete the execution of and passing the test on completion of the works or any

section by the time for completion, within the relevant time prescribed by Clause 17.1, then the Contractor shall

pay to the Employer liquidated damages at the rate of the 0.5 % of contract value for per week of delay or part

thereof subject to maximum of 5% of the contract value.The Employer may, without prejudice to any other

method of recovery, deduct the amount of such damages from any monies due or to become due to the

Contractor. The payment or deduction of such damages shall not relieve the Contractor from his obligation to

complete the Works, or from any other of his obligations and liabilities under the contract.

18.2 If, before the Time for Completion of the whole of the Works or, if applicable, any Section, a Taking-Over

Certificate has been issued for any part of the Works or of a Section, the liquidated damages for delay in

completion of the reminder of the Works or of that Section shall, for any period of delay after date stated in such

Taking-Over Certificate, and in the absence of alternative provisions in the Contract, be reduced in the proportion

which the value of the part so certified bears to the value of the whole of the Works or Section, as applicable. The

Provisions of this Sub-Clause shall only apply to the rate of liquidated damages and shall not affect the limit

thereof.

19

19.0 Taking-Over Certificate

19.1 When the whole of the Works have been completed and all the equipments and systems have satisfactorily passed

the Tests on Completion and the equipments and systems have been satisfactorily Validated, the Contractor shall

give a notice of Completion to the Employer through the Engineer. Such notice shall be deemed to be a request

by the Contractor to issue a Taking-Over Certificate in respect of the Works. The Engineer shall, within 21 days

of the date of delivery of such notice, either issue to the Contractor, a Taking-Over Certificate, stating the date on

which, in his opinion, the Works were completed in accordance with the Contract, or give instructions in writing

to the Contractor specifying all the work which in the Engineer's and Employer’s opinion, is required to be done

by the Contractor before the issue of such Certificate. The Engineer shall also notify the Contractor of any defects

in the Works affecting completion that may appear after such instructions and before completion of the Works

specified therein. The Contractor shall be entitled to receive such Taking-Over Certificate within 21 days of

completion, to the satisfaction of the Employer, of the Works so specified and remedying any defects so notified.

20.0 Taking-Over of Sections or Parts

20.1 Similarly, in accordance with the procedure set above, the Contractor may request and the Engineer shall issue a

Taking-Over Certificate in respect of :

(a) any Section in respect of which a separate Time for Completion is provided in the Appendix to Tender

(Annexure- XIV), or

(b) any part of the Permanent Works which has been both completed to the satisfaction of the Employer and,

otherwise than as provided for in the Contract, occupied or used by the Employer, or

(c) any part of the Permanent Works which the Employer has elected to occupy or use prior to completion

(where such prior occupation or use is not provided for in the Contract or has not been agreed by the

Contractor as a temporary measure).

20.2 Completion of Parts

If any part of the Permanent Works has been satisfactorily completed and has satisfactorily passed any Tests

on Completion prescribed by the Contract, and such part of the work is intended to be used by the Employer,

the engineer may issue a Taking-Over Certificate in respect of that part of the Permanent Works before

completion of the whole of the Works and , upon the issue of such Certificate, the Contractor shall be deemed

to have undertaken to complete with due expedition any outstanding work in that part of the permanent Works

during the Defects Liability Period.

21.0 Defects Liability Period

21.1 In these conditions the expression “Defects Liability Period” shall mean the defects liability period named in the

Appendix to Tender, calculated from:

(a) the date of completion of the Works certified by the Engineer in accordance with Clause 19.1

or

(b) in the event of more than one certificate having been issued by the Engineer under Clause 20.1 & 20.2, the

respective dates so certified.

21.2 The Defects Liability Period for the Works shall be extended by a period equal to the period during which the

Works cannot be used by reason of a defect or damage. If only part of the Works is affected the Defects Liability

Period shall be extended only for that part.In neither case shall the Defects Liability Period extend beyond 3 years

from the date of taking over.

22.0 Variations, Alteration and Omissions

22.1 The Employer shall make any variation of the form, or the Scope Works or any part thereof that may, in his

opinion, be necessary and for that purpose, or if for any other reason it shall, in his opinion, be appropriate, he

shall have the authority to instruct the Contractor to do and the Contractor shall do any of the following:

(a) change the character or quality or kind of any such work.

(b) change the levels, lines, position and dimensions of any part of the Works,

20

(c) execute additional work of any kind necessary for the completion of the Works

(d) change any specified sequence or timing of construction of any part of the Works.

No such variation shall in any way vitiate or invalidate the Contract, but the effect, if any, of all such variations shall be valued in accordance with the provisions of this contract. Provided that where the issue of an instruction to vary the Works is necessitated by some default of or breach of contract by the contractor or for which he is responsible, any additional cost attributable to such default shall be borne by the contractor.

22.2 Instructions for Variations

The Contractor shall not make any such variation without an instruction of the Engineer/Employer. Provided that no instruction shall be required for increase or decrease in the quantity of any work where such increase or decrease is not the result of an instruction given under this Clause, but is the result of the quantities exceeding or being less than those stated in the Price bid ( BOQ) as per approved drawings issued for construction.

For all variations referred to in Clause 22.1, any additions to the Contract Price (for the purposes of this Clause

referred to as "varied works"), shall be valued at the rates and prices set out in the Contract if, in the opinion of

the Engineer, the same shall be applicable. If the contract does not contain any rates or prices applicable to the

varied work, the rates and prices in the Contract shall be used as the basis for valuation so far as may be

reasonable, failing which, after due consultation by the Engineer with the Contractor, suitable rates or prices

shall be agreed upon between the Engineer and the Contractor. In the event of disagreement the Engineer shall

fix such rates or prices as are, in his opinion, appropriate based on CPWD norms and shall notify the Contractor

accordingly. Until such time as rates or prices are agreed or fixed, the Engineer shall determine provisional rates

or prices to enable on-account payments to be included in Interim payment certificates. 22.3 Power of Engineer to Fix Rates

Provided that if the nature or amount of any varied work relative to the nature or amount of the whole of the Works or to any part thereof, is such that, in the opinion of the Engineer, the rate or price contained in the Contract for any item of the Works is, by reason of such varied work, rendered inappropriate or inapplicable, then after due consultation by the Engineer with the Contractor, a suitable rate or price shall be agreed upon between the Engineer and the Contractor. In the event of disagreement the Engineer shall fix such other rate or price as is, in his opinion, appropriate and shall notify the Contractor accordingly. Until such time as rates or prices are agreed or fixed, the Engineer shall determine provisional rates or prices to enable on-account payments to be included in Interim payment certificates.

The rates of such items shall be worked out on the basis of market rate analysis. In the event of disagreement between the Engineer and the Contractor on these rates, the Engineer shall fix such rates and prices as are in his opinion appropriate and shall notify the Contractor accordingly. Provided also that no varied work instructed to be done by the Engineer shall be valued under this Sub-Clause unless, within 14 days of the date of such instruction and, other than in the case of omitted work, before the commencement of the varied work, notice shall have been given either:

(a) by the Contractor to the Employer through the Engineer of his intention to claim extra payment or a varied

rate or price, or

(b) by the Employer through the Engineer to the Contractor of his intention to vary a rate or price. 22.4 Payment of Claims

The Contractor shall be entitled to have included in any interim payment certified by the Engineer such amount in respect of any claim as the Engineer, after due consultation with the Contractor, may consider due to the Contractor provided that the Contractor has supplied sufficient particulars to enable the Engineer to determine the amount due. If such particulars are insufficient particulars to substantiate the whole of the claim, the Contractor shall be entitled to payment in respect of such part of the claim as such particulars may substantiate to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The Engineer shall notify the Contractor for any determination made under this Sub-Clause.

23.0 Customs Duty and Clearance of Goods 23.1 The Employer will use his best endeavors in assisting the Contractor, where required, in obtaining clearance

through the Customs of Contractor's Equipment, materials and other things required for the Works. However, the responsibility for getting clearance from customs shall rest with the contractor. Further, THSTI is entitled to concession on payment of Customs Duty under notification No.51/96 dated 23.07.1996. We don’t issue any ‘Form C’ or ‘Form D’. However, being R&D Organization concessional customs duty forms can be issued. No other charges except those mentioned clearly in the bid will be admissible

21

Note : Since THSTI is entitled to concession on payment of custom duty under notification no. 51/96, the

bidders should keep this point in mind while submitting their bids. The responsibility to claim concession

on payment of custom duty towards import of items to be used for the works shall be that of the bidder.

THSTI will only issue concessional custom duty form as and when requested by the bidder.

24.0 Procurement of Various Materials

24.1 The Employer will not supply any construction materials required for the Works under this Contract. The

Contractor must, therefore, make his own arrangements for timely procurement of various materials including

steel and cement. Prior approval of each and every material including steel cement, aggregate, bricks etc or any

other fittings & fixtures to be taken from engineer before its procurement to site. However in case of excessive

delay in procurement of various materials, the Employer may also take decision of procurement of material

directly and the cost will be recovered from the contractor.

25.0 Water Supply & Power Supply

25.1 The Contractor shall make his own arrangement for water supply at Site for drinking as well as construction

purposes at his own cost. The Contractor shall also make his own arrangements for power supply at Site for

construction, testing & commissioning of all services and general use at his own cost. Non-availability of power

supply and/or water from whatever source shall not entail any additional claims or extension of Contract period in

this account. The contractor will provide water &electricity to the Engineer’s office free of cost for the required

quantity by the engineer’s site office.

26.0 Jurisdiction of Dispute

26.1 All dispute under this contract shall be subject to the jusrisdiction of Haryana high court. 27.0 Terms not expressly provided for

27.1 In case this tender document does not contain a provision or terms for dealing with a situation thay may arise

during the execution of the works, the relevant provisions contained in the CPWD manual or any other laws/rules shall be followed in such cases and the same will be binding on the Contractor.

Engineer (IEE)

22

PART – D

(SPECIFIC CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT)

23

SPECIFIC CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

1.0 Certificates and payments

1.1 Advance Payment

THSTI will make an advance payment at a simple interest @ 10% (ten percent) per annum on reducing balance basis to the Contractor exclusively for the cost of mobilization in respect of the works for an amount equal to 5% (Five percent) of the contract price named in letter of award. Payment of such advance amount will be due under separate certification by the Engineer after (i) execution of the Form of Agreement by the parties hereto; ii) submission of the performance security by the Contractor; and iii) submission by the Contractor of an unconditional bank guarantee in the prescribed format prescribed at Annexure -XIII for amount equal to the advance payment and estimated interest thereof. Such bank guarantee shall remain valid till the advance amount and interest thereon is fully recovered from the contractor. The mobilization advance payment along with Interest shall be repaid through percentage deductions @ 20% from the interim payments certified by the Engineer. Deduction for Interest accrued during the period shall commence from first interim payment certificate. However deductions for Principal amount of mobilization advance and balance interest shall commence in the next Interim Payment Certificate until such time as the advance payment has been fully repaid, always provided that the advance payment shall be completely repaid prior to the time when 80 percent of the contract price has been certified for the payment.

1.2 Quarterly Statements

The Contractor shall submit a statement in 3 copies to the Engineer by 7th day following each completed quarter for the work executed during that quarter in a tabulated form approved by the Engineer, showing the amounts to which the Contractor considers himself to be entitled. The statement shall include the following items, as applicable, which shall be taken into account in the sequence listed:

(a) The estimated contract value of the Permanent Works executed up to the end of the quarter in

question, at base unit rates and prices.

(b) The actual value certified for payment for the Permanent Works executed up to the end of the

previous quarter, at base unit rates and prices.

(c) The estimated contract value at base unit rates and prices of the Permanent Works for the quarter

in question, obtained by deducting (b) from (a);

(d) The value of any variations executed up to the end of the quarter in question, less the amount

certified in the previous Interim Payment Certificate;

(e) Any amount to be withheld as retention money as per provisions of Sub-Clause 1.7, to the

amounts due under paragraphs (c), (d), and (h);

(f) Any amounts to be deducted as repayment of the Advance under the provisions of Sub-Clause 1.1;

and

(g) Any other sum, to which the Contractor may be entitled under the contract.

(h) 75% of the value of materials delivered and which will be consumed/installed/put to operation in the

next quarter at the site for permanent works on signing of the Indenture for secured advance format of which

is enclosed at Annexure - X.

(i) The amount to be deducted towards the advance income tax and the advance works contract tax as

per the statutory requirements in this regard.

1.3 Documents to be submitted along with Quarterly Statement

The contractor is required to submit following details/documents along with every quarterly

statement/running/final bill without which bills will not be processed.

24

a) Bills of every section of work as provided in BOQ to be prepared separately and submitted all

together. In case there is no billable amount of any section of work, the same should be clearly

indicated zero value during the period of bill.

b) Complete measurement details along with location of each measurement should be clearly indicated. c) Authorised representative of contractor with name & seal to sign on each page of bill submitted. d) Carryover and brought forward for each & every quantity to be indicated in the bill.

e) The running bill should contain the measurement of items executed during the period of bill. Full

measurement may be given in pre final/ final bill. The measurement of all concealed items should be

made before covering them.

f) All the copy of challan of materials, bills and test certificates specially of the items on which secured

advance has been claimed, steel, cement, sand, aggregates, bricks, any plumbing material,

Aluminium, waterproofing material etc. should be submitted alongwith the every bill to the Engineer.

Actual measurement of secured advance to be submitted for verification of Engineer. Rate of secured

advance material to be verified by Engineer independently. Secured advance on approved make

material will only be payable.

g) Manufacturer Catalogue for aluminium and other items for verification of standard unit weight and

checking that material is as per specification should be submitted.

h) Weight slip of reinforcement steel and aluminium and any other material as required by Engineer

Representative from authenticated source like Dharam Kanta should be submitted.

i) The computerised soft copy of the entire bill shall be submitted alongwith the bill.

j) Correction as made by Engineer Representative should be incorporated by the contractor and

corrected copy in three copy should be submitted for payment. Date of submission of bill will be

reckoned from the date of submission of corrected bill.

k) Material consumption statement should be submitted alongwith every bill.

l) Bill should be indexed properly and each page and correction if any should be signed and stamped by

the authorised representative of the contractor and acceptance should be given.

m) Copy of challan of submission of PF & ESI and any other relevant as required from time to time

should be submitted.

n) Contractor shall maintain a check list at site duly marked on drawing for the items/works already

measured till previous bill should be submitted alongwith the bill.

o) Register for steel, cement, water proofing material, concealed item etc. should be maintained at site in

the standard format of CPWD duly modified by Engineer Representative as per requirement.

Quarterly statement should be submitted along with the bill.

p) Power of attorney of authorized person on behalf of contractor to be submitted. Contractor must

ensure that all papers /Measurement book to be signed by authorized person with measurement date,

date of start & date of completion etc.

q) All overwriting, alterations have been countersigned by the authorized person with date.

r) Approval of extra item if any conveyed to be enclosed. s) Contractor must ensure, in case of time extension, confirmation of extended validity of insurance,

performance BG upto Defect liability period as per contract and a copy of approved time extension to

be submitted.

25

t) Contractor must authorise their representatives competent for verification of measurement at site and

these person should be available at site.

u) Contractor is required to submit all test certificates of items claimed in bill for payment or for secured

advance payment. Any item not meeting the test criteria’s will not be considered for payment.

v) All the pages and enclosures of bills to be stamped with name and designation of the person with full

signature of contractor’s and THSTI’s site incharge before submission to the engineer.

1.4 Certfication of Quarterly statement The said statement shall be approved / amended by the Engineer in such a way that, in his opinion, it reflects the amounts due to the Contractor in accordance with the Contract. Within the 7th day following each completed quarter for the work executed during that quarter, the Engineer shall determine the amounts due to the Contractor and shall issue to the Contractor a certificate herein called "Interim Payment Certificate", certifying the amounts due to the contractor. 1.5 Payment schedule The payment shall be made to contractor on quarterly basis as per the payment schedule given below:

Quarter Maximum Cumulative Payment Limit

( % of Contract Value)

Remarks

1 15

2 30

3 45

4 60

5 70

6 80 Completion of works and start of defect liability period

7 to 14 100 20 % of the contract values is reserved for the cumulative operation and maintenance during the defect liability period of two years. This amount shall be released in equal quarterly installment during the defect liability period.

The payment shall be released to the contractor as per the above payment schedule subject to satisfactory completion of work as per the work plan, submission of all quarterly statement along with all necessary documents and issue of Interim Payment Certifcate by the Engineer. The payment will be released after making necessary deductions as per the provisions of the tender document. Note : The quarterly payment to be released to the contractor shall be subject to the maximum cumulative payment limit or Interim payment certificate, which ever is lowest. 1.6 Place of Payments Payments to the Contractor shall be made by the THSTI in Indian Rupees into a bank account or accounts nominated by the Contractor or by Account Payee Cheque/Demand Draft. 1.7 Retention Money A retention amounting to 10 (Ten) percent of the amounts, determined in accordance with the procedure set out in Sub-Clause 1.2 (e) shall be made by the Engineer in the first and following Interim Payment Certificates, until the amount so retained reaches a limit of retention money (5% of Contract Price) as stated in the Appendix to Tender (Annexure - XIV). 1.8 Payment of Retention Money Retention money shall be released to the contractor upon successful completion of all the terms and conditions of the contract including the Defect Liability Period of two years by the contractor.

1.9 Time of Payment The amount due to the Contractor under any Interim Payment Certificate issued by the Engineer pursuant to this Clause, or to any other term of the Contract, shall, be paid by the Employer to the Contractor within 15 days after the Contractor's quarterly statement has been submitted to the Engineer for certification or, in the case of theFinal Certificate, within 30 days after the agreed Final Statement and written discharge have been submitted to the Engineer for certification.

1.10 Correction of Certificates

26

The Engineer may by any Interim Payment Certificate make any correction or modification in any previous Interim payment Certificate which has been issued by him, and shall have authority, if any work is not being carried out to his satisfaction, to omit or reduce the value of such work in any Interim Payment Certificate.

1.11 Statement of Completion Not later than 84 days after the issue of the Taking-Over Certificate in respect of the whole of the Works, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer a Statement of Completion with supporting documents showing in detail, in the form approved by the Engineer.

(a) the final value of all work done in accordance with the Contract up to the date stated in such Taking-

Over Certificate;

(b) any further sums which the Contractor considers to be due; and

(c) an estimate of amounts which the Contractor considers will become due to him under the Contract.

Estimated amounts shall be shown separately in such Statement at Completion. The Engineer shall certify payment in

accordance with Sub-Clause 1.2 to 1.4 as stated above. 1.12 Final Statement Not later than 56 days after the issue of the Defects Liability Certificate, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for consideration a draft final statement with supporting documents showing in detail, in the form approved by the Engineer.

(a) the value of all work done in accordance with the Contract; and

(b) any further sums which the Contractor considers to be due to him under the Contract. If the Engineer disagrees with or cannot verify any part of the draft final statement, the Contractor shall submit such further information as the Engineer may reasonably require and shall make such changes in the draft as may be agreed between them. The Contractor shall then prepare and submit to the Engineer the final statement as agreed (for the purposes of these Conditions referred to as the "Final Statement").If, following discussions between the Engineer and the Contractor and any changes to the draft final statement which may be agreed between them, it becomes evident that a dispute exists, the engineer shall issue an Interim Payment Certificate for those parts of the draft final statement which are not in dispute. The dispute shall then be settled in accordance with the terms of the tender document, if avialable or CPWD norms as applicable. The Final Statement shall be agreed upon settlement of the dispute. 1.13 Discharge Upon submission of the Final Statement, the Contractor shall give to the Employer, with a copy to the Engineer, a written discharge confirming that the total of the Final Statement represents full and final settlement of all monies due to the Contractor arising out of or in respect of the contract. Provided that such discharge shall become effective only after payment due under the Final Certificate has been made and the performance security referred has been returned to the Contractor. 1.14 Final Certificate Within 28 days after receipt of the Final Statement, and the written discharge, the Engineer shall issue to the employer (with a copy to the Contractor) a Final Certificate stating:

(a) the amount which, in the opinion of the Engineer, is finally due under the Contract, and

(b) after giving credit to the Employer for all amounts previously paid by the Employer and for all sums

to which the Employer is entitled under the Contract, the balance, if any, due from the Employer to

the Contractor or from the Contractor to the Employer as the case may be.

1.15 Cessation of Employer's Liability The Employer shall not be liable to the Contractor for any matter or thing arising out of or in connection with the Contract or execution of the Works, unless the Contractor shall have included a claim in respect thereof in his Final Statement and (except in respect of matters of things arising after the issue of the Taking-Over Certificate in respect of the whole of the Works) in the Statement at Completion referred above.

1.16 Defects Liability Certificate The Contract shall not be considered as completed until a Defects Liability Certificate shall have been signed by the Engineer and delivered to the Employer, with a copy to the Contractor, stating the date on which the

27

Contractor shall have completed his obligations to execute and complete Works and remedy any defects therein to the Engineer's satisfaction. The Defects Liability Certificate shall be given by the Engineer within 28 days after the expiration of the Defects Liability Period, or, if different defects liability periods shall become applicable to different sections or part of the Permanent Works, the expiration of the latest such period, or as soon thereafter as any works instructed their under, have been completed to the satisfaction of the Employer.

1.17 Unfulfilled Obligations Notwithstanding the issue of the Defects Liability Certificate the Contractor and the Employer shall remain liable for the fulfilment of any obligation incurred under the provisions of the Contract prior to the issue of the Defects Liability Certificate which remains unperformed at the time such Defects Liability Certificate is issued and, for the purpose of determining the nature and extent of any such obligation, the Contract shall be deemed to remain in force between the parties to the Contract.

2.0 Variation in Price

No Variation shall be payable in price on account of labour, material or on any other account. Also no

variation/escalation shall be payable on account of time over run if any in completion.

3.0 Taxation

The Contractor shall pay all taxes, duties, levies, work contract tax etc. of the Government provisions of the Income tax

Act or as per the advice of the Income Tax Authority. Deduction of Income tax/ Works Contract tax/ other taxes shall

be made from each certificate of payment as per the relevant provisions of the Income tax Act or as per the advice of

the Income tax Authority/ other Competent Authority. Any applicable tax exemption certificates provided to THSTI

would be provided to the contractor for respective material cluster according to the rules and regulations stated by Govt.

of India / local state Govt. authority.

4.0 Architect for the civil works of the project

M/s Suresh Goel and Associates are the architects for the NCR Biotech Science Cluster. In order to harmonize the BSL-

3 building and associated services with the rest of the campus it is mandatory that the contractor (final awardee) works

with the same architect firm for all civil construction related work, the payments for which shall be directly made by

THSTI to the architect. The finalized drawing for the facility shall be obtained from the said architect for execution of

civil work. The architect shall have the responsibility to ensure that the civil construction is in line with the other

buildings of NCR-BSC. However, the contractor shall be fully liable for the correctness of the drawing provided by the

architect.

5.0 Compliance of Statutory Obligations for obtaining completion Certificates:

The Contractor shall comply all the statutory obligations and obtain all required clearances to implement the project

without any financial repercussions to Employer and ensure all follow up actions with the local authorities in this

respect for smooth completion of the project. All statutory charges to get any NOC, clearances from local authorities to

be obtained by the contractor and the charges towards the NOC shall be reimbursed after submitting the

bills/documentary evidences along with RA bills/final bill. The contractor is required to obtain all NOC, completion &

Occupancy certificates from respective local bodies, if any as under:

i) Pollution control Board, ii) Environment clearances, iii) NOC form fire department, iv) Lift licence, v) Chief

Electrical Inspector CEA, vi) Municipal authority vii) Airport Authority, viii) Tree cutting, ix) Explosive

department, x) concerned authority for water and sewer connection, xi) And any other statutory requirement to

occupy the building and run the services in all respect. Contractor shall organise all inspections of concerned

authorities & obtain the NOC’s within the time for completion.

The contractor is required to submit the relevant drawings like completion / as built Drawings and any other

statutory documentary requirements of local bodies in copies as per requirement to obtain the above etc. at their

own cost.

6.0 Guarantee and Defects Liability Period

The entire BSL-3 Laboratory works including all the equipments, systems, services and components as a whole shall be

guaranteed for its performance and against any manufacturing defects up to the expiry of Defect Liability Period. The

defects liability period shall be valid for a period of 2 (Two) Years from the date of Completion of works and taking

28

over of the works by the employer. The contractor shall guarantee that all the works, equipments, systems, services and

components shall be free from any defect due to defective materials and bad workmanship or any other cause and that

the equipments and systems shall work satisfactorily and the performance and efficiencies of the equipments and

systems shall not be less than the approved values. Any part found defective during the defects liability period shall be

repaired /replaced by the contractor at his own expense. The services of the contractors personnel during this period for

such work shall be assumed to be included in the contract value. If the defects are not remedied within a reasonable

time mentioned in the written notice, the Employer may proceed to do so at the contractors risk and expenses without

prejudice to any other rights. Joint inspection reports shall also be deemed as written notice for this purpose.

7.0 Comprehensive Maintenance & Operation Services

After Taking Over of the BSL-3 Laboratory, the contractor shall provide comprehensive operation and maintenance

services for a period of 2 years during the defect liability period. The comprehensive operation and maintenance

services provided by the contractor shall include providing trained manpower, accessories, tools, tackles, all spares and

all consumables, replacement of defective parts, carrying out routine and preventive maintenance and servicing of the

equipments and systems etc. complete in all respect (excluding only power and water which shall be provided by the

employer). The charges for providing 2 (two) year comprehensive operation and maintenance services shall be included

in the quoted rates and nothing over and extra shall be paid to the contractor on this account.

An amount equal to 20% of the finally approved contract value of the turnkey project shall be reserved for providing the

comprehensive operation services for a period of 2 years and the payment of the same shall be made to the contractor in

equal quarterly instalments during the defects liability period subject to complete satisfaction of the employer.

8.0 Right of Employer to Determine & Terminate Contract

The Employer, shall at any time, be entitled to determine and terminate the contract, after giving due notice, if in its

opinion the cessation of the work becomes necessary owing to any cause, whatsoever, in which case the cost of

approved materials at the site at current market rates as verified and approved by Engineer and of the value of the work

done to date by the contractor shall be paid for in full at the rates specified in the contract. A notice in writing from the

Employer to the contractor of such determination and termination and the reason therefore shall be the conclusive proof

of the fact that the contract has been so determined and terminated by Employer.

Should the contract be determined under sub clause 8.0 above and the contractor claims payments to compensate

expenditure incurred by him in the expectation of completing the whole of the work, the Engineer shall consider and

admit such claims, as are deemed fair and reasonable and are supported by vouchers to his satisfaction. The decision of

Employer on the necessity and propriety of any such expenditure shall be final and conclusive and be binding on the

contractor.

8.1 Defect liability period in case of termination of contract

In case of termination of contract, the defect labiality period in respect of the completed portions of the works shall commence

immediately after the issue of termination notice by the Employer.

8.2 Comprehensive operation in case of termination of contract

In case of termination of contract for reasons attributable to the employer, THSTI reserves the right to invoke clause 7.0 pertaining to

comprehensive operation and contractor will be bound of provide operational service in respect of such completed portions of the

works as deemed necessary and required by THSTI. The payment for providing operation services in such case will be reduced to

20% of the value of completed portions of the works in respect of which the comprehensive operational service is solicited by

THSTI.

29

ANNEXURE-I

APPLICATION FORM

[NOTE: On the letterhead of the applicant including full postal address, email address, telephone no. and fax no.]

Date: ______________

The Executive Director

THSTI,

Plot No. 496, Udyog Vihar,

Phase – III, Gurgaon - 122016

Sirs,

1. Being duly authorised to represent and act on behalf of ………………………….. (hereinafter referred to as

“the Applicant”) and having reviewed and fully understood all the pre-qualification information provided, the

undersigned hereby applies to be pre-qualified by yourselves as a bidder for the Design, construction, testing,

commissioning, validation, and other associated works of the Bio-Safety Level-3 (BSL-3) laboratory facility

on a turnkey basis and its comprehensive operation during the defect liability period of two years at the NCR

Biotech Science Cluster (NCR-BSC), Faridabad, Haryana.

2. Attached to this letter are copies or original documents defining:

(a) the applicant’s legal status

(b) the principal place of business

(c) the place of incorporation (for applicants who are corporations) or the place of registration and the

nationality of the owners (for applicants who are partnerships or individually owned firms)

(d) Annexure no. II to IX

3. Your agency and its authorized representatives are hereby authorized to conduct any inquiries or investigations

to verify the statements, documents and information submitted in connection with this application, and to seek

clarification from our bankers and clients regarding any financial and technical aspects. This letter of

application will also serve as authorization to any individual or authorized representative or any institution

referred to in the supporting information, to provide such information deemed necessary and requested by you

to verify statements and information provided in this application, or with regard to the resources, experience,

and competence of the Applicant.

4. Your agency and its authorized representatives may contact the following persons for further information on

general, personnel, technical and financial enquiries.

Contact 1 : Name, email and Phone no.

Contact 2: Name, email and phone no.

5. This application is made with the full understanding that:

(a) Bids submitted by applicants will be subject to verification of all information submitted at the time of

bidding

(b) Your agency reserves the right to:

amend the scope and value of the contract / bid under this project; in such event, bids will

only be called from pre-qualified bidders who meet the revised requirements; and

reject or accept any application, cancel the pre-qualification process, and reject all

applications without assigning reasons or incurring any liability thereof; and

(c) Your agency shall not be liable for any such actions and shall be under no obligation to inform the

applicant.

6. The undersigned declares that statements made and the information provided in the duly completed application

are true and correct in every detail.

Signed and sealed, Name ……………………………….

For and on behalf of ……………………………………

30

ANNEXURE-II

GENERAL INFORMATION

1.

Name of firm

2 Head office address

3

Telephone | Contact

4

Fax | E-mail No.

5

Place of incorporation/ | Year of incorporation/ registration

Registration

Signature and seal of the Authorized Signatory of the bidder

31

ANNEXURE-III

STRUCTURE OF THE ORGANIZATION

1. Name & address of the applicant :

2. Telephone No. / Fax No. / Email :

3. Legal status of the applicant (attach copies of original document defining the legal status):

(a) An individual

(b) A proprietor firm

(c) A firm in partnership

(d) A Limited Company or Corporation.

4. Particulars of registration with various Government bodies (attach attested photocopy)

Organisation / Place of registration : Registration No.:

5. Name and titles of Directors& Officers with designation to be concerned with this work:

6. Designation of individuals authorised to act for the organization:

7. Was the applicant ever required to suspend construction for a period of more than six months continuously

after commenc the construction? If so, give the name of the project and reasons of suspension of work.

8. Has the applicant ever abandoned the awarded work before its completion? If so, give name of the project and

reasons for abandonment.

9. Has the applicant ever been debarred / black listed for tendering in any organisation at any time? If so, give

details.

10. Has the applicant ever been convicted by a court of law? If so, give details.

11. Any other information considered necessary but not included above.


32

ANNEXURE - IV

PERSONNEL CAPABILITIES


Sl.

No Designation Total

Number

Number

available

for this

work

Name Qualification Professional

experience

Remarks

33

ANNEXURE - V

EQUIPMENT CAPABILITIES

(Details of construction plant and equipment likely to be used in carrying out the work)

S

.

N.

Name of equipment Nos Capacity Age Condition Ownership status Curre

nt

Locat

ion

Rema

rks Presently

owned

Leased To be

purchas

ed

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

1.Excavators (various sizes)

1.Tower 2.Builder’s hoist

1.Concrete batching plant 2.Concrete pump 3.Concrete transit mixer 4.Concrete mixer (diesel) 5.Concrete mixer (electrical) 6. Needle vibrator (electrical) 7. Needle vibrator (petrol) 8. Table vibrator (elect. / petrol)

1. Block making machine 2. Bar bending machine 3. Bar cutting machine 4. Wood thickness planer 5. Drilling machine 6. Circular saw machine 7. Welding generators 8. Welding transformer 9. Cube testing machines 10. M.S. Pipes 11. Steel shuttering 12. Steel scaffolding 13. Grinding/polishing

machines

1. Tippers 2. Trucks

1. Air compressor (diesel)

1. Pump (diesel) 2. Pump (electric)

1. Diesel generators (Any other plant/equipment)


34

ANNEXURE - VI

FINANCIAL CAPABILITIES

Financial Year Annual Turn Over in Indian Rupees ( or equivalent to Indian

Rupees ) as per Audited Balance Sheet

2010-2011 Rs.

2011-2012 Rs.

2012-2013 Rs.

Average Annual Turnover over

the past three years

Rs.

Financial Information in

Rs. Equivalent

For year

2008-

2009

For year

2009-2010

For year

2010-

2011

For year

2011-12

For year

2012-13

1. Total Assets

2. Current Assets

3. Total Liabilities

4. Current Liabilities

5. Profit before Tax

6. Profit after Tax

7. Net Worth

NOTE : The above data is to be supported by audited balance sheets

1. Attach copies of audited balance sheets duly certified by the chartered accountant for all three

years (2010-11, 2011-12&2012-13). Audited Balance sheet should mention the membership

number of chartered accountant issued by ICAI along with full address.

2. Attach recent solvency certificate from bankers. The certificate should be not more than one

year old from the date of submission of bid.


35

ANNEXURE – VII

EXPERIENCE OF COMPLETION OF PROJECTS OF SIMILAR NATURE & COMPLEXITY

(During last seven years ending last day of month previous to the one in which applications are invited)

Sl.

No.

Name

of

work /

project

and

location

Owner or

sponsoring

organization

Cost of

work in

Lakhs

Date of

commencement

as per contract

Stipulated

date of

completion

Actual

date

of

completion

Name and

address/

telephone

number of

officer to

whom

reference

may be

made

Remarks

NOTE : Please attach supporting documents (completion certificates along with order copies) for the above

information


36

ANNEXURE - VIII

LITIGATION DETAILS (COURT CASES/ARBITRATION)

Year Name of

the work

Name of

the Client,

with

Address

Title of the

court

Case/Arbitration

Detail of

the

Court/

Arbitrator

Status

Pending/

Decided

Disputed Amount

(Current Value,

the equivalent) in

case of Court

Cases/arbitration

Actual Awarded

Amount (Rs) in

decided Court

Cases/arbitration

Signature and seal of Authorized Signatory of bidder

37

S.No Criteria Requirements Page no. at

which required

information is

available (To

be mentioned)

Indicate

Eligibilit

y

Y / N

1 Average Turnover for last

three years

Copies of audited balance sheets certified by the chartered

accountant along with Membership no for all three years

(2010-11, 2011-2012 & 2012-13).

2 Experience Experience of having successfully completed similar work

during last seven years.

3 Experience A Certificate from client for completion of work(s) against

single work order must be submitted along with application

4 Personnel Capabilities

List of suitable qualified and experienced personnel in relevant

field

5 Equipment Capabilities

List of equipment required and proposed to be deployed &

source of such equipments

6 Financial Capability Net worth positive for all the five years Profit earning for all the five years

7 Solvency Certificate Solvency certificate from applicant’s bank for minimum Rs. 4.35 crore. The certificate should not be more than one year old.

8. Abandoning /

Blacklisting

Information regarding not abandoned /Black listing for any work

of Union Govt./State Govt./ PSU’s etc. during last 5

years and

The applicant should provide information regarding litigation/

Arbitration cases for the last five years as per ANNEXURE-VIII

9. Tender document fee, in case down loaded from web site

Rs. 1500/- in form of DD/Banker’s Cheque in favour of THSTI payable at Gurgaon

10 Bid Security In terms of DD 11 Tender Documents All volumes of tender documents submitted in the respective

envelopes as specified in NIT including amendments, if an y

ANNEXURE-IX

Check List

38

ANNEXURE - X

PROFORMA OF INDENTURE FOR SECURED ADVANCE OR CREDIT

THIS INDENTURE made this day of -------------------------------------- between M/s. -------------------------------------------- (hereinafter called the Contractor) which expression shall where the Context as admits or implies be deemed to include his executors/ administrators and assigns of the one part and THSTI (hereinafter called the Employer) which expression shall where the context so admits or implies be deemed to include its successors and assigns of the other part. Whereas by an agreement dated----------------(hereinafter called the said agreement) the Contractor has agreed to construct------------- ( the works or the said works). And whereas the Contractor has applied to the Employer that he may be or be given credit for materials brought by him to the site of the works subject to the said agreement for use in construction of the works. NOW THIS INDENTURE WITNESSETH that in pursuance of the said agreement and in consideration of the sum of Rs.------------------- paid to the Contractor by The Employer. The receipt where the Contractor hereby acknowledges and of such advance or credited (if any) as may be made to him as aforesaid the Contractor hereby covenants and agrees with The Employer and declares as follows :- 1. That all sums given as advance or credit by The Employer to the Contractor as aforesaid shall be employed by the Contractor in or towards the execution of the said works and for no other purpose whatsoever. 2. That the materials for which the advance or credit is given are offered to and accepted by The Employer as security and are absolutely the Contractor's own property and free from encumbrances of any kind and the Contractor will not make any application for or receive further advance or credit on the security of materials which are not absolutely his own property and free from encumbrances of any kind and the Contractor shall indemnify The Employer against any claims to any materials in respect of which advance or credit has been made to him as aforesaid. 3. That the said materials and all other materials on the security of which any further advance or advances or credit may be given as aforesaid (hereinafter called the said materials) shall be used by the Contractor solely in the execution of the said works in accordance with the directions of The Employer and in terms of said agreement.

4. That the Contractor shall make at his own cost all necessary and adequate arrangements for

the proper safe custody and protection against all risks of the said materials and that until used in

the construction as aforesaid the materials shall remain at the site of the said works in Contractor's

custody and on his own responsibility and shall at all times be open to inspection by The Employer. In the

event of the materials or any part thereof being stolen, destroyed or damaged or becoming deteriorated in

greater degree than in due to reasonable use and wear thereof the Contractor will replace the same with

other materials of like quality or repair and make good the same as required by The Employer.

5. That the said materials shall not on any account be removed from the site of the work except with the

written permission of The Employer.

6. That the advance shall be repayable in full when or before Contractor receives payments from The

Employer of the price payable to him for the said works under the terms and provisions of the said

agreements. Provided that if any intermediate payments are made to the Contractor on account of work

done then on the occasion of each payment The Employer will be at liberty to make a recovery from the

Contractor's bill for such payments by deducting there from the value of the said materials than actually

used in the contraction and in respect of which recovery has not been made previously. The value for

this purpose being determined in respect of each description of materials at the rates at which the amounts

of the advance as made under these presents were calculated.

39

7. That if the Contractor shall at any time make any default in the performance of observance

in respect of any of the terms and provisions of the said agreement or of those provisions the

total amount of the advance or advances that may still be owing to The Employer, shall immediately

on the happening of such default be repayable by the Contractor to The Employer together with

interest thereon at 18% per annum from the date or respective dates of such advance or advances to the

date of payment and with all costs. Damages and expenses incurred by The Employer in or for the

recovery hereof or the enforcement of the security or otherwise by reasons of default of the Contractor

and the Contractor hereby covenants and agrees with The Employer repay and pay the same respective

to him accordingly.

8. That the Contractor hereby charges all the said materials with the repayment to The Employer

of all sums advances or credit as aforesaid and all costs. Charges, damages and expenses payable under

these presents PROVIDED ALWAYS it is hereby agreed and declared that notwithstanding anything in

the said agreement and without prejudice to the powers contained therein if and whenever the covenant

for payment and repayment herein before contained shall become enforceable and the money owing shall

not be paid in accordance therewith.The Employer may at any time thereafter adopt all or any of the following

courses as he may deem best :

a. Seize and utilise the said materials or any part thereof in the completion of the said works in

accordance with the provisions in that behalf contained in the said agreement debiting the Contractor with

the actual cost of effecting such completion and the amount due in respect of advance or credit under

these presents and crediting the Contractor with the value of work done as if he has carried it out in

accordance with the said agreement and the rates thereby provided if the balance is against the Contractor

is to pay the same to The Employer on demand.

b. Remove and sell by public auction the seized materials or any part thereof and out of the money

arising from the sale repay The Employer under these presents and pay over the surplus (if any) to the

Contractor.

c. Deduct all or any part of the moneys owing from any sums due to the Contractor under said

agreement.

9. Except in the event of such default on the part of Contractor as aforesaid, interest or the said

advance shall not be payable.

10. That in the event of conflict between the provisions of these presents and the said agreements, the

provisions of these presents shall prevail and in the event of any dispute or difference arising over

the construction or effect of these presents, the settlement of which has not been hereinbefore expressly

provided for the same shall so far as is lawful be referred to Executive Director, Translational Heath

Science and Technology Institute or to such person as he may appoint whose decision shall be final and

the provisions of the Indian Arbitration Act for the time being in force shall apply to such reference.

IN WITNESS whereof the said The Employer and the Contractor hereunto set their respective hands and seals the day and year first above written. Signed sealed and delivered by Contractor The Employer

40

ANNEXURE - XI

FORM OF AGREEMENT

This Agreement made the ___________ day of ____________ 2014_________________________between

Translational Health Science and Technology Institute (THSTI), Gurgaon- Haryana for the Design, Construction,

testing, commissioning and, validation of Bio-safety level 3 (BSL-3)Laboratory & associated works on “Turnkey

Basis” and its Comprehensive Operation during the defect liability period of 2 years at NCR Biotech Science Cluster

(NCR-BSC), Faridabad, Haryana (hereinafter called "The Employer" ) who enters into this Agreement of the one part

and M/s............................................................................................................................................... ................................

(hereinafter called "The Contractor") of the other part.

Whereas the Employer is desirous that certain works should be executed by the Contractor, viz

_______________________ ("the Works") and has accepted a Bid by the Contractor for the execution and completion

of the works and the remedying of any defects therein.

Now this Agreement witnessed as follows:

1. In this Agreement words and expressions shall have the same meanings as are respectively assigned to them in

the Conditions of Contract hereinafter referred to.

2. The following documents shall be deemed to form and be read and construed as part of this Agreement, viz :

(a) The Letter of Award;

(b) The said Bid;

(c) The General Conditions of Contract;

(d) Prequalification document

(e) Instructions to Tenderers and Specific Conditions of Contract;

(f) The Specification;

(g) The Drawings;

(h) The Priced Bill of Quantities;

(i) Any other relevant documents referred to in this Agreement or in the aforementioned documents

3. In consideration of the payments to be made by the Employer to the Contractor as hereinafter mentioned, the

Contractor hereby covenants with the Employer to execute and complete the Works and remedy any defects therein in

conformity in all respects with the provisions of the Contract.

4. The Employer hereby covenants to pay the Contractor in consideration of the execution and completion of the

Works and the remedying of defects therein the Contract Price or only such other sums as may become payable under

the provisions of the Contract at the times and in the manner prescribed by the Contract.

In Witness whereof the parties hereto have caused this Agreement to be executed the day and year first before written.

Signed, Sealed, and Delivered by the Said

_______________________________________________________

Binding Signature for and on behalf of THSTI-Gurgaon

Binding Signature of Contractor ________________________

In the presence of

Witness (1) :

Witness (2) :

41

ANNEXURE - XII

PROFORMA FOR PERFORMANCE BANK GUARANTEE (On a stamp paper of appropriate value from any Nationalised Bank or Scheduled Bank)

To, Executive Director

Translational Health Science and Technology Institute (THSTI), Plot No. 496, Udyog Vihar, Phase-III, Gurgaon - 122016. Dear Sir,

In consideration of the Translational Health Science and Technology Institute (THSTI), Gurgaon-Haryana for

Design, Construction, testing, commissioning and, validation of Bio-safety level 3 (BSL-3)Laboratory & associated

works on “Turnkey Basis” and its Comprehensive Operation during the defect liability period of 2 years at NCR

Biotech Science Cluster (NCR-BSC), Faridabad, Haryana having awarded to M/S_____________________________

(hereinafter referred to as the said Contractor or `Contractor' which expression shall wherever the subject or context so

permits include its successors and assignees) a Contract No _____________ vide letter No.______________

dated__________ and the General Conditions of Contract and upon the condition of the Contractor's furnishing

Security for the performance of the Contractor's obligations and discharge of the Contractor's liability under and in

connection with the said Contract upto a sum of Rs. ______________________ (Rupees

_________________________________only) amounting to ________percent of the total Contract value.

1. We,___________________________________________(hereinafter called `The Bank' which expression shall

include its successors and assignees) hereby jointly and severally undertake to guarantee the payment to the

Employer in rupees forthwith on demand in writing and without protest or demur or any and all moneys

payable by the Contractor to the Employer in respect of or in connection with the said Contract inclusive of all

the Employer's losses and damages and costs, (inclusive between attorney and client) charges and expenses and

other moneys payable in respect of the above as specified in any notice of demand made by the Employer to

the Bank with reference to this guarantee upto an aggregate limit of Rs.______________(Rupees

_____________ only).

2. We_______________________ Bank Ltd. further agree that the Employer shall be sole judge of and as to

whether the said Contractor has committed any breach or breaches of any of the terms and conditions of the

said Contract and the extent of loss, damage, cost, charges and expenses caused to or suffered by or that may

be caused to or suffered by the Employer on account thereof and the decision of the Employer that the said

Contractor has committed such breach or breaches and as to the amount or amounts of loss, damage, costs,

charges and expenses caused to or suffered by the Employer from time to time shall be final and binding on us.

3. The Employer shall be at liberty without reference to the Bank and without affecting the full liability of the

Bank hereunder to take any other Security in respect of the Contractor's obligations and liabilities hereunder or

to vary the Contract or the work to be done there under vis-a-vis the Contractor or to grant time or indulgence

to the Contractor or to reduce or to increase or otherwise vary the prices of the total Contract value or to

release or to forbear from enforcement of all or any of the Security and/or any other Security(ies) now or

hereafter held by The Employer and no such dealing(s) reduction(s) increase(s) or other indulgence(s) or

arrangements with the Contractor or release or forbearance whatsoever shall absolve the bank of the full

liability to the Employer hereunder or prejudice the rights of the Employer against the bank.

4. This guarantee shall not be determined or affected by the liquidation or winding up, dissolution, or change of

constitution or insolvency of the Contractor but shall in all respects and for all purposes be binding and

operative until payment of all monies payable to the Employer in terms thereof.

5. The bank hereby waives all rights at any time inconsistent with the terms of this guarantee and the obligations

of the Bank in terms hereof shall not be anywise affected or suspended by reason of any dispute or disputes

having been raised by the Contractor stopping or preventing or purporting to stop or prevent any payment by

the Bank to the Employer in terms hereof.

42

6. The amount stated in any notice of demand addressed by the Employer to the Bank as liable to be paid to the

Employer by the Contractor or as suffered or incurred by the Employer on account of any losses or damages or

costs, charges and/or expenses shall be conclusive evidence of the amount so liable to be paid to the Employer

or suffered or incurred by the Employer as the case may be and shall be payable by the Bank to The Employer

in terms hereof. 7. This guarantee shall be a continuing guarantee and shall remain valid and irrevocable for all claims of the

Employer and liabilities of the Contractor arising upto and until midnight of________________________.

8. This guarantee shall be in addition to any other guarantee or Security whatsoever that the Employer may now

or at any time anywise may have in relation to the Contractor's obligations/or liabilities under and/or in

connection with the said Contract, and the Employer shall have full authority to have recourse to or enforce

this Security in preference to any other guarantee or Security which the Employer may have or obtain and no

forbearance on the part of the Employer in enforcing or requiring enforcement of any other Security shall have

the effect of releasing the Bank from its full liability hereunder.

9. It shall not be necessary for the Employer to proceed against the said Contractor before proceeding against the

Bank and the Guarantee herein contained shall be enforceable against the Bank notwithstanding that any

Security which The Employer may have obtained or obtain from the Contractor shall at the time when

proceedings are taken against the said bank hereunder be outstanding or unrealised.

10. We, the said Bank undertake not to revoke this guarantee during its currency except with the consent of the

Employer in writing and agree that any change in the constitution of the said Contractor or the said bank shall

not discharge our liability hereunder.

11. We___________________ the said Bank further that we shall pay forthwith the amount stated in the notice of

demand notwithstanding any dispute/difference pending between the parties before the arbitrator and/or that

any dispute is being referred to arbitration.

12. Notwithstanding anything contained herein above, our liability under this guarantee shall be restricted to

Rs.________________ (Rupees_________________________) and this guarantee shall remain in force

till___________________ and unless a claim is made on us within 3 months from that date, that is before

______________ all the claims under this guarantee shall be forfeited and we shall be relieved of and

discharged from our liabilities there under.

Dated____________________day of________________20________

For and on behalf of Bank.

Issued under seal :

43

ANNEXURE - XIII

PROFORMA FOR ADVANCE BANK GUARANTEE (On a stamp paper of appropriate value from any Nationalised Bank or Scheduled Bank)

To Executive Director

Translational Health Science and Technology Institute (THSTI), Plot No. 496, Udyog Vihar, Phase-III, Gurgaon - 122016.

Dear Sir, 1. In consideration of the ………………………………………………………………………………………….

(hereinafter called as THSTI) having agreed under the terms & conditions of Contract No.________________ dated_________ (hereinafter called the Contract or the said Contract) to make at the request of ("the Contractor" or "the said Contractor") the Contractor thereunder a lumpsum advance of Rs._____________for utilising it for the purposes of the said Contract on its furnishing a guarantee acceptable to THSTI.

2. We, the______________________Bank having its branch office at _________________

________________________ (hereinafter referred to as the Bank or the said Bank) a Company under the Companies Act 1956 and having our registered office at_______________________do hereby guarantee the repayment and recovery of the said advance together with interest thereon as provided according to the terms and conditions of the said Contract. If the Contractor fails to utilise the said advance for the purposes of the said Contract and/or the said advance together with interest thereon as aforesaid is not fully recovered by THSTI, we_______________________ Bank hereby unconditionally and irrevocably undertake to pay to THSTI on demand and without demur or protest to the extent of the said sum of Rs._______________with interest any claim made by the THSTI on us against non-utilisation/misutilisation of the said advance and/or by reason of THSTI not being able to recover in full the said sum of Rs.________________ with interest as aforesaid.

3. We,________________________Bank further agree that THSTI shall be the sole judge of and as to whether

the Contractor has utilised or not utilised the said advance or any part thereof for the purposes of the said Contract and/or as to whether the advance or any part thereof with interest has been recovered or not and the finding of the Consultant in this regard shall be final and binding on us.

4. We, the said Bank further agree that the Guarantee herein contained shall remain in full force and effect during

the period that would be taken for the performance of the said Contract and till the said advance has been fully recovered and its claims satisfied or discharged and till

THSTI certifies that the said advance with interest has been fully recovered from the Contractor. 5. THSTI shall have the fullest liberty without affecting in any way the liability of the said Bank under this

guarantee or Indemnity from time to time to vary any of the terms and conditions of the said Contract or the advance or to extend time of performance by the Contractor or to postpone for any time and from time to time any of the powers exercisable by it against the said Contractor and either to enforce or forbear from enforcing any of the terms and conditions governing the said Contract or the advance or securities available to THSTI and the said Bank shall not be released from its liability under these presents by any exercise by THSTI of the liberty with reference to the matter aforesaid or by reason of time being given to the said Contractor/or any other forbearance, act or omission on the part of THSTI or any indulgence by THSTI to the said Contractor or of any other matter or thing whatsoever which under the law relating to sureties would but for this provision have the effect of so releasing the said Bank from its said liability.

6. The Bank hereby waives all rights at any time inconsistent with the terms of this Guarantee and the obligations

of the Bank in terms hereof shall not be in any way affected or suspended by reason of any dispute or disputes having been raised by the Contractor (whether or not pending before any arbitrator, Tribunal or court) or any denial or liability by the Contractor stopping or preventing or purporting to stop or prevent any payment by the Bank to THSTI in terms thereof.

7. The amount stated in any notice of demand addressed by THSTI to the Bank as liable to be paid to THSTI by

the Contractor, shall be conclusive evidence of the amount so liable to be paid to THSTI by the Bank. 8. This guarantee/undertaking shall be in addition to any other guarantee or Security whatsoever that THSTI may

now or any time may have in relation to the Contractor's obligations or liabilities under and/or in connection with the said Contract, and THSTI shall have full authority to have recourse to or enforce this Security in preference to any other guarantee or Security which THSTI may have or obtain and no forbearance on the part

44

of THSTI in enforcing or requiring enforcement of any other Security shall have the effect of releasing the Bank from its full liability hereunder.

9. It shall not be necessary for THSTI to proceed against the said Contractor before proceeding against the Bank

and the guarantee herein contained shall be enforceable against the Bank notwithstanding that any Security which THSTI may have obtained or obtain from the Contractor shall at the time when proceedings are taken against the said Bank hereunder be outstanding or unrealised.

9 We, ______________________the said Bank undertake that we shall pay forthwith the amount stated in the

notice of demand notwithstanding any dispute/difference pending between the parties before the arbitrator and/or that any dispute is being referred to arbitration.

10 We, the said Bank undertake not to revoke this guarantee during its currency except with the consent of THSTI

in writing and agree that any change in the Constitution of the said Contractor or the said Bank shall not discharge our liability hereunder.

11 This guarantee/undertaking shall be a continuing guarantee/undertaking and shall remain valid and irrevocable

for all claims of THSTI and liabilities of the Contractor arising upto and until midnight of_______________________________________.

12 Not withstanding anything contained herein above, our liability under this guarantee shall

be restricted to Rs. ______________ alongwith interest due thereon (Rs.______________) with interest and this guarantee shall remain in full force till___________________ and unless a claim is made on us within 3 months from the date i.e. before___________________________all the claims under this guarantee shall be forfeited and we shall be relieved of and discharged from our liabilities hereunder.

Dated__________________day of________________20______ for and on behalf of Bank Issued under seal:

45

ANNEXURE – XIV

APPENDIX TO TENDER

Important Clause

Part No.

Clause No.

Remarks

Amount of performance

security B

12.1

5%of the contract Price

Mobilisation Advance D 1.1 5% of Contract Price

Amount of Liquidated damages C

18.1 1/2 % (half%) of contract

price per week of delay

Maximum Limit of liquidated

damages C

18.1 5% of contract price

Defect Liability Period C

21.1 24 months form the date

of issue of ‘Taking Over

Certificate’

Maximum limit of retention

money D

1.7 5% of the comtract price

Time of Completion C 17.1 18 (Eighteen) Calendar

months from Employer

order to commence the

works

Engineer IEE

46

PART –E

(TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION)

47

RESPONSIBILITY CHART FOR THE PROPOSED BSL-3 FACILITY CONSTRUCTION

S No SCOPE DEFINITATION CONTRACTOR THSTI

1 BSL 3 LAB AND PROCESS LAYOUT √

2 REVIEW OF PROCESS LAYOUT & ANY VALUE ADDITION PROPOSED BY CONTRACTOR

√

3 REVIEW OF PROCESS MODIFIED LAYOUT √

4 DETAIL ENGINEERING, HEATLOAD & AIR-FLOW DIAGRAM

√

5 FACILITY LAYOUT & DETAIL ENGINEERING DRGS. √

6 CIVIL AND ARCHITECTURAL LAYOUT DETAILING √

7 CIVIL & BUILDING STRUCTIRAL WORK √

8 STORAGE SPACE AT SITE √

9 HVAC, ELECTRICAL & BMS DETAIL DRAWING √

10 INTERIORS & CLEAN ROOM √

11 HVAC SYSTEM INCLUDING HIGH SIDE √

12 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM √

13 FIRE DETECTION, FIRE ALARM SYSTEM √

14 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM √

15 ALL UTILITIES INCLUDING UPS, DG √

16 UTILITY DISTRIBUTION PIPING SYSTEM & DRAIN √

17 BSL 3 LAB FURNITURES √

18 CLEANROOM PROTOCOL √

19 BIO SAFETY CABINET, IVC s, PASS BOXES AND AUTOCLAVE

√

20 SUPPLY OF 3 PHASE POWER TO MCC PANEL √

21 SUPPLY & DRAINAGE OF WATER TO/FROM FACILITY √

22 COMMISSIONING & TESTING OF FACILITY √

23 VALIDATION, CLEARANCE FROM STATUTORY AUTHORITIES.

√ √

24 COMPLETE DOCUMENTATION √ √

48

BASIS OF DESIGN

Station Name - Faridabad (Haryana)

Latitude - 22.4211

Longitude - 77.3178

Elevation - 214 M

Out side Conditions Summer : Dry bulb temperature 42.8C/109.04F

Wet Bulb Temperature 28.3C/82.94F

Monsoon : Dry bulb temperature 35.2C/95.36F


Winter : Dry bulb temperature 7.3C/45.14F


F. Inside Design Conditions :

Refer enclosed “ROOM DATA SHEET”

Additional Requirements:

Ventilation : 10 cfm per person

Lighting Load : 2w/ft2 in all areas ,3w/ft2 in OTs

Toilets/Labs - 10 air changes per hour

Kitchen -10 air changes per hour

Dirty utility Room - 10 air changes per hour

Based on the area wise detailed heat loads of the above design data and the details the

estimated loads are summarized as below :

=============================================================================

Sr.No. Area Description Area (ft2) Load TR

=============================================================================

1. Ground Floor 2834 370

2. First Floor 2834 Ventilated

=============================================================================

Total 145134 ft2 370 TR

49

SYSTEM DESIGN DATA

A. DESIGN PHLOSOPHY;

HVAC system in the BSL 3 Lab stands out for its complexities and stringent demands on indoor and

exhaust air quality, airflow patterns, cross contamination control, odour control and noise control etc.

The BSL 3 HVAC system further demands more care in energy aspects due to its longer hours of

operations.

The following factors have been considered for the design of HVAC services:

1 Individual and quickly responding temperature control for each area.

2 Draft-free air distribution.

3 Once thru and 100% fresh air with total filtered/decontaminated exhaust philosophy. 4 Fresh air or makeup air supply to maintain IAQ.

5 Humidity control

6 Acceptable noise level.

7 Separate AHU’s for different zones to avoid cross contamination

8 Global standards recommended by WHO should be prime consideration.

To effectively design an HVAC system for this BSL 3 facility building, the design is made as per

the building layout and the departmental areas or zones. These zones are broadly classified as

follows.

1. Non-BSL 3 Administration/Faculty : For general official use.

2. BSL 3 Lab Area : TB-BSL 3 Lab / Virus BSL 3 Lab

Animal Holding / Autoclave section.

3. Procedure & Change area : Specific entry to controlled BSL 3 lab area ZONING :

From the isolation point of view, the building area will be segregated into the following zones.

Sensitive areas BSL 3 lab units, Animal Holding & experimental area etc.

Non-BSL 3 lab, general administration & academic areas

The individual requirements of the above will be considered for designing the system

B. ROOM DATA SHEET:

The system design, basis of design, requirements and other relevant data are outlined in

this section. The detailed specifications and specific requirements are outlined in the

subsequent sections.

50

C. Location:

The proposed BSL & ABSL 3 lab set up is coming up at “Health Biotech Science Cluster” in

Faridabad, Haryana

D. Scope of works :

Following works will be carried out as civil / structural / Electrical / Interior clean room /

HVAC system and Building automation works and other associated required for setting

up new BSL 3 laboratory facility:

All civil work for New building, including earth excavation, RCC, brickwork, internal & external cement plaster, internal brick partitions, metallic panel wall for internal walls in classified areas only. It includes C.C. flooring, cement coving wherever required.

Building shall be designed for 2 storied building.

Chillers shall be placed at GF technical area and on RCC roof and Cooling tower at ground level. Rest all HVAC equipment shall be placed on in dedicated technical plant room at G.F.

AHUs shall be installed on suitable civil-structural platform.

This is a design-built, turnkey project that includes designing, engineering, construction,

erection, commissioning, testing, validation-documentation, comprehensive

maintenance and operation (till 24 months from date of successful handing over of the

BSL3 facility at the Health Biotech Science Cluster at Faridabad).

Facility design will include civil works for the construction of building shell and internal

partitioning using double skin PUF in filled sandwich panels and all allied works

necessary for completion, commissioning and comprehensive maintenance (for an initial

period of 2 years) of electrical, HVAC, BMS and air filtration system for maintaining

desired negative pressure gradients, point wirings, gas piping connections, IBMS, fire

detection system, access control system, communication system for intercoms and data,

CCTV system, and appropriate UPS for critical operations.

A 2-story building to house the BSL3 labs is proposed. The first floor will have the two

BSL3 labs of ~150 sq. mt. each and the ground floor will have the respective technical;

area including plant room areas.

M/s Suresh Goel and Associates (http://sgadesignlab.com) are the architects for the

campus and the vendor is required to get the architectural and structural design/details

for the civil construction part of the project from them to ensure that this facility is in

harmony with the rest of the campus. The architect fee shall be paid by THSTI directly to

M/s Suresh Goel and Associates. However, it is solely the vendor’s responsibility to

commission and provide maintenance to the project and get appropriate regulatory

clearances.

51

To execute all incidental work at site including material supply at site associated with the

system asked in the specifications.

Nature of such works will be Modular clean room, HVAC High Side / Low Side, Sheet

metal ductwork, Air distribution devices viz. Grilles and Diffusers , CHW M.S Piping with

insulation, copper refrigerant piping and its insulation , drain piping etc., incidental civil

works, incidental electrical works ,cable , control panel etc. at site for all manufactured

items at works and also items fabricated at site.

Routine Testing, pressure testing of fabricated components, commissioning, testing and

validation of complete BSL 3 lab facility at site.

The BSL 3 Lab will be tested in “As-Built” Condition for the following parameters:

Room Negative Pressure

Room Temperature & RH

Air Changes Rate

Exhaust HEPA Installation leak- DOP

Particulate count

Room Illumination

Door Interlock Verification

BMS Interlocks / Alarm

1. Interlock of Supply AHU with Exhaust Blower

2. Verification of alarm for malfunctioning of AU, Exhaust fan

Electrical parameter for various motors (Volt and amp)

Fire safety and security system check with interlock operation

52

BSL 3 LAB PERFORMANCE TESTING

1. BSL3 LAB TEST PROTOCOL:

Protocols to be followed:

a) The BSL3 lab room is closed for entry to other persons except for the testing personnel (2 persons from customer and 2 from M+W Zander).

b) The BSL3 lab protocols have to be followed which includes that all personnel should have over-coats, caps and shoe covers.

c) Un-interrupted electrical power is available for the entire duration of testing. d) Responsible persons are available from client/ user to witness the testing. e) Arrangements for overstaying of the personnel for carrying out the testing must be ensured

prior to testing. f) Smoking/ Tea/ Coffee/ Eating/ functions are strictly prohibited in the lab. g) System (including Chiller, AHU etc) shall be working continuously for 5-7 days prior to testing

and entry to lab shall be restricted during that period. Regular cleaning / wet moping to be done inside cleanroom during this period.

2. TESTING PROCEDURES: The BSL3 Lab will be tested in “As Built” Condition for the following parameters:

Room Negative Pressure

Room Temperature & RH

Air Changes Rate

Exhaust HEPA Installation leak

Particulate count

Room Illumination

Door Interlock Verification

BMS Interlocks / Alarm

3. Interlock of Supply AHU with Exhaust Blower

4. Verification of alarm for malfunctioning of AU, Exhaust fan

Electrical parameter for various motors (Volt and amp)

2.1 Room Negative Pressure Test:

2.1.1 General Guide Lines for the Test: The purpose of this test is to verify the capability of the BSL3 Lab to maintain the specified

negative pressure in the BSL3 room. The Pressure cascades are to be maintained between the

53

rooms to avoid cross contamination. This test should be performed after the facility has met the

acceptance criteria for airflow quantity and air balancing for each room.

2.1.2 Instrument: DP sensors readings from BMS terminal.

2.1.3 Test Procedure: Keep the doors closed. Pressure readings are taken at different locations at 2 Hour interval in each room Measure and record the pressure differential between the room and the atmosphere.

2.1.4 Report: Tabulated sheet of the Negative Pressure readings

2.1.5 Acceptance: The test is considered acceptable if, the room negative pressure readings measured are within

design limits.

2.2 TEMPERATURE AND HUMIDITY TEST: The purpose of this test is to determine the capability of the system to control Temperature &

RH uniformity as per specification.

2.2.1 Instrument: Sling Psychrometer.

2.2.2 Test Procedure: This test is performed after the airflow test has been completed. Temperature readings (DBT and WBT) are taken at different locations at 2 Hour interval in

each room. Relative Humidity (RH) is noted from table and recorded.

2.2.3 Reporting: The readings of Temperature & Humidity are to be recorded in the specified format for every 2

hr.

2.2.4 Acceptance: The test is considered acceptable if, Temperature variation is within the range specified (23

±2ºC). Relative humidity not crossing the specified limits (55 ±5%).

AIR CHANGES TEST:

2.3.1 General Guide Lines For The Test: The test is performed to determine the supply air quantity across the SA Diffusers & air change

rate in the room. Measurement to be taken for all SA Diffusers.

2.3.2 Instrument: Vane type anemometer.

54

2.3.3 Test Procedure: The anemometer fan has to be placed at outlet of diffuser Few seconds are required to allow the fan speed to stabilize, register the values. For each SA Diffuser, readings to be taken at 5 points The measurement to be done for all SA diffusers.

2.3.4 Reporting: The report will be presented as follows:

Tabulated sheet of the result.

2.3.5 Acceptance: The test is considered acceptable if, total supply air quantity is not less than the design value of air

change rate.

2.3 HEPA FILTER INSTALLATION LEAKAGE (INTEGRITY) TEST:

2.4.1 General Guide Lines For The Test: The test is performed to verify the proper installation of the HEPA filters in Exhaust HEPA

housing. This test is not required for supply air HEPA in plenum.

2.4.2 Instrument: Portable DOP Generator, Blower, Photometer, suitable length of 100 mm dia tubing/ canvas.

2.4.3 Test Procedure: Openings are available at inlet and outlet of exhaust HEPA housing. Generate aerosol particles in upstream of the HEPA filters with help of DOP generator. Switch ON the photometer. Keep the photometer probe on downstream of exhaust HEPA filters. Run the photometer probe through out the filter on down stream side of filter. Check the integrity of the HEPA filters by noting down the leakage rates.

2.4.4 Report: The report will be presented as follows:

Tabulated sheet of the results. 2.4.5 Acceptance:

Detection by abrupt change in particulate count around HEPA filters edge. Acceptable, if the

penetration leakage rate through the filter (HEPA) is ≤0.01% down to 0.3µ.

2.4 Particle Count Test:

2.5.1 General Test Conditions:

Test has to be performed to verify the Air Cleaning degree after having passed through the

absolute filters in order to be assigned to the proper class level. Testing shall be done at each

Supply Air Diffusers for classified areas.

2.5.2 Instrument:

55

Optical particle counter (Laser diode based) having a particle size discrimination capability to

detect particles of 0.5 µμ and larger. The sample flow rate of instrument is optional with 1 cubic

foot per minute.

2.5.3 Test Procedure: Set instrument on the instrument stand & connect the plug to 220 / 240 Volt socket. Insert the sampling probe and remove the protection stopper placed. Switch on the instrument, Run the particle counter for some time to get purge the particles

in suction tube. Program the instrument as per the sampling specification. Position the probe for the first sampling location near the SA diffuser. Start and execute the Sub-sequent Samplings (at all SA diffusers). Once the above procedure is completed, start the sampling at another point. The sampling has to repeat for the three times at each sampling point and later calculate to

define the class as per Federal Standard 209 E. 2.5.4 Reporting:

Summary table of all sampling performed. Mean particulate count at each point.

2.5.5 Acceptance: The Particle count data shown on the schematic plan should be not cross the specified level

(class 100,000).

2.6 LIGHTING LEVEL / ILLUMINATION TEST:

2.6.1 General Guide Lines For The Test: The purpose of this test is to verify that the Lux levels of the room at operating height.

2.6.2 Instrument: A portable photoelectric illumination meter.

2.6.3 Test Procedure: A Preliminary operating period of at least 100 Hours for fluorescent lighting (or 6 Hours for

incandescent lighting) must precede this test in order to obtain proper seasoning of the lighting fixture per the field measurement section.

Take all measurements after the room has been operated for at least two hours or time required for the temperature stabilization.

Take the lighting level measurement at the working level (1 mtr above floor).

2.6.4 Reporting: Room Schematic plan with Light fixture locations. Measure and record the light levels. Calculate the average lighting level.

2.6.5 Acceptance: The average of all measurements shall not be less than the design values specified for the room

or work area being tested.

2.7 DOOR INTERLOCK VERIFICATION:

56

2.7.1 General Guide Lines For The Test: The purpose of this test is verify that the locking system is functioning properly between two

door which are been interlocked by checking physically. This will also be done for Pass box doors.

2.7.2 Procedure: Open one door of the interlocking system Check that the other door is locked and can not be opened. Once the first door is closed check that the second door can be opened. The above process to be repeated from second door to first door.

57

SCOPE OF WORK IN GENERAL

General : These are special conditions to the contract and intended for the same.

The general character and the scope of work to be carried out under this contract is illustrated in ;

a) Schematic Facility layout drawings b) Enclosed G.A Drawings, c) Enclosed Technical Specifications d) Enclosed Schedule of Quantities. e) Room data sheet f) The contractor shall carry out and complete the said work under this contract in every

respect in conformity with the contract documents and with the direction of and to the satisfaction of the THSTI site representative. The contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment as listed under the schedule of quantities and specified otherwise, transportation and incidentals necessary for supply, installation, testing and commissioning of the complete air conditioning system as described in the specifications and as shown on the drawings. This also includes any material, equipment, appliances and incidental work not specifically mentioned herein or noted on the drawings/documents as being furnished or installed. But which are necessary and customary to be performed under this contract. The central heating, ventilating and air conditioning, BMS system and Electrical system shall comprise of the following:

g) Supply and installation of the water cooled chilling Machines h) Chilled & Condenser Water Pumping Systems. i) Air Handling Units (AHUs). j) Exhaust Air Handling Units (EAUs) k) Fan Coil Units (FCUs). l) Hot water Generator. m) Centrifugal and propeller fans for mechanical ventilation. n) Motor Control Centers. o) All necessary Power and Lighting distribution boards p) All power and control/communication cabling including terminations q) Expansion tank along with the accessories. r) Chilled water, hot water, condensate drain piping inclusive of all valves, fittings and

chilled/hot pipes insulation as required . s) Pre-fabricated Sheet metal ducts inclusive of external insulation, canvas connection,

volume Control Dampers and smoke & fire dampers as specified. t) Supply of return air registers and diffusers. u) Insulation of pipes, pumps and tanks. v) Automatic Controls and instruments. w) Wiring and earthing from MCC panels to various refrigeration, air-conditioning and

mechanical ventilation equipment control wiring and interlocking.

58

x) Cutting holes, chases and the likes through all types of non structural walls and finishing for all type of wall crossings, including sealing, framework, fire proofing, providing sleeves, cover plates, making good structure and finishing to an approved standard.

y) Balancing, testing and commissioning of the entire HVAC and mechanical ventilation installations.

z) Test report, list of recommended spares, as installed drawings, operation and maintenance manuals for the entire HVAC installations.

aa) Training of owner’s staff. u) Integrated Building Management system allied works for field devices.

Associated Civil Works:

FOR COMPLETE DETAILS AND SPECIFICATIONS REFER DETAILS FURNISHED IN CIVIL SPECIFICATION SECTION OTHER CONDITION

1. Project Execution & Management:

2. The contractor shall ensure that senior planning and execution personnel from his organization are assigned exclusively for this project. They shall have minimum 10 years experience in this type of installations.

3. Contractor has to ensure strict monitoring And maintenance of all time limits stated by

them through Project Detail BAR/PERT Chart with ACTIVITY schedule. Any revision or

change of the time schedule should be defined with specific reasons and re-approved by

THSTI.

4. For quality control & monitoring of workmanship, contractor shall assign at least one full time Project Manager incharge who would be exclusively responsible for ensuring strict quality control ,adherence to the specifications and ensuring top class workmanship for the air-conditioning installation. Contractor shall assign one full time Senior EHS officer to ensure safety and security regulations stipulated in the contract document and should be well aware of local statutory regulations at the project site.

5. The contractor shall arrange to have mechanized and modern facilities for transportation of materials to the place of installation for speedy execution of work.

Performance Guarantee: The Contractor shall carry out the works in accordance with the

drawings, specifications, schedule of the quantities and other documents forming part of the

contract. The contractor shall be fully responsible for the performance of selected equipment

59

(Supplied & Installed by him) at the specified parameters and for the efficiency of the

installations to deliver the required end results. The contractor shall guarantee that the HVAC

system as installed shall maintain the inside conditions in the air-conditioning spaces as

described under the Basis of Design and ROOM DATA SHEET in the specifications. The guarantee

shall be submitted in the Performa sheet. Complete set of architectural drawings are enclosed

with the tender document and also available in the architect/Consultants office and reference

may be made to same for any detail or information. The contractor shall also guarantee that the

performance of various equipment individually, shall not be less than the quoted capacity

,actual power consumption shall not exceed the quoted rating, during testing and

commissioning ,handling over and guarantee period.

Bye–Laws and Regulations: The installations shall be in conformity with the by-laws and regulations

and standards of the local authorities concerned, in so far as these become applicable to the

installations. But if these specifications and drawings call for a higher standard of material and /or

workmanship than those required by any of the above regulations and standards then these drawings

and specifications shall take precedence over the said regulations and standards. However if the

drawings and specifications require something which violates the bye-laws and regulations, then the

bye-laws and regulations shall govern the requirement of the installations.

Fees and permits: The contractor shall obtain all permits/licenses and pay for any or all fees

required for inspection, approvals and commissioning of their installations.

Tender Drawings:

The facility drawings listed herewith, which may be issued with tenders are diagrammatic only

and indicate arrangement of various systems and the extent of works covered in the contract.

These drawings indicate the points of supply and termination of services and broadly follows

the BSL 3 lab facility configuration to be followed. Under no circumstances shall dimension be

scaled from the drawings. The architectural/interior drawings and details shall be examined for

exact location of the equipment, controls, grilles and diffusers.

The contractor shall follow the tender drawings in preparation of his necessary Heat Load

Calculations considering various room international conditions like desired (-)Pressure

gradients, Temperature and Relative Humidity to be maintained all all day 365x24 Hrs, shop

drawings and for subsequent installation work. He shall check the drawings of other

trades/services to verify spaces in which his works shall be installed.

Maximum headroom and space conditions shall be maintained at all points. Where head room

appears inadequate the contractor shall notify architect/consultant/owner’s site representative

before proceeding with the installations. In case installation is carried out without notifying the

works shall be rejected and the contractor shall rectify the same at his own cost. The contractor

shall examine all the architectural, structural, plumbing , electrical and other services drawings

and check the scope of total job content before starting the work , report to the owners site

60

representative of any discrepancies and obtain clarification. Any changes found essential to

coordinate his work with other services and trades, shall be made with prior approval of

architect/consultant/owner’s site representative without additional cost to the owner. The data

given in the drawings and specifications as exact as could be procured , but its accuracy is not

guaranteed.

Technical Data:

Each tenderer shall submit along with his tender, the technical data for all items listed in the

indicated format. Failure to submit complete data with the tenders may result in summary

rejection of the tender.

Shop Drawings :

All the shop drawings shall be prepared on computer through Autocad system based on

the architectural drawings, site measurements and interior designer’s drawings. All heat

load calculation shall be done within eight weeks of the award of the contract,

contractor shall furnish for the approval of THSTI two set of detailed shop drawing of all

equipment and material including the layouts of the plant rooms, AHU rooms, Fan

rooms, Cooling Towers, fan coil units, ventilation fans. Detailed ducting drawing showing

exact location of supports, flanges, bends, tee connections, reducers, guide vanes,

silencers, distribution grids, Volume control dampers, collars, grilles, diffusers, detailed

piping drawing showing exact location and type of supports, valves, fittings etc. acoustic

lining and external insulation details for ducts, pipe insulation etc. Electrical panels

inside/outside views, power and control wiring schematics, cable trays, supports and

terminations. These shop drawings shall contain all information required to complete

terminations. These shop drawings shall contain all the information required to

complete the project as per specifications and as required by THSTI site representative.

These drawings shall contain details of constructions, size arrangement, operating

clearances, performance characteristics and capacity of all items of equipment, also the

details of all related items of work by other contractors. Each shop drawing shall contain

tabulation of all measurable items of equipment/material/works and progressive

cumulative totals from other related drawings to arrive at a variation in quantity

statement at the completion of all shop drawings. Minimum 7 sets of drawings shall be

submitted after final approval along with their floppies.

Each item of equipment/material proposed shall be a standard catalogue product of an

established manufacturer strictly from the manufactures listed in Appendix (List of

Approved Make/Manufacturer) and quoted by tenderer in technical data part of

Appendix.

When the Architect/Consultant makes any amendment in the above drawings, the

contractor shall comply and supply two fresh sets of drawings with the amendments duly

incorporated along with check prints for approval. The contractor shall submit further 5

61

sets of the shop drawings to the owners site representative for the exclusive use of the

owner’s site representative and all other agencies. No material or equipment may be

delivered or installed at the job site until the contractor has in his possession the approved

shop drawing for the particular material/equipment/installations.

Shop drawings shall be submitted for approval four weeks in advance of planned

delivery and installation of any material to allow Architect/Consultant ample time for

scrutiny. No claims for extension of time shall be entertained because of any delay in

works due to his failure to produce shop drawings at the right time in accordance with

the approved programme.

Manufacturers drawings, catalogues, pamphlets and other documents submitted for

approval shall be in four sets. Each item in each set shall be properly labelled, indicating

the specific services for which the material /equipment is to be used, giving reference to

the governing section and clause number and clearly identifying in ink the items and

the operating characteristics. Data for general nature shall not be accepted.

Samples of all materials like grilles, diffusers, controls, insulation, pre-molded pipe

section, control wires etc. shall be submitted to the owners site representative prior to

procurement. These will be submitted in 2 sets of approval and retention by owners site

representative and shall be kept in their site office for reference and verification till the

completion of the project. Wherever directed a mockup or sample installation shall be

carried out for approval before proceeding for further Installations. Approval of shop drawings shall not be considered as a guarantee of measurement or

that of a building dimension. Where drawings are approved said approval doesn’t mean

that the drawings supercede the contract requirements, nor does it in any way relieve

the contractor of the responsibility or requirements to furnish material and perform as

required by the contract.

Where contractor propose to use an item or equipment other than that specified or

detailed on the drawing which requires any redesign of the structure, partitions ,

foundations, piping, wiring or any other apart of the mechanical ,electrical and

architectural layouts ,all such redesign and all new drawings and detailing required

therefore shall be prepared by the contractor at his own expenses and gotten approved

by the architect/consultant/owners site representative. Any delay on such account shall

be at the cost and consequences to the contractor.

HVAC contractor shall prepare coordinated service shop drawings based on the drawings

prepared by electrical, plumbing & low voltage contractors to ensure adequate

clearances are available for installation of service for each trade.

Where the work of the contractor has to be installed in close proximity to or will

interfere with the work of other trade he shall assist in working out space conditions to

make a satisfactory adjustment. If so directed by the owner’s site representative , the

62

contractor shall prepare composite working drawings and sections at a suitable scale,

not less than 1:50 clearly showing how his work is to be installed in relation to work of

the other trades. If the contractor installs his works before coordinating with other

trades or so to cause any interference with work of other trades he shall make all

necessary changes without extra cost to the owner.

Within four weeks of the approval of the relevant shop drawings the contractor shall

submit four copies of a comprehensive variation in quantity statement and itemized

price list of recommended (by manufacturer) imported and local spare parts and tools

covering all the materials/equipment in the contract. The project manager shall make

recommendation to owner for acceptance of anticipated variation in contract amounts

and also advise Owner to initiate action for procurement of spare parts and tools at the

completion of project. Quite Operation and Vibration Isolation :

All equipment shall operate under all conditions of load without any sound and vibration

which is objectionable in the opinion of the owner’s site representative.

In case of rotating machinery sound or vibration noticeable outside the room in which it is

installed or annoyingly noticeable inside its own room shall be considered objectionable.

Such condition shall be corrected by the contractor at his own expenses. The contractor

shall guarantee that the equipment installed shall maintain the specified NC levels.

Accessibility :

The contractor shall verify the sufficiency of the size of the shaft openings, clearances in

cavity walls and suspended ceiling for proper installation of his ducting and piping. His

failure to communicate insufficiency of the same. The contractor shall locate all

equipment which must be serviced, operated or maintained in fully accessible positions.

The exact location and size of all access panels required for each concealed damper ,valves

or other devices requiring attendance shall be finalized and communicated in sufficient

time to be provided in the normal course of work. Failing this the contractor shall make all

necessary changes and repairs at his own expenses. Access panel shall be standardized for

each piece of equipment/device/accessory and shall be clearly nomenclatured / marked.

Materials and equipment : All materials and equipment shall conform to the relevant Indian standards and shall be of

the approved make and design. Makes shall be strictly in conformity with the list of

approved make / manufactures.

Manufactures Instructions : Where manufacturer has furnished specific instructions relating to the

material/equipment used in this project, covering points especially not mentioned in these

documents, such instructions shall be followed in all cases.

63

Electrical Installations :

The electrical work related to HVAC system, shall be carried out in full knowledge of ,and with complete coordination of contractor . The electrical installation shall be in total conformity with the control wiring drawings prepared by the contractor and approved by THSTI. All air-conditioning equipments shall be connected and tested in the presence of an authorized representative of the contractor.

The electrical and air-conditioning system shall be commissioned only after the contractor

has certified in writing that the electrical installation work for HVAC system has been

thoroughly checked, tested and found to be totally satisfactory and in full conformity with

the contract drawings ,specifications and manufacturer’s instructions . It is to be clearly

understood that the final responsibility for the sufficiency, adequacy and conformity to the

contract requirement s of the electrical supply, installation work for HVAC system, lies solely

with the contractor.

COMPLETION CERTIFICATE :

On completion of the electrical installation for entire facility set up and the HVAC system,

a certificate shall be furnished by the contractor, counter signed by the licensed

supervisor, under whose direct supervision the installation was carried out .This certificate

shall be in the prescribed form as required by the local authority. The contractor shall be

responsible for getting the entire electrical installation for HVAC system duly approved by

the local authorities concerned and shall bear expenses, if any in connection with the

same.

BALANCING , TESTING AND COMMISIONING

Balancing of all air and water systems and all tests as called for the specifications shall be

carried out by the contractor through a specialist group, in accordance with the

specifications and ASHRAE guidelines and standards. Performance test shall consist of

three days of 12 hrs each operation of each season .Witness testing of major equipment

at factory with two personnel from owners/ consultant shall be included. Formats for

Performance Test are enclosed with tender document for reference.

The results for summer , monsoon and winter air conditioning in quadruplicate ,shall be

submitted for scrutiny .Four copies of the certified manufacturers performance curves

for each piece of equipment ,highlighting operational parameters for the project ,shall

be submitted along with the test certificates. Contractors shall also provide four copies

of record of all safety and automatic control settings for entire installation.

The installation shall be tested again after removal of defects and shall be commissioned

only after approval by the owner’s site reprehensive. All tests shall be carried out in

presence 3rd Party appointed for certification / clearance and of the representatives of

the architect/consultant and owner’s site representative. Total cost for validation and

performance testing shall be on sole responsibility of the contractor.

64

COMPLETION DRAWINGS

Contractor shall periodically submit completion drawings as and when work in all

respects is completed in a particular area . These drawings shall be submitted in the

form of two sets of DVD/CD’s and four portfolios (300 x 450mm ) each containing

complete set of drawings on approved scale indicating the work as installed .These

drawings shall clearly indicate complete plant room layouts ,location of wiring and

sequencing of automatic controls ,locations of all concealed piping ,valves, controls,

dampers, wiring and other services .Each portfolio shall also contain consolidated

control diagrams and technical literature on all controls. The contractor shall frame

under glass , in the air-conditioning plant room , one set of these consolidated control

diagrams.

Operating Instructions & Maintenance Manual :

Upon completion and commissioning of part HVAC, Electrical and BMS system the

contractor shall submit a draft copy of operating instructions, maintenance schedules

and log sheets for all system and equipment included in this contract. This shall be

supplementary to manufacturers operating and maintenance manual. Upon approval of

the draft the contractor shall submit four complete bound set of typewritten operating

instructions and maintenance manuals. One each for retention by consultant and the

clients representative and two for owners operating personnel. These manuals shall also

include basis of design, detailed technical data for each piece of equipment as installed,

spare parts manual and recommended spares for 2 years period of maintenance of each

equipment.

Maintenance during defects Liability Period (DLP) :

Comprehensive ‘Operation and Maintenance’ of the BSL 3 lab facility to be conducted

during 24 months of defect liability period. Necessary skilled manpower should be

stationed in facility for all 24x7 days and all 365 days a year for operation of the lab

during users in and users out time. The BSL 3 lab should never be stopped mainly the

stipulated HVAC , BMS access control, Fire and safety system.

Complaints :

The contractor shall receive calls for any or all problems experienced in the operation of

the system under this contract, attend to these within four hours of receiving the

complaints and shall take steps to immediately correct any deficiencies that may exist.

Repairs :

All equipment that require repairing shall be immediately serviced and repaired. Since

the period of mechanical maintenance runs for two years concurrently with the defects

65

liability period , all replacement parts and labor shall be supplied promptly free of charge

to the owner.

Uptime Guarantee :

The contractor shall guarantee for the installed system an uptime of 98%. In case of shortfall in

any month during the defects liability period, the defects liability period gets extended by a

month for every month having shortfall. In case of shortfall beyond the defects liability period

the contract shall get extended by a month for every month having the shortfall and no

reimbursement shall be done for the extended period.

The contractor shall provide log in the form of diskettes and bound printed comprehensive log

book containing tables for daily record of all temperature. Pressure, humidity, power

consumption starting and stopping times for various equipment, daily service rendered for the

system alarms, maintenance records of unusual observations etc. Contractor shall also submit

preventive maintenance schedule.

Each tenderer shall submit along with the tender, a detailed operation assistance proposal for

the owners site representative / consultant’s review. This should include the type of service

planned to be offered during the defects liability period and beyond. The operation assistance

proposal shall give the details of the proposed monthly reports to the management.

The tenderer shall include a list of such project where such operation assistance has been

provided along with list of BSL 3 lab construction / completion certificates issued by relevant

organization established and in operation in India..

The contractor shall submit with their tender ,the requirement of soft make up water and

power at each of their equipment/system wise/floor wise/section wise.

(B) HVAC SYSTEM

WATER COOLED CHILLING MACHINE

SCOPE

The scope of this section comprises supply, erection, testing and commissioning of Air cooled

screw package chilling Machines conforming to these specifications and in accordance with the

requirement of Drawings and schedule of Quantities.

TYPE

The chilling machine shall be with hermetic/semi hermetic type (and not open type)

compressor, consisting of mono/ twin screw compressor, squirrel cage induction motor, closed

66

transition star-delta starter, air cooled condenser, shell and tube chiller, refrigerant piping,

micro processor control, all mounted on a steel frame and control power wiring/cabling.

ACTUAL CAPACITY

Actual refrigeration capacity of chilling machine shall be as shown on drawings and in schedule

of Quantities.

WATER COOLED SCEW CHILLER

The water cooled liquid chiller will consist of accessible hermetic/semi- hermetic, direct driven

screw compressor with independent circuits evaporator, condenser, microprocessor based

control and a unit-mounted motor starter, refrigerant charged, factory run-tested and rated in

accordance with ARI 550-90 and ready for operation.

SCREW COMPRESSOR

The compressor will be mono/ twin screw (helical Rotary) type design for positive displacement

for use with ozone friendly refrigerant conforming to prevailing international standard.

During function, it will be pure rotary motion providing uniform gas flow, even torque and

positive displacement to ensure vibration-free operation over a wide range of operating

conditions.

The rotor tip clearance will be optimized to reduce leakage between high and low pressure

cavities during compression and also to achieve high energy-efficiency. The capacity controlling

device shall be arranged for unloaded start power consumption shall proportionately reduce

with the stepping down of compressor capacity to as low as 25% of full load in direct response

to refrigeration load changes.

COMPRESSOR MOTOR ASSEMBLY

The screw compressor will have, accessible hermetic direct drive motor with 2950 rpm (or as

per manufacturer’s design speed), working on 415V+ 10%,3 phase, 50 HZ power supply, as

normally available in India. The motor will be squirrel cage two pole induction type will be

section gas-cooled. Due consideration will be given while deciding the protection devices to

take care of probable voltage fluctuations prevailing at site.

The system will be provided with oil separator and filtration devices.

CONDENSER

Condenser coil shall be air cooled with integral sub-cooler constructed of aluminum fins

mechanically bonded to seamless copper tubes which shall be then cleaned, dehydrated and

sealed.

67

Condenser fans shall be direct driven propeller/axial type, with totally enclosed air over motor,

having class ‘F ’ insulation and IP 54 protection, discharging air vertically upwards and shall be

equipped with the following features.

a. Permanently lubricated bearings. b. Steel wire safety guards duly coated with PVC c. Statically and dynamically balanced fan blades.

Air cooled condenser coil shall be leak tested at 150 Psig (1034 KPa) and pressure tested at 450

Psig (3103 KPa).

CHILLER (COOLER)

Chillers shall be direct- expansion/flooded type comprising mild steel shell, integrally finned

copper tube Rolled into tube sheets, cast iron water headers, liquid line connection, suction

header, drain plug and purge valves.

Shell and tube type chillers shall have the following components:

a. SHELL AND WATER BOXES The chiller shell shall be formed of carbon steel , provided with cast iron water

boxes having standard flange type connections suitable for 10 KG .per sq.cm

(150 psig ) working and 21 KG/sq.cm (300 PSIG) test pressure. Water boxes shall

be provided with drain connections and shall be easily openable for tube

cleaning. Suitable tappings shall be provided in the water boxes/water lines for

temperature control bulb and gages.

b. TUBE SHEETS

A thick steel tube sheet shall be welded to each end of the shell and shall be

drilled and reamed to accommodate tubes. Annular grooves in the tube sheets

shall prevent leakage at the tube sheet bond. Tube support sheets shall be placed

along the length of the shell to avoid relative motion between the tubes.

c. TUBES

12.5 to 19 mm dia. Seamless copper tubing, not less than 24G wall thickness,

shall be used for evaporator surface. Tube shall be rolled into the tube sheets

and shall pass through intermediate supports so that the refrigerant side of the

evaporator shall be leak free and there shall be no relative motion between

tubes and tube supports. Each tube shall be individually replaceable.

d. INSULATION

The chiller shell be covered with closed cell insulation material.

68

Salient features of the chiller will be as briefed below :

a. It will be shell be shell-and tube type with removable heads .

b. Tubes shall be internally enhanced seamless-copper type rolled into tube sheets.

c. It will be equipped with victaulic- type fluid connections.

d. Shell be insulated with closed- cell insulation material.

e. Design shall incorporate minimum 2 nos. independent direct expansion

refrigerant circuits.

f. Cooler (Chiller) shall be tested and stamped in acco-dance with ASME Code for a

refrigerant working side pressure of 278 Psig (1916 KPa). Cooler shall have a

maximum fluid –side pressure of 300 psig (2068 KPa).

3.9 REFRIGERANT PIPING AND COMPONENTS

Refrigerant piping and fittings inter connecting compressor, condenser and chiller shall

be all copper and valves shall be brass/ gun metal construction as explained in section

‘PIPING’

Refrigerant circuit components shall include hot gas muffler, high side pressure switch,

liquid line shut off valves, suction and discharge shut off valves, filter drier moisture-

indicating sight glass, electronic expansion valve and compressor oil.

3.10 Salient features of the Cabinet will be :

a. Frame shall be of heavy-gage galvanized steel members. b. Cabinet shall be galvanized steel casing with a pre-painted finish. c. Cabinet shall be capable of withstanding 500-hour salt spray test in accordance

with the ASIMB-117 standard. d. The assembly shall be installed outdoor and should, therefore, have adequate

weather protection/resistance.

3.11 COTROLS

a. Unit Control Module

The unit shall be provided be with microprocessor control system for air cooled Rotary

chiller with latest chiller control technology.It shall have control logic with the Clear

Lauguage Display which will have various functions that allow the operator to read unit

information and adjust set points. The Clear Language Display panel will have sufficient

keys (normally 15 nos.) The read –out screen shall be a four lines ,20 character liquid

crystal with a backlight. The backlight shall allow the operator to read the display in low

– light conditions.

69

b. Unit Control Module Features.

Equal Compressor SequencingThe control system shall maximize both compressor and

motor life by equalizing the number of starts and the operating hours. The UCM will

start the compressor with the least number of starts and turn off the compressor with

the most operating hours, equalizing starts and running hours, This will provide equal

compressor wear to various units.

Chiller Flow Protection

The in-built protection will automatically detect a no water flow condition.

c. Chiller System Logging

The UCM will display data required to log the chiller system. The following information

will be available as standard feature with the Air-Cooled Rotary Chiller microprocessor.

- Entering and leaving chilled water temperatures - Ambient air temperature - Evaporator and condenser refrigerant temperatures and pressures. - Compressor suction temperature. - Percent line voltage - Compressor starts and running hours - Active set points; Chilled water set point, Current limit set point, Low ambient

lockout set point

- Over 90 diagnostics: and operating conditions

- Part failure diagnostics: Water temperature sensors, Refrigerant temperature sensor, Compressor contactors

d. Remote Display Panel

The system shall be provided with a twisted pair connection to an optional remote

display panel. With this provision it will be possible to control chiller operation from the

remote panel similar to the control interface on the chiller itself , and it will be possible

to turn ‘On’ Or ‘Off’ change the chilled water set point, and display all operating and

diagnostic condition from this panel. The remote display panel shall be mounted indoors

so that it can be accessed without the need to go to the chillers plant room/site.

Remote clear language display will have the ability to control multiple units. In the

multiple unit configuration, the Remote Clealer Language Display Panel will have the

capability to communicate with upto four units. Each unit will require a separate

communication link with the Remote display Panel.

e. Interface To The Building Management system

70

The system should have provisions and facility for interfacing the chiller with building

management systems:

Chiller inputs will include:

- Chiller enable/disable - Circuit enable/disable - Chilled water set point - Current limit set point - Chiller outputs will include:

- Compressor running indication - Alarm indication (for each circuit) - Maximum capacity

3.12 QUALITY ASSURANCE (WATER COOLED SCREW CHILLERS)

a. Chillers shall be rated in accordance with parameters stipulated in specifications and schedule of quantities. Pressure vessels shall be designed, constructed, tested and complete with safety devices in accordance with ANSI/ASHRAE 15-1989 Safety Code and ASME Code.

b. The Chiller shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the applicable portions of the latest revisions of the following recognized standards and Codes.

ISOs :

ISO 9001:1994, ! Design manufacture and testing of Air

EN ISO 9001: 1994, ! Cooled screw Water Chilling Package.

BS EN ISO 9001: 1994, !

ARI 550-90 - Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute : Standard for Air Cooled

Screw water Chilling Packages (General Specifications, Testing and Rating)

ARI 575 - Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute: Standard Method of Measuring

Machinery soundWithEquipment Rooms (Basis of all data presented or field testing of

equipment, with relation to sound requirements).

ASME CODE - American Society of Mechanical Engineers Code :For Unfired Pressure

Vessels – Section VIII (Design, Construction, testing and Certification of Pressure Vessels).

ANSI-B9.1- American National Standards Institute Safety, Code For Mechanical Refrigeration

(Overall general safety Requirements, relief device sizing etc.)

ANSI-B31.5 -American National Standards Institute Code

71

TEMA -Tubular Exchanger Manufacturer’s Association.

ISO R 281 - Rolling Bearings – Dynamic Load Ratings

Electric Hot Water Generator

The hot water generator shall be vertical/horizontal shell type designed, constructed and tested

for the specified water flow and temperatures.

The shell of the generator shall be made of steel with electric fusion welded seams. The shell

shall be designed for 50 Deg C of water circulation unless specified otherwise.

The shell with insulation shall be mounted inside a cabinet of angle iron frame with 16 SWG

mild steel covers held with lock/bolts and hinges. The cabinet shall be provided with sufficient

louvers and rat proofing to ensure ventilation of heater terminals of boilers shall be installed

above the finished surface of insulation and angle iron frame. The angle iron frame shall be

provided with fittings lugs and pedestals. Electric heaters shall be provided in banks of equal

capacity distributed on three power phases. Heaters shall be mounted within seamless

incoloysheathed electrically resistant U tubes. The heaters shall be easily removable externally

without opening the terminal plate or disturbing other components. The heater mounting

socket shall be made leak proof. Heaters shall be suitable for 415V+_10%/50hz/3phase power

supply.

The hot water generator shall be provided with following accessories :

Interlocking of electric panel cover with incoming switch/limit switch.

Flow switch, float switch, automatic alarm for low water level and high temperature / pressure switch with respective indication lights.

Drain point with valves.

Descaling Valves

Automatic air vents and automatic high temperature / pressure relief valve.

Manual thermostat for individual heater bank and master safety thermostat of fixed setting.

Insulation of shell with 100 mm thick resin bonded fiberglass and 26 Guage Al cladding.

Falnges for water piping connections.

The Electrical control cabinet shall be made as detailed above and mounted directly on the

main frame. All controls and terminals shall be factory wired and tested. The control cabinet

shall consist of following major controls and rated capacities unless specified otherwise.

Incoming MCCB

On/off toggle switch for individual banks

Starter with HRC fuses.

HRC fuses and individual heaters

Indicating lights for on status and individual bank.

Fault indicating lights

Alarm with manual reset

72

Thermostats

Cabling and control wiring

Three phase ammeter with selector switch

The panel shall be openable only after switchingoff the incoming supply.

The external surface of the shell shall be cleaned , derusted and applied with three coats of

primer and panted.

AIR HANDLING UNITS

1 SCOPE

The Scope of this section comprises the supply, erection, testing and commissioning of double skin Air Handling Units conforming to these Specifications and in accordance with requirements of drawings and schedule of quantities.

2 TYPE

The Air Handling Units shall be of floor mounted draw through type having sections such

as filter section with pre-filters, microvee filters and HEPA filters as required under BOQ

,cooling coil section with suitable chilled water cooling coil, fan section with PLUG fan,

mixing section where required under BOQ, humidification section with centrifugal fan as

per schedule of quantities and arrangement shown on the drawings.

3 CAPACITY

The air moving and coil capacities (Air Conditioning Load) shall be as shown in Schedule

of equipment and quantities and on drawings.

4 CASING

The housing/ casing of the air handling unit shall be of double skin construction. The

housing shall be so made that it can be delivered at site in total/ semi knock down

conditions depending upon the conditions. The frame work shall be of extruded

aluminium hollow sections fitted with pre-formed insulated sections. All the members

shall be assembled thru mechanical joints to make a sturdy and strong frame work for

various sections.

Double skin panels (each not exceeding 750mm wide) shall be made of 22G pre-coated

Galvanised sheet steel and 22G galvanised sheet inside with pressure injected PU foam

insulation of 50mm thick X 48 Kg/Cu.M in in between. The panels shall be bolted from

inside on to the frame work with soft rubber gasket in between to make the joints air

tight.

Thermal Break Frame work for each section shall be bolted together with soft rubber

gasket in between to make the joints air tight. Suitable doors with powder coated

hinges and latches shall be provided for access to various panels for maintenance.

73

The fan and the motor arrangement shall be mounted on to the extruded aluminium

frame work. The entire housing i.e. The Air Handling Unit shall be mounted on extruded

aluminium base channel framework.

Drain pan shall be constructed of 16 SS sheet having 12 mm thick 32 Kq/Cu. XPE

insulation.The pan shall have necessary slope to facilitate for fast removal of

condensate.

5 MOTOR AND DRIVE

Fan motors shall be 230 ± 10% volts 50 cycles 3 phase totally enclosed fan cooled with

IP-55 rotation. Motor shall be especially designed for quite operation and motor speed

shall not exceed 1440 RPM. Drive to fan shall be provided through belt drive

arrangement. Belts shall be of oil-resistant type. Adjustable sheaves shall be provided.

6 FAN

The fan shall be Direct driven PLUG type complete with motor and drive package (as per

approved make only). The fan shall be selected for a speed not exceeding 1500 RPM. The

fan outlet velocity shall not be more than 1800 rpm. Fan housing with motor shall be

mounted on a common steel base mounted inside the AHU on anti vibration springs or

cushy foot mount. The fan shall be direct driven type. Another fire retardant canvass

connection shall be provide at unit outlet to connect the ducts.

7. Cooling Coils :

The cooling coil shall be seamless copper tubes not less than 0.437 mm thick and 12.5

mm O.D. The coil shall have continuous aluminium fins. The tube shall be staggered in

the direction of air flow. The fins shall be uniformaly bonded to the tubes by mechanical

expansion of the tube. The coil shall be tested against leaks

At a hydraulic pressure of 21kg/m3 for a period of two hours.The water headers shall be of copper pipes to connect all the tubes. The header shall be complete with water In/Out connections, vent plug and drain at the bottom and designed to provide a water velocity between 0.6 to 1.8 m/s ( 2 to 6 FPS)

8. Filters :

As asked for under Bill of quantities to maintain class: 100,000.

9. Electrical Panel :

Each unit shall have its own electric panel consisting of MCCB / fuse switch unit, starter,

indicating lamps ,incoming/outgoing internal and external wiring and earthing as per the

details in BOQ.

10 Fresh Air Control :

74

An adjustable damper of Al/GI sheet along with bird screen ,air inlet louvers and air filters shall

be provided for fresh air entry. The damper shall be sized for 50% of designed air quantity.

11 Limitations :

The air velocity across the cooling coils shall not exceed 500 fpm.

The fan outlet velocity shall not exceed 1800 fps (9m/s) in any case.

The velocity across the filters shall not exceed 500 fpm in any case.

COOLING TOWER

General

FRP Induced draft cooling tower complete with weather proof motor, GI ladder, hot dip

galvanized support structure, FRP basin, Flow 600 US GPM ( 36.5 deg C to 32 deg C ) WBT

28,33 deg C . Quoted price should be inclusive of necessary civil and structural cost for

foundation in all respect as required.

CONDENSER WATER PUMPS

1. General

The various items of pump shall be complete in all respect and comply with the

specification given below:

2. Pump Sets

The pump sets shall be vertical split casing type with end suction and top discharge

flanged connections, mounted on drip proof squirrel cage induction motor with suitable

starter as specified. Pumps shall be as per IS:1520-1960, IS:9079, IS:325 and shall be of the

following construction:

1. Casing Cast Iron/Cast Steel

2. Impeller Bronze

3. Shaft High Tensile Steel

4. Shaft sleeve Bronze

5. Bearings Heavy Duty Ball/Roller bearings

6. Base Plate Cast Iron/Fabricated M.S.

7. Flanges BIS 1536/1960

8. Packing Graphited Asbestos

9. Max. Speed 1500 RPM/2900 RPM

10. Drive TEFC motors for monobloc upto 3.7 KW &

SPDP motors for higher ratings.

75

11. Starter See Section "Electrical Switchgears"

a) Drive ratings shown are only tentative and Tenderers shall select their drivers at least 5%

in excess of the maximum BHP of the pump plus transmission losses, if any. Drivers shall

be supplied with starters unless otherwise stated.

CHILLED WATER PUMPS

1. General

The various items of pump shall be complete in all respect and comply with the

specification given below:

2. Pump Sets

The pump sets shall be vertical split casing type with end suction and top discharge

flanged connections, mounted on drip proof squirrel cage induction motor with suitable

starter as specified.

Pumps shall be as per IS:1520-1960, IS:9079, IS:325 and shall be of the following

construction:

1. Casing Cast Iron/Cast Steel

2. Impeller Bronze

3. Shaft High Tensile Steel 4. Shaft sleeve Bronze

5. Bearings Heavy Duty Ball/Roller bearings

6. Base Plate Cast Iron/Fabricated M.S.

7. Flanges BIS 1536/1960

8. Packing Graphited Asbestos

9. Max. Speed 1500 RPM/2900 RPM

10. Drive TEFC motors for monobloc upto 3.7 KW & PDP

motors for higher ratings.

11. Starter See Section "Electrical Switchgears"

a) Drive ratings shown are only tentative and Tenderers shall select their drivers at least 5%

in excess of the maximum BHP of the pump plus transmission losses, if any. Drivers shall

be supplied with starters unless otherwise stated.

3. Accessories & Fittings

The following accessories/fittings shall be provided with each pump among other standard

accessories/fittings required:

i) Lubrication fittings and seal piping

ii) Test and/or air vent cocks

iii) Steel channel base frame for fixing pump on the concrete foundation

iv) Suction and discharge pressure gauges not less than 150mm dia. and of the appropriate

rating, with gauge cocks, etc.

76

v) 25 mm G.I. gland water drain piping.

4. Installation

Pumps shall be installed as per manufacturer's recommendations. Pump set shall be

mounted on concrete block which in turn is mounted on machinery isolation cork or any

other equivalent vibration isolation fitting.

Concrete foundation will be made by the Contractor as per approved drawings and

specifications and the isolation pad foundation bolts, etc., shall also be supplied by the

Contractor. Contractor shall ensure that the foundation bolts are correctly embedded.

Pump sets shall preferably be factory aligned whenever necessary, site alignment shall be

done by competent persons. Before the foundation bolts are grouted and the coupling

bolted, the bed plate levels and alignment results shall be submitted to the Engineer.

5. Insulation

Pumps used for chilled water service shall be insulated so that the dismantling of pumps

not affected. Insulation shall be provided in a manner so as to minimize the damage to the

insulation in case of maintenance of pumps or other components.

6. Testing

Tenderers shall submit the performance curves of the pumps. They shall also be

responsible for the selection of capacity and total head requirements of each pump to

match his own piping and equipment layout.

On completion of the entire installation, pumps shall be tested for their discharge head,

flow and B.H.P. Test results shall correspond to the performance curves.

Tenderers shall furnish the required testing instruments and arrange for their connection

as required.

7. Painting

After complete installation and testing, pumps accessories and fittings shall be given two

coats of approved finishing paint.

8. On-line Water Treatment Equipment

Equipment shall be fabricated from `B' class GI pipe. It should have a metallic core with

turbulance base capable of causing galvanic action. The core shape shall be such that

colliodal particles should not settle on it.

Pipes & Valves :

1. General

The scope shall comprise the supply, installation of pipe, fittings, valves, etc. and

testing/balancing of complete system. Pipe sizes shown on drawing are for the guidance of

Contractor and shall not relieve Contractor of responsibility of providing smooth, noiseless

circulation of fluid.

2. Pipes

77

All piping work shall conform to quality standards and shall be carried out as per

specifications and details given hereunder:

All pipes shall be of schedule 40 thick as per ANSI-B-36.1.

All pipes in sizes upto 150mm dia shall be M.S. ERW pipe heavy class as per IS:1239-Part-I

(as per latest amendment).

All pipes in sizes 200mm and above shall be M.S. ERW pipe heavy class as per IS:3589 (as

per latest amendment).

3. Fittings

The dimensions of the fittings shall conform to I.S. 1239-Part-II (as per latest amendment)

unless otherwise indicated in the specifications.

All bends in sizes upto and including 150mm dia. shall be ready made of heavy duty,

wrought steel of appropriate class.

All bends in sizes 200mm and larger dia. shall be fabricated from pipes of the same dia.

and thickness with a minimum of 4 sections, and having a minimum centre line radius of

1.5 diameter of pipes.

All fittings such as branches, reducers, etc. in all sizes shall be fabricated from pipes of the

same dia. and thickness and its length should be at least twice the dia. of the pipe.

The branches may be welded straight to the main line, without making a separate fitting,

where specified on drawings or required by Engineer-in-Charge.

Blank ends are to be formed with flanged joints and 6mm thick blank between flange pair

for 150mm and over in case where, a future extension is to be made, otherwise blank end

discs of 6mm thickness are to be welded on, with additional cross stiffners from 50mm x

50mm x 5mm heavy angles.

4. Flanges

All flanges shall be of mild steel as per IS:6392/71 and shall be steel slip-on-type, welded to

the pipes flanges thickness shall be to suit class-II pressures.Flanges may be tack welded

into position, but all final welding shall be done with joints dismounted. 3mm thick gaskets

shall be used with all flanged joints. The gaskets shall be fibre reinforced rubber as

approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. Special adhesive compound shall be used between

flanges of steam, air and gas lines.

Flanges shall be used as used as follows :

Counter flanges for equipment having flanged connections.

Flanged pairs shall be used on all such equipment, which is required to be isolated or

removed for service e.g. pumps, refrigeration machines, air handling units, etc.

All threaded valves shall be provided with nipples and flanged pairs on both sides to

permit flange connection, for removal of valves from main lines for repair/replacement.

5. Valves

a) Butterfly Valves, Gate Valves, Globe Valves and Check Valves :

78

All gate valves, globe and check valves upto and including 40mm dia. Shall be of gun metal

screwed type, conforming to class 1 of IS:778.

All butterfly valves of 50mm dia. and above shall be flanged type, have cast iron body with

black nitrile rubber seat and conforming to class PN-10 of IS:780 (for sizes upto 300mm)

and of IS:2906 (for sizes 350mm and above). All globe and check valve of 50mm dia. and above shall be flanged type in cast iron construction

and conforming to class PN-10.

Air valves shall be provided at all higher points in the piping system for venting as per the

sizes shown in the BOQ.

All air needle valves shall be of gun metal and tested upto a pressure of class 1 pressure

rating. All globe valves of size 50mm and above shall be of rising spindle type.

b) Balancing Valves

All balancing valves of upto and including 50 mm dia. shall be in gun metal screwed type

construction. The valves of 65 mm dia. and above shall be in cast iron flanged end

construction.The valve shall have PTFE/SS disc with special erosion/ corrosion proof

sealing.The valves shall be capable of delivering metered quantity of water and

subsequently should function as isolating valve. All the valves shall have built in pressure

drop measuring facility to ascertain water flow rate. The valves shall have temper proof

adjustable and lockable arrangement for required water quantity after commissioning.

The valve shall be to the minimum requirement of IS:778 Class-1.

The valves shall be complete with drain cock, pressure test cocks, etc.

c) Miscellaneous Valves

All gauge cocks shall be of gunmetal plug type, complete with siphon (brass chrome

plated).

All drain valves shall be of gunmetal with a hose union connection on one end or extended

upto the drain pit as the case may be.

All valves on the supply line of fan coil units shall be of gunmetal ball type with integral

water strainers, having (BSP) FPT inlet and flare type MPT outlet connection.

All valves on the return line of fan coil units shall be as above but without integral water

strainer.

d) Strainers

The strainers shall either be 'pot' type or 'Y' type with cast iron or fabricated steel body,

tested to a pressure of 10 kg/sq.cm. applicable for the butterfly valves as shown on the

drawings.

The strainers shall have a perforated bronze sheet screen with 3mm perforation, 0.63mm

thick.

Pot strainers and Y strainers shall be provided with flanged connections.

The strainers shall be designed to facilitate in easy removal of filter screen for cleaning,

without disconnection of pipe line

Pot strainer shall be fabricated out of M.S. sheet and the sizes shall be as under:

79

Pipe size Pot Dia Pot HT Basket dia Basket HT

(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)

===========================================================================

50 300 400 200 240

80 350 450 250 250

100 450 500 300 280

125 500 600 330 340

150 540 700 360 390

200 610 815 400 470

250 800 955 550 510

300 1000 1105 750 580

350 1190 1300 895 678

400 1350 1500 1020 785

450 1518 1700 1060 890

500 1690 1800 1100 900

6 Jointing

All pipelines shall be welded type except G.I. piping which shall have screwed connections.

Square cut plain ends will be welded to pipe upto and including 100mm dia.

All pipes 125mm dia. or larger will be bevelled by 35o for welding.

7. Miscellaneous

a) Provide all piping, required to make the apparatus connected, complete and ready for

regular and safe operation. Unless otherwise noted, connect all apparatus and equipment

in accordance with manufacturer's standard details, as approved by Engineer-in-Charge.

Consult drawings and specifications to determine number and requirements of all items of

equipment requiring piping, such as bend, drain, relief, etc. wherever equipment is

provided with connections for such piping.

b) Unless otherwise specified, pitch the lines of piping as follows:

All condensation drainage, including air handling unit and fan coil unit shall be pitched in

the direction of flow to ensure adequate drainage, with an adequate trap seal to prevent

leakage of air due to static pressure developed by air conditioning units. Pitch, 20mm per

metre wherever possible, but not less than 10mm. Drains from other equipment shall be

pitched similarly without trap seal.

c) Provide valves and capped connections for all low points in piping system, necessary or

required for draining systems. Provide for all risers isolating valves and drain valves to

permit repairs without interfering with the rest of the system

80

d) During construction, temporarily close, open ends of pipes with sheet metal caps, where

necessary, or required to prevent debris from entering piping system.

e) Support piping independently of all equipment so that the equipment is not stressed by

the piping weight or expansion.

f) Provide suitable platforms, etc. to facilitate the maintenance-repair and replacement of

valves and fittings.

g) Unions, if used, shall be flanged, as required, wherever indicated and in connections to all

equipment, apparatus, and specialities requiring disconnection for repairs or replacement.

Locate unions between shut-off valves and equipment, as directed by Engineer-in-Charge.

h) Provide shut-off valves where indicated and for individual equipment, units at inlet and

outlet, to permit unit removal for repairs, without interfering with remaining of the

system. Additional shut-off valves shall be provided as required to enable all systems to

be fully sectionalised. By-pass and stop valves shall be provided for all automatic control

valves as specified

i) Arrange piping for maximum accessibility for maintenance and repair; locate valves for

easy access and operation. No valves shall be installed with handles pointing down, unless

unavoidable.

j) Cut the pipes accurately according to measurements, established at building and work into

place without springing or forcing.

k) Pipe supports shall be adjustable for height and prime coated with rust preventive paint

and finish coated with grey paint, both as approved by Engineer-in-Charge. Spacing of pipe

supports shall not be more than that as specified below :

==============================================================

Nominal pipe size Spacing

(MM) (Metres)

==============================================================

15 1.25

20 & 25 1.25

32, 40, 50 & 65 2.0

80, 100 & 125 2.5

150 & above 2.5

=============================================================

l) Extra supports shall be provided at the bends, and at heavy fittings like valves to avoid

undue stresses on the pipes. Pipe hangers shall be fixed on walls and ceilings by means of

`Hilti' metallic dash fasteners.

m) Insulated piping shall be supported in such a manner so as not to put undue pressure on

the insulation.

Hangers and supports shall be provided and installed for all piping and tubing wherever

indicated, required or otherwise specified. Wherever necessary, additional hangers and

81

supports shall be provided to prevent vibration or excessive deflection of piping and

tubing.

All hangers and supports shall be made of steel or other durable and non-combustible

materials, galvanised or plated. Wood, wire or perforated strap iron shall not be used as

permanent hangers or supports.

Hangers shall be supported from structural steel, concrete inserts and pipe racks,

specifically approved.

No hanger/equipment shall be suspended midway, between steel joists and panel points.

Drilling or punching of holes in steel joist members will not be permitted.

All pipes in AC plant room shall be supported from pipes and channels from floor.

9 Sleeves

Where pipes pass through walls, provide galvanised steel pipe sleeves 50mm larger than

outside diameter of pipe without any extra cost. Where pipes are insulated, sleeves shall

be large enough to have ample clearance for insulation.

Where pipes pass through outside walls or floor slab the space between pipe and sleeve

shall be packed with lead wool and oakum.

The centre of pipes shall be in the centre of sleeves and sleeves shall be flush with the

finished surface. Floor sleeves shall project 50mm above finished floor level.

10 Expansion or Contraction

The Contractor shall provide for expansion and contraction of all piping installed by the

use of swing connections and expansion loops.

11 Arrangement and Alignment of Piping

All piping shall be arranged and aligned in accordance with the drawings as specified.

Where special conditions are encountered in the field, the arrangement and alignment of

piping shall be as directed by the Engineer-in-charge.

Unless otherwise specified, the piping shall be installed in a uniform manner, parallel to or

perpendicular to walls or ceilings, and all changes in directions shall be made with fittings.

The horizontal piping shall be run at right angles and shall not run diagonally across rooms

or other piping. Wherever possible all piping shall be arranged to provide a maximum

head room.

All piping shall be installed as directly as possible between connecting points in so far as

the work of other trades permits. Where interference occurs with another trade whose

work is more difficult to route, this contractor shall reroute his pipes as required to avoid

interference at the discretion of the Engineer-in-Charge.

All piping shall be carefully installed to provide for proper alignment, slope and expansion. The stresses in pipelines shall be guided and pipes shall be supported in such a manner

that pipe lines shall not creep, sag or buckle.

Anchors and supports shall be provided wherever necessary to prevent any misalignment

of piping.

82

Small tubing, gauges, controls or other equipment installed on any apparatus, shall not be

coiled or excessive in length, but shall be installed neatly, carefully bent at all changes in

direction, secured in place and properly fastened to equipment at intervals to prevent

sagging.The piping shall be grouped wherever practical and shall be installed uniformly in

straight parallel lines in either vertical or horizontal positions. All tubing/capilaries shall be

provided with PVC sleeves to save it against frictional cuts or damage due to vibration.

12 Testing

In general, tests shall be applied to piping before connection of equipment and appliances.

In no case shall piping equipment or appliances be subjected to pressures exceeding their

test rating.The tests shall be completed and approved before any insulation is applied.

Testing of segments of pipe work will be permitted, provided all open ends are first closed,

by blank-offs or flanges.

After tests have been completed, the system shall be drained and flushed 3 to 4 times and

cleaned of all dust and foreign matter. All strainers, valves and fittings shall be cleaned of

all dirt, fillings and debris.

All piping shall be tested to hydraulic test pressure of at least two times the maximum

operating pressure but less than 10 kg/sq. cm. for a period of not less than 24 hours. All

leaks and defects in the joints revealed during the testing shall be rectified to the

satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge, without any extra cost.

All the piping systems shall be tested in the presence of the Engineer-in-Charge or their

authorised representative. Advance notice of test dates shall be given and all equipments,

labour, material required for inspection, and repairs during the test shall be provided by

the contractor. A test shall be repeated till the entire system is found satisfactory to the

above authority. The tests shall be carried out for a part of work if required by the

Engineer-in-Charge in order to avoid hindrance in the work of the insulation contractor. All

water and condensate pipes shall be tested and proven tight under hydrostatic pressure of

10 kg/sq.cm., unless otherwise stated, for a minimum period of 24 hours without drop in

pressure.

The Contractor shall make sure that proper noiseless circulation is achieved through all

piping systems. If due to poor air bond, proper circulation is not achieved, the contractor

shall bear all expenses for carrying out the rectification work including finishing of floors,

walls and ceiling damaged in the process of rectification.

The Contractor shall provide all labours and materials to make provision for removing

water and throwing it at the proper place during the testing or/and after the testing to

avoid damages to employer or other contractors properties. Any damage caused by the

contractor to the employer or other contractors properties, shall be borne by the

Contractor.

13. Copper Piping

83

Heavy gauge soft copper tubing, type M, shall be used to make connections to equipment,

wherever required or specified by Engineer-in-Charge.

Flare fittings e.g. flare nuts, tees, elbows, reducers, etc. shall all be of brass.

14. Refrigerant Piping

The refrigerant circuit piping shall be of carbon steel seemless, as per ASTMA-106, grade B

or BS-3602 grade 23 and dimensioned as per ANSI B-36.1, schedule 40. The fittings shall be

heavy class. The pipes and fittings shall be connected by means of welded joints. The

connections to gauges, controls, etc. shall be with flare fittings. The refrigerant valves,

required in the circuit shall be as follows:

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Valve Size Valve Material Type of Connections

fittings

=============================================================

Upto 12mm Brass packless type Flare

16mm and above Brass/Steel packed Brazed/Welded type

Note :- All valves shall be tested against leaks upto 28 kg/sq.cm.

The strainers for the refrigerant liquid line shall be 'Y' type with gun metal body and

bronze filter screen of fine mesh. The filter screen shall be easily removable type without

dismantling the strainer from the circuit. The moisture indication sight glass in the liquid

line shall have leak proof glass on opposite sides to permit easy inspection of the liquid

refrigerant. Silencers and moisture drier etc. shall be provided as part of the refrigerant

piping.

Bolts wherever used shall be electro-galvanised steel. Brazed joints, in the refrigerant

piping, which has leak, shall be opened and re-done. These shall in, no case be repaired by

addition of brazing alloy to the joint.

15. Drain Piping

The drain piping shall be medium class galvanized steel as per IS:1239 (as per latest

amendment). The fittings shall be of as per IS:1239 Part-II with screwed connections.

The gate valves shall be of gun metal as described earlier.

Pipe crosses shall be provided at bends, to permit easy cleaning of drain line. The drain line

shall be provided upto the nearest drain trap and pitched towards the trap.

Drain lines shall be provided at all the lowest points in the system, as well as at

equipments where leakage of water is likely to occur, or to remove condensate and water

from pump glands. The drain pipe work shall be carried out with threaded joints only. No

welded joint shall be permissible.

84

16. Painting

All pipes supports, hangers, etc., shall be given two coats of red oxide primer.

All pipes (insulated and non insulated) shall then be given two coats finish paint, of a type

and colour as approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.

Sheet Metal Work & Air Distribution

1. Scope :

The scope of work shall include supply, fabrication and installation of site fabricated G.I. sheet

metal duct as shown in the relevant duct drawing, testing at site, loading & unloading of G.I.

sheets at site, and shifting the G.I. sheets and other hardware from site stores to exact location

inside the office complex. The packing shall be suitable for marine transportation purpose and all

other natural disasters and the same shall be transported to respective office warehouses to

achieve a guaranteed commercial operation of the same to the entire satisfaction of client.

2. Materials

Ducts shall be made of either galvanized steel sheets or aluminum sheets. The

galvanized steel sheet shall confirm to IS: 277 – 1977 Aluminum shall be of grade SIC of

B-3 as specified in IS: 177 – 1974.

Thickness of sheet shall be as per the table given below:

Maximum Side (mm) Thickness (mm)

Galvanized Steel Sheet Aluminum Sheet

Up to 750 mm 0.63 0.80

751-1500 0.80 1.00

1501-2250 1.00 1.50

2250-2500 1.20

Plenums and Ducts above 2500 1.60

The bracing shall be as per ISS 655-1964. Supports for ducts at 2.4m distance apart up to 2250/1.2m distance apart for larger ducts.

Ducts shall be rectangular in cross section and fabricated in accordance with the following table :

Maximum Side

of Duct

(mm)

Minimum

Thickness of

Sheet

(mm/SWG)

Transverse Joints Reinforcement Hanger Rod

Dia

(mm)

Up to 40 0.63 (24 SWG) 25mm pocket/s slip

Cross Break

8

401 to 750 0.63 (24 SWG) 25mm pocket/s slip 25 X 25 X 4.2 Girth angle 8

85

@ 1000 mm c/c

751 to 900 0.80(22SWG) 38x38x4.2

Companion Flanges

25 X 25 X 4.2 Girth angle

@ 1000 mm c/c 8

901 to 1500 0.80(22SWG) 38x38x4.2

Companion Flanges

38x38x4.2Girth angle @ 760

mm c/c 10

1501 to 2250 1.00(20SWG) 38x38x4.2

Companion Flanges

38x38x4.2 Girth angle @ 760

mm c/c 10

2250 and above 1.25(18 SWG) 50x50x4.2

Companion Flanges


mm c/c 12

Plenums 1.25(18 SWG) 50x50x6.4

Companion Flanges


mm c/c 12

Rounds Ducts : GSS Aluminium

Round Ducts 150 mm dia to 500 mm dia. 24 Guage 22 guage

Round Ducts 501mm dia to 750 mm dia 22 Guage 22 guage

Round Ducts 751 mm dia to1000 mm dia. 22 Guage 20 guage

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Girth angles and companion flanges shall be mitered and welded at corners and riveted to duct

sheets at 75mm centers. Flanged joints shall be made with 9.5-mm GI bolts spaced at 1.5cm

centers and provided with 4.2mm rubber or 6.0mm. All joints and seams shall be rendered

airtight. All duct seams and joints to be sealed with silicon sealant to stop supply air leakage.

Duct panels are not to be cross-broken if insulated. Longitudinal seams shall be inside groove of

Pittsburgh type. All ducting supports, bracing and framework shall be painted with 2 coats of

epoxy primer and 2 coats of epoxy paint min. (50 microns). 3. Accessories:

All dampers, except where shown, shall be louver dampers having multiple opposed blades type or with parallel blades of airfoil construction. The construction of the dampers shall be robust and tight fitting. They should be made from 18 gauge galvanized sheets. The depth should be minimum of 150mm and flanges of 40mm. Blades shall be connected with a suitable linkage for operation by an extending by an extending lever, which shall have a locking quadrant with positions of the damper indicated on it. Dampers and their operating device shall be made robust, easily operable and accessible through suitable access doors in the ducts.

Dampers shall be provided in ducts at every branch supply or return air duct connections whether or not indicated on the drawings for the proper volume control and balancing the system.

Where shown, splitter dampers shall be installed. This damper consists of double thickness airfoil blade hinged on the downstream edge. The operating lever shall extend outside the duct and insulation with an airtight hub and locking arrangements. The thickness of the damper blades shall be the same as the duct in which they are installed but not less than 1.5mm thickness.

86

Fire dampers shall be motorized / solenoid type wherever specified shall be provide in the ducts to minimize spreading of fire through ducts, i.e. points where duct passes fire (rated 1 ½ hrs. or more) wall or slab. Fire dampers shall be 230mm – deep and face area as required. The outlet casing of the damper shall be fabricated out of 12 gauges M.S. sheet duly epoxy painted with two coats. The louvers shall be provided with smooth pivoted linkage, tripping mechanism of steel bar with heavy-duty spring assembly and provision of motor. The louvers to be arranged to pivot and hold in an open position and can be closed by an electrically operated motor. The damper is used in conjunction with a smoke alarm system. The entire assembly shall be duly epoxy primer of 2 coats (epoxy paint) or aluminum spray painted. The dampers shall be designed for automatic as well as manual tripping.

Motors shall be rated for fire damper (spring to close power to open) operation and shall be suitable for outdoor installation (IP55). Fire dampers are closed on a signal from the fire control module. Module supply and wiring by fire control contractor.

Motorised dampers should be single flap dampers with 18 gauge construction with Belimo or Equivalent make spring return type. Opening time should be more than 75secs. And closing time should be 30secs. The power shall be given from the electrical panel and will be routed through the unit.

300mm X 300mm access panels with gasket neoprene and stud bolt type shall be provided near lower dampers/ splitters dampers and fire damper. All main ducting work shall be accessible throughout using tight fitted hinged access doors. Doors shall be cemented sponge rubber gaskets of 6mm thickness. Felt is not acceptable. In the case of insulated ducts with access doors, the same shall be properly insulated, such that it can be operated

without damaging the duct insulation and there should be no condensation either on the access doors or on the ducts when he plant is running.

4. Installation Guidelines

The duct fabrication and installation shall generally confirm to IS 655-1963.

All ducts shall be supported from the concrete slab or beams. Duct supports shall be fixed through the use of two anchor fasteners for each leg. The anchor fasteners shall be of approved make. If ducting is supported from steel structure, Beam Clamps shall be provided. In no case shall the duct be supported from the false ceiling hangers or be permitted to rest on a hung ceiling.

Transverse joints shall be provided with rubber gaskets (6mm thk.) of nonflammable type. Use of felt shall not be permitted.

Wherever the ducts are acoustically lined, the duct size shall be increased by the thickness of the duct lining.

The contractor shall provide and neatly erect all sheet metal work as per the specifications and drawings. This work ,in all its parts and details, shall meet with the approval of the Engineer

The contractor shall make all necessary allowances and provisions for beams, pipes or other obstructions in the ducting, whether or not the same has been shown in the drawings. Wherever necessary to avoid beams or other structural works, plumbing or other pipes / conduits, the ducts shall be transformed, divided or curved to one side as approved or directed by the Engineer. However the required cross-sectional area shall be maintained.

All metal work shall be done in dead or furred down spaces so as not to cause any delay to other contractors on the building.

87

If a duct cannot be installed as shown in the drawings, the contractor shall install the duct between the required points by any path available subject to the approval of the Engineer and Architect.

All ducts shall be rigid and shall be adequately supported with standing seams, tees or angles of ample size wherever required to keep the ducts true to shape, prevent buckling, vibration and breathing.

All duct joints shall be tightly fitted using rubber gasket of nonflammable type and all interior surfaces shall be smooth. Bends shall be made with radius not less than one-half of the width of the duct or with properly designed interior curved vanes. Two vanes shall be spaced such that the aspect ratio of each of the individual elbows formed by the vane will be about five to one.

All sheet metal connections, partitions and plenums required to confine the flow of air to and through the filters and fans, shall be constructed from 16G galvanised iron thoroughly stiffened with 25mm X 25mm angle iron braces and fitted with all necessary doors as required to give access to all parts of the apparatus. Doors shall not be less than 46 cm X 71cm. Sheet Metal connections to indoor units shall be flexible, double thickness fiberglass cloth or equivalent nonflammable material of 100mm long.

Where metal ducts or sleeves terminate in woodwork, brick or masonry openings tight joints shall be made by the means of closely fittings heavy flanged collars.

Resistoflex or similar vibration isolation material of 6mm thickness shall be provided between ducts and duct support.

Where ductwork is connected to rotating equipment duct such as fans, air handling units (indoor unit of split/package system), the connections shall be made with double thickness nonflammable flexible material, 100mm long.

5. Grilles and Diffusers:

Supply Air Side Wall Outlets

Wherever specified in the B.O.Q. shall be in Aluminum construction.

Double Deflection Grilles:

Wherever specified in the B.O.Q. shall be in Aluminum construction. Aluminum double deflection grills for supply air shall be provided with vertical and horizontal adjustable bars and an approved blade damper adjustable from the front face of the grille. The grilles will be powder -coated in a shade as given in the schedule of finishes of this handbook.

Fixed Bar Linear Grilles

Fixed bar grilles will be in extruded aluminum construction. Bars shall be fixed in position using

vertical tie bars. Bar spacing shall not exceed 12mm and the grilles shall have 60% free area.

Deflection angle of the bars shall be 0. The grilles will be powder coated in a shade as per the

owner/architect. Irrespective of grille finish, vertical tie bars shall be powder coated in Matt

black. Supply air outlets shall be provided with volume control dampers to be installed in the

duct collar. Dampers shall be in black Matt powder coated finish. Where required by the

Architects/Consultants, the grilles shall be provided with a margin on all sides. Supply air outlets

shall be provided with end closure pieces for the supply portion of the grille. The end closure

pieces shall not come to the grille face.

• Continuous grilles shall butt with hairline joints and be provided with interlocking

splines.

88

• All return air grilles shall be similar and equal to the above as determined by consultants.

• All exhaust air grilles shall be similar and equal to the supply air grilles specified above.

6. Ceiling Outlets:

Square / Rectangular Diffusers:

Shall be of aluminum construction wherever specified in the BOQ. Corners of inner and

outer cores shall be assembled to provide precise mitered corners. Supply air diffusers

shall be provided with multi blade butterfly dampers. Damper flaps shall be provided

with a nylon worm gear assembly for ease of operation. Diffusers will be powder -coated

in a shade as approved by client/Architect. Diffuser shall be half step down type.

7. Guidelines for Installation of Grilles/Diffusers

Installation of the grilles/diffusers shall be done by the air conditioning contractor

irrespective of the type/model of false ceiling systems .The diffusers will have to be

individually suspended from the duct and aligned to match the ceiling line level. In case

gypsum or any other false ceiling system, all wooden frames, rectangular or circular for

supply/return/exhaust air diffusers will be provided by the Air conditioning contractor.

All air outlets/return air inlets in the same room shall be of the same size unless

otherwise specified.

Grilles and diffuser samples must be submitted to the consultants for prior approval

before procurement and installation.

Duct and Pipe Insulation

Ductwork shall be insulated as per the below specified guidelines.

Painting

Angle iron Flanges, Stiffeners, hangers and supports shall be painted with 2 coats of anti-

rust primer and remaining uncovered duct shall be further painted with 2 coats of

synthetic enamel paints of black color.

Testing and Balancing

After completion of ducting work, system shall be tested for air leakage as per DW-142

standard. Leakage if any shall be plugged and all the adjustments and balancing are

completed. The air quantity readings shall be recorded. All dampers shall be set and

locked in position after the final adjustments. All readings made shall be submitted to

the consultants for approval.

Insulation

All tests like pressure testing should be completed and recorded. All systems shall be approved

by the Consultants before insulation is applied to the equipment, duct and piping. Insulation

material shall be supplied by approved manufacturers and shall be of the type specifically

intended for the services required. Ductwork & Piping Insulation Application Guidelines :

Piping and accessory insulation application shall be as follows:

Pipes shall be thoroughly cleaned with wire brush and rendered free from all rust and grease.

89

For insulation of straight pipe slip on method shall be used. For elbows and bends snap off method will be used.

First 2 coats of specified Insulation adhesive shall be applied then the Insulation shall be fixed tightly on the surface taking care to seal all joints .

Adequately sized PVC self-adhesive tape shall be provided to seal all joints afterwards Al cladding shall be done as per requirements.

Ductwork Insulation : Preformed pipe sections of chemically cross linked closed cell

polyethylene FR-XPE of fire retardant grade in roll form the insulation up to 32 mm thick and

density shall not be less than 33 kg/m3 and the thermal conductivity shall be 0.027kcal/hrm2C

at mean temperature of 0 C. The insulation thickness shall be 19 mm on all ducts except the

toilet and basement exhaust.

Pipework Insulation :

All chilled water and drain pipes Insulation shall be as follows. The material will be Closed cell

ARMACELL Pipe Sections of 32 mm thk..

( C ) Electrical System & Control Panel, Motors and switchgears

1. General

This specification covers the designs, material, construction features, manufacture,

inspection and testing at the VENDOR'S/his sub-contractors work, delivery and

performance testing of metal-enclosed Medium Voltage Switchgear of voltage not

exceeding 1000 V AC.

The switchgears would comprise of Motor Control Centres (MCCs) required for the supply

of power to the motors of the plant for medium voltage equipment.

2. Codes & Standards

The design, construction, manufacture and performance of equipment shall conform to

latest applicable standards and comply with all currently applicable statutes, regulations

and safety codes in the locality where the equipment will be installed. Nothing in this

specification shall be construed to relieve the VENDOR of this responsibility. Equipment

shall conform to the latest applicable standards as mentioned. In case of conflict between

the standards and this specification, this specification shall govern. All components shall

be of reputed make and subject to Purchaser's approval and as per recommended

manufacture.

3 Power Supply System

The incomer power supply shall be 415V, 3 phase, 3 wire, 50 Hz, non-effectively earthed

AC system. The fault level for the switchgear shall be 40 KA for 1 sec.

Dynamic - 84 Ka (Peak) - Short time

Variation of voltage and frequency from their rated values are as below :

Variation of voltage + 10%

Variation of frequency + 5%

90

Combined voltage and frequency

variation + 10% 4 Site Conditions

The following site conditions shall be considered for the design of the MCCs

Reference Temperature }

Relative Humidity } Ref :As per ASHRE guideline

Climatic Conditions }

5 Sheet Metal Work

The switchgear frame shall be fabricated using suitable mild steel structural sections or

pressed and shaped cold rolled sheet steel of thickness not less than 2 mm.

Frames shall be enclosed by sheet metal of thickness not less than 2 mm cold rolled or

2.5mm hot rolled, smoothly finished, levelled and free from flaws. Doors and covers shall

be made of sheet steel of thickness not less than 1.6mm. Cold rolled or 2mm hot rolled.

Stiffeners shall be provided wherever necessary.

All panel edges and door edges shall be reinforced against distortion by rolling, bending or

by the addition of welded reinforcement members.

Cut-outs shall be true in shape and devoid of sharp edges.

The complete structure shall be rigid, self-supporting, free from vibration, twists and

bends.

6 Painting

All sheet steel work shall be phosphated in accordance with the following procedure and

in accordance with applicable standards.

Oil, grease, dirt and swarf shall be thoroughly removed by emulsion cleaning.

Rust and scale shall be removed by pickling with dilute acid followed by washing with

running water, rinsing with slightly alkaline hot water and drying.

After phosphating, thorough rinsing shall be carried out with clean water, followed by final

rinsing with dilute dichromate solution and oven drying.

Panels shall be dry electrostatic painted (powder coated).

Finished painted appearance of equipment shall present an aesthetically pleasing

appearance, free from dents and uneven surfaces.

7 Constructional Features

Switchgear panel shall be :

a) of the metal enclosed, indoor, floor mounted modular type

b) made up of the requisite vertical sections

c) of dust and vermin proof construction

d) provided with a degree of protection of IP-54

e) easily extendable on both sides by the addition of vertical sections after removing

the ends covers

91

f) provided with a metal frame made of structural steel channel section

properlydrilled for mounting the Switchgear along with necessary mounting

hardware. Hardware shall be zinc plated and passivated

g) provided with labels on the front indicating the switchgear designation

h) provided with cable entry facilities at top or bottom with 3mm thick removable

and plates and necessary cable glands. For 1 core cables these plates shall be

non-magnetic

i) of uniform height of not more than 2450 mm

j) of double front execution

k) provided with gaskets all round the perimeter of adjacent panels, panel and base

frame, removable covers and doors

l) provided with copper busbars running at the top or bottom, as required, all along

the length of the switchgear in a separate sheet steel enclosure.

Operating devices shall be incorporated only in the front of the Switchgear. The Switchgear shall

be provided into distinct vertical sections each comprising:

a) A completely metal enclosed busbar compartment running horizontally.

b) Individual feeder modules arranged in multi-tier formation. It is essential that the

modules are integral multiples of the basic unit size to provide for flexibility in changes, if

any, at site.

c) Enclosed vertical busbars serving all modules in the vertical sections. For safety isolation

of the vertical busbars, insulating barrier with cut-outs shall be provided to allow the

power stab contacts to engage with vertical busbars.

d) A vertical cable alley covering the entire height. The cable alley shall be minimum 200mm

wide for motor control modules and 500mm wide for circuit breaker controlled

modules.

e) A horizontal separate enclosure for all auxiliary power and control buses, as required, shall

be located so as to enable easy identification, maintenance and segrgation from the main

power buses. Tap-off connections from these buses shall be arranged separately for each

vertical section.

Each vertical section shall be equipped with space heaters which may be located in the

cable alley as specified in schedule of quantities.

One metal sheet to be provided between two adjacent vertical sections running to the full

height of the switchgear except for the horizontal busbar compartment. However, each

shipping section shall have metal sheets at both ends.

All equipment associated with a single circuit shall be housed in a separate module

compartment of the vertical section. The compartment shall be sheet steel enclosed on all

sides and the rear, with the withdrawable units in position or removed, except on the cable alley side. A plate cover with a slot to permit wiring connections shall be provided

on the side corresponding to the cable alley. The front of the compartment shall be

provided with a hinged door.

92

For dial out type, modules, only the handles of control and selector switches, push

buttons, knobs and cut-outs for lamps and meters shall be arranged on the front doors of

the respective compartments to permit operation without opening the door. On circuit

breaker controlled circuits, protective relays shall be mounted on the front door of the

compartment. All other equipment pertaining to a circuit shall be mounted on the

withdrawable chassis. All cut-outs shall be provided with gaskets for the purpose of

dust-proofing.

Current transformers shall not be directly mounted on the buses. Current transformers on

circuit breaker controlled circuits shall be mounted on the fixed portion of the

compartment.

In breaker compartments, suitable barriers shall be placed between circuit breakers and all

control, protective and indication circuit equipment including instrument transformers.

External cable connections shall be carried out in separate cable compartments for power

and control cables.

After isolation of power and control connections of a circuit, it shall be possible to safely

carry out maintenance in a compartment with the busbars and adjacent circuits live.

The withdrawl chassis shall move on suitable guides and on suitably plated steel or

stainless steel rollers or balls to facilitate easy withdrawal.

Cable alleys shall be provided with suitable hinged doors. It shall be possible to safely

carry out maintenance of cable connections to any one circuit with the busbars and

adjacent live circuits. Adequate number of slotted cable support arms shall be provided

for dressing the cables. All doors shall be provided with concealed type hinges and captive

screws.

The withdrawable chassis housing circuit breakers shall be of the fully drawout type. The

chassis/base plate housing feeder control and motor control equipment not incorporating

circuit breakers shall be of the fully-drawout, or fixed type.

a) Fully Drawout Type

In this type of construction it shall be possible to drawout the withdrawable chassis

without having to unscrew or unbolt any connections to the equipment mounted on the

withdrawable chassis. The power and control drawout type connections shall be of the

stab-in or sliding type. All drawout contracts, including the auxiliary and control wiring

shall be of self-aligning type. b) Fixed Type

In this type of construction all power connections to the equipment mounted on the base

plate shall be of the bolted type. All control circuit connections to equipment mounted on

the base plate shall be carried out through conventional terminal blocks mounted in the

respective base plate. It shall be possible to remove the base plate after

unbolting/unscrewing all the power and control circuit connections to the equipment

mounted on the base plate.

93

c) Interchangeability

All identical equipment and corresponding parts including chassis of drawout modules of

the same size shall be fully interchangeable, without having to carry out modifications. For

trouble free interchangeability, the drawout arrangements shall be designed such that

normal dimensional variations are taken care of by self-aligning feature of the modules.

Components and equipment that are not fully interchangeable will be rejected. VENDOR

shall replace all such equipment by fully interchangeable equipment at his cost.

Switchgear shall be designed in such a way that all component equipment and bus bars

operate satisfactorily without exceeding their respective maximum permissible rise in

temperature under ambient temperature conditions prevailing with the switchgear

cubicle, with reference ambient temperature outside the switchgear cubicles.

All dummy cubicles necessary to meet the requirements of this specification shall be

included in the VENDOR's scope.

No equipment/devices associated with a particular circuit shall be mounted in any other

circuit module.

8 Main And Auxiliary Buses

a) Main buses & Tape

Switchgear shall be provided with three phase busbars and neutral.

Busbars shall be of uniform cross section throughout the length of the switchgear.

The busbars shall be made of high conductivity copper alloy of E9IE grade.

Busbars shall be provided with at least the minimum clearances in air as per applicable

standards for a 500V, 3 phase system.

All bus-bars, bus-taps shall be insulated with close fitting sleeve of hard, smooth, dust and

dirt free plastic insulation of high dielectric strength (450 V/mil) to provide a permanent

high dielectric non-ageing and non-tracking protection; imprevious to water, tropical

conditions and fungi. The insulation shall be non-inflammable and self-extinguishing and

in fast colours to indicate phase. The joints shall be insulated in uch a way as to provide

for accessibility of contact bolts for maintenance. The dielectric strength and properties

shall hold good for the temperature range of 0 deg.C to 90 deg.C Busbars shall be adequately supported and braced to withstand the stresses due to the

specified short circuit currents for the associated switchgear. Busbars supports shall be

made of Hylam sheets, glass reinforced moulded plastic material, permali wood or cast

resin.

Separate supports shall be provided for each phase of the busbars. If a common support is

provided for all three phases, antitracking barriers shall be incorporated.

Busbar joints shall be complete with high tensile steel bolts and lock washers and nuts.

Busbars shall be thoroughly cleaned at the joint locations and a suitable contact grease

shall be applied just before making a joint.

b) Auxiliary Buses

94

Auxiliary buses for control power supply, space heater power supply or any other specified

service shall be provided. These buses shall be insulated, adequately supported and sized

to suit specific requirements. The material of control power supply buses shall be

electrolytic copper. The material for space heater power supply buses shall be same as

that for the main power buses. Supply transformer(s), auxiliary busbars and necessary

connections to the supply transformers and associated circuits shall be in the VENDOR's

scope.

9 Circuit Breakers

a) Circuit breakers shall be of the airbreak drawout type, mounted along with its

operating mechanism on a wheeled carriage moving on guides, designed to align correctly

and allow easy movements.

- of the shunt trip type.

- provided with an operating mechanism of the type specified.

- provided with mechanically operated targets to show 'Open', 'Closed', 'Service' and

'Test' positions of the circuit breaker.

- provided with mechanical operated, red 'trip' push button, shrouded to prevent

accidental operation.

- provided with locking facilities in the 'Service', 'Test' and 'Isolated', positions. In test

position the breaker will be tested without energising the power circuits. The

breaker shall remain fuly housed inside the compartment in the test position.

- provided with 6 No. and 6NC potential free auxiliary contacts, rated 10A at 240V

A.C. and 1A (inductive breaking) at 220 V D.C.

- provided with 'red', 'green' and 'amber' indicating lamps to show 'closed', 'open'

and 'auto-trip' conditions of the circuit breaker when breaker operation is

controlled by a control switch. b) Circuit breakers shall be provided with the following interlocks.

It shall not be possible to plug-in a closed circuit breaker, or to drawout a circuit breaker in

the closed position.

It shall not be possible to operate a circuit breaker unless it is in the fully plugged-in, test,

or fully isolated position.

c) Circuit breaker closing and trip coils shall be rated for satisfactory operation on a control

supply system indicated in Data Sheet-A.

d) Closing and trip coil shall operate satisfactorily under the following conditions of supply

voltage variation :

Closing coils-85% to 110% of rated voltage.

Trip coils-50% to 110% of rated voltage.

The breakers controlling motors shall operate satisfactory under following conditions :-

i) Direct-on-line starting of the specified motor.

ii) Breaking no load current of the specified motor.

95

e) Operating Mechanism

Circuit breaker shall be provided with operating mechanism as specified .

Power operated mechanism shall be of the motor wound spring charging stored energy

type.

The closing action of the circuit breaker shall charge the tripping spring ready for tripping.

Speed of closing of contacts shall be independent of the speed with which the handle is

operated.

All stored energy mechanisms shall be provided with mechanical Indicaters to show the

`charged' and `discharged' conditions of the spring.

Circuit breakers provided with stored energy operating mechanisms shall be provided with

the following interlocks.

i) The circuit breaker shall not close unless the spring is fully charged.

ii) Shocks, vibrations, or failure of springs shall not operate the breaker or prevent intended

tripping.

Power operated mechanism shall be

i) Provided with a universal motor suitable for operation on A.C. and D.C. control supplies

specified in Annexure-A with voltage variation from 85% to 110% rated voltage.

ii) Designed to enable a continuous sequence of closing and opening operation as long as

power is available and at least one opening operation on power supply failure.

iii) Provided with emergency manual charging facilities. 10. Moulded Case Circuit Breaker :

Moulded case circuit breakers shall be made of insulating case and cover made of high

strength, heat resistant and frame-retardant thermosetting insulating material.

The switching mechanism shall be made/quick-break type utilizing a trip free toggle

mechanism. The handle position shall give positive indication of weather the breaker is

ON(top), OFF(down) or tripped (midway). For overload protection, three bimetal magneto-

thermal release and electromagnets releases for short circuit protection to be provided.

The magneto-thermal release shall be variation and direct acting. All releases shall

operate on a common trip bar so that all phases are disconnected in the event when fault

occurs even on only one of them.

The contacts shall be made of silver allow and arc chutes shall be made of de-lon plates.

These plates shall be housed in a vulcanised fibre casing. The arc chutes shall be capable

of quenching the arc rapidly and drawing away the arc from contact tips. The terminates

shall have sufficiently large dimensions to accept links or cable lugs of suitable sizes.

11 Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCB)

a) MCBs shall be hand operated, air break, quick make, quick break type conforming to

applicable standards.

96

b) MCB shall be provided with overload/short-circuit protective device for protection under

overload and short-circuit conditions. The minimum breaking capacity of MCBs shall be 3

KA r.m.s. at 415V/220V D.C.

c) MCBs shall be provided with locking facility.

12 Air Break Switches

a) Air break switches shall be of heavy duty, group operated load break, fault make type,

complying with the requirements of applicable standards.

b) The switches shall be capable of withstanding the thermal stresses caused by overloads,

locked rotor and short circuit currents of values associated with protective relay settings

and the let through current of the associated fuse.

c) The switches shall be capable of withstanding the mechanical stresscaused by the peak

short circuit current of value equal of the cut-off current of the associated fuse.

d) Whenever solid links are used for the connections between switches and fuses, such links

shall be fitted with insulated sleeves.

e) All live parts of the switch shall be shrouded.

f) Switch operating handles shall be suitable for padlocking in 'OFF' position.

g) Each switch shall be interlocked with the associated compartment door to achieve the

following interlocks. It shall be possible to open the door only when the switch is in the

'OFF' position. It shall not be possible to close the switch with the door open. Suitable means however shall be provided to intentionally release the interlocks specified

above for making trip setting adjustments and operation tests.

13 Fuses

Fuses generally shall be of the HRC cartridge fuse-link type having a certified repturing

capacity of not less than 80 kv at 440 V. Fuses upto 63A for distribution systems of

medium short circuit levels may be of HRC cartridge screw-cap type, having a certified

rupturing capacity of not less than 46ka at 440 V and 16 KA at 250V DC.

Fuses shall be provided with visible indication to show that they have operated.

Fuses shall preferably be mounted on moulded plastic carriers and shall be complete with

fuse bases. Wherever it is not possible to mount fuses on carriers, fuses shall be directly

mounted on plug in type of bases. In such cases an insulated fuse pulling handle shall be

provided for each size of fuse for each switch board.

14 Motor Starters

a) Contactor

Motor starter contactors shall be of the electromagnetic type rated for uninterrupted duty

as defined in applicable standards.

Main contacts of motor starter contactors shall be of silver plated copper.

Each motor-starter contactor shall be provided with two NO and two NC auxiliary

contacts.

Insulation class of operating coils shall be class B or better.

97

Operating coils of contactors shall be suitable for operation from the specified control

supply system.

Contactors shall be of the double break, non-gravity type.

One number spare auxiliary contactor with 4 No./4NC contact along with its coil

completely wired up to the terminal should be provided.

b) Direct-On-Line Starters

Direct-on-line starters shall be suitable for Class AC 3 utilisation category.

c) Reversing Starters

Reversing starters shall comprise forward and reverse contactors, electrically interlocked

with each other.

Reversing starters shall be suitable for Class AC 4 duty.

d) Thermal Overload Relays

Starters shall be complete with a three elements, positive acting, ambient temperature

compensated, time lagged thermal overload relay with adjustable settings. The settings

range shall be properly selected in accordance with the rating of the motor.

Thermal overload relays shall be hand reset type.

`Stop' push button of the starter and hand reset device shall be separate from each other.

Overload relay hand reset push button shall be brought out on the front of the

compartment door.

Overload relay shall be provided with atleast one 'NO' and one 'NC' or one change-over

contact.

15 Current Transformers

Current transformers shall be of the dry type.

Current transformer shall have a short time withstand rating equal to the short time

withstand rating of the associated switchgear for one second.

Unless otherwise specified, the minimum performance requirement of current

transformers are as follows :-

a) Measuring CTs-7.5VA, accuracy class 1.0 and an instrument safety factor of 5.

b) Protective CTs - 7.5 VA, accuracy class 5P and an accuracy limit factor of 10.

Notwithstanding the above it shall be the VENDOR'S responsibility to coordinate the

current transformer burden with the requirements of relays, instruments and leads

associated with that particular current transformer.

Test links shall be provided in both secondary leads of the CTs to easily carry out current

and phase angle measurement tests.

All current transformers shall be earthed through a separate earth link on the terminal

block to permit easy measurement of the current transformer insulation resistance. (CTs

built-in with the thermal relays of the contactors are excluded).

16 Voltage Transformer

Voltage transformers shall be of dry type.

98

Unless otherwise specified, the minimum performance requirements of voltage

transformers are as follows :

a) Measuring VTs - 15 VA per phase and accuracy class 1.0.

b) Protective VTs - 15 VA per phase and accuracy class 1.0.

c) Dual purpose VTs - 100 VA and dual accuracy class 1.0/3.0 for metering and

protection respectively. VA is per phase.

All secondary windings of voltage transformers including open delta windings shall be

rated for 110/ 3 V per phase.

Voltage transformers shall have a continuous overvoltage factor of 1.2 and short time

overvoltage factor as follows : 1.5 for 30 seconds in case of effectively earthed. 1.9 for 8 hours in case of non-effectively

earthed system.

Voltage transformers shall be complete with suitable rated primary, secondary and

tertiary fuses. Primary fuses shall have a rupturing capacity equal to the rupturing capacity

rating of the associated switchgear. Fuses shall be provided on each sub circuit.

It shall be possible to replace voltage transformers without having to de-energise the main

bus bars.

The terminals of V.T. secondary and tertiary windings which are required to be connected

to earth shall be earthed by an isolating link without a fuse.

17 Relays

The following clauses shall apply to the protective relays. Single phasing preventers relay

shall be provided when required to protect motor against single phasing. The relay shall

not operate for supply voltage unbalance of + 5% but shall positively operate for supply

voltage unbalance of more than + 5%. The relay shall operate in the event of a single

phase fuse blowing even though the motor c.m.f. in the concerned phase is of the order of

85%.

After sensing single phasing the relay shall operate with a time delay of 2 to 3 sec. The

relay shall not operate for a 3 phase power supply failure. The relay shall be of the hand

reset type with a hand reset push button. Resetting shall be instantaneous and

independent of the adjusted time delay in the tripping of the unit. Visual indication for the

operation of the relay shall be provided.

The relay shall be suitable for application to protect reversible and non-reversible motors.

The relay operation shall be independent of the motor KW rating, the loading conditions

prior to the occurence of the single phasing and rpm of the motor. The relay shall be of the

fail safe type and shall operate to trip the motor when the relay internal wiring is

accidentally open circuited.

Relay shall be -

a) Enclosed in dust proof flush mounting drawout type cases.

b) Accessible for setting and resetting from the front.

99

c) Provided with positive acting hand-reset flag indicators visible from the front.

Access to setting devices shall be possible only after the front covers are removed. Access

to resetting devices shall be external to the case.

Auxiliary relays shall be rated to operate satisfactorily between 70% and 110% rated

voltage.

Each relay shall be provided with at least two separate voltage from contacts.

Make and type of relays shall be subject to the EIC approval. 18 Indicating Instruments And Meters

Electrical indicating instruments shall be of minimum 96mm x96mm square size, suitable

for flush mounting.

Indicating instruments shall have provision for zero adjustment outside the cover.

Instrument dials shall be parallex free with black numerals on a white dial.

Ammeters provided on motor circuits shall be provided with a suppressed extended scale

to indicate motor starting current.

Watthour meters shall be of the direct reading electro-dynamometer type complete with

cyclometer type dials and reverse running stops.

19 Indicating Lamps

Indicating lamps shall be :

a) of the filament type and of low watt consumption

b) provided with services resistors

c) provided with translucent lamp covers of colours 'Red', 'Green' and 'Amber' as

required in the control wiring diagrams. Bulbs and lenses shall be easily

replaceable from the front.

20 Control And Selector Switches

Control and selector switches shall be :

a) of the rotary type

b) adequately rated for the purpose intended (Minimum acceptable rating is 10A

continuous at 240V AC and 1A inductive break) 220V DC.

c) provided with escutcheon plates clearly marked to show the positions.

Control switches for circuit breakers shall be provided with pistol grip type handles.

Control switches for circuit breaker control shall be provided with contact

development and sequencing device.

d) Selector switches shall be :of the maintained contact stayput type. Switches in

ammeter circuits shall have make-before-break type contact provided with oval

handles.

21 Push Buttons

Push button shall be :

a) of the momentary contact, push to actuate type rated to carry 10A at 240V

AC and 1A (inductive breaking) at 220V DC.

100

b) fitted with self reset, 2 NO and 2 NC contacts.

c) provided with integral escutcheon plates marked with its function.

`Start', `Open', 'Close' push buttons shall be green in colour.

`Stop' push buttons shall be red in colour.

All other push buttons shall be black in colour. `Emergency Stop' push buttons shall be of the lockable in the pushed position type

and shall be shrouded to prevent accidental operation. Key shall not be required

for the operation of the push button.

22 Space Heaters ( if applicable)

Space heaters for switchgear panels shall be :

a) suitable for operation on a supply system as specified

b) provided with single pole MCD with overload and short circuit release

c) provided with thermostats to cut off the heaters at 45 deg.C.

For details for spacing between terminals; clearance between gland plate and first row

terminals; and size of gland plate refer Annexure - B, Table-I, II & III.

23 Cable Terminations

Suitable compression type heavy duty brass cable glands with nuts, rubber sealing ring and

brass washers mounted on a removable and control cables entering the switchgear shall

incorporate built in facilities for earthing the wire armour of cables. Cable glands shall be

plated to avoid corrosion.

Power cable glands and crimping type lugs shall be supplied to suit the cable sizes given in

clause 3. If during course of detailed engineering of the switchgear it is found necessary to

provide more glands or glands of higher size than those envisaged the vendor shall provide

and accommodate the same.

For supporting & clamping cable cores at regular intervals inside the cable alleys, suitable

shutted angles, upto the respective terminal blocks shall be provided.

Necessary crimping type of tinned copper cable lugs for connecting the individual cores to

the respective terminals, shall be provided.

24 Internal Wiring

Control wiring shall be of the rating of 650V and power wiring shall be of the rating of

1100V.

Wiring inside the switchgear shall be carried out with 1100/650 V grade, PVC insulated,

stranded conductor wires. Minimum size of conductor for power circuits is 4 sq.mm

copper or equivalent size aluminium conductor. Control circuits shall be wired with

copper conductor of at least 2.5 sq.mm for CT circuits and 1.5 sq.mm for other circuits, the

number and size of strands shall be 7 of 0.67 mm and 0.5mm diameter respectively.

Engraved identification ferrules, marked to correspond with the wiring diagrams shall be

fitted to each wire. Ferrules shall be of yellow colour with black lettering.

101

Wires forming part of a tripping circuit of circuit breaker shall be provided with an

additional red ferrule marked 'T'.

Spare auxiliary contacts of all equipment forming part of the switchgear shall be wired up

to the terminal blocks. Spare and unassigned modules shall be complete with internal wiring.

Wiring shall be terminated on preferably stud type terminal blocks such that the wires are

connected by cable lugs with nuts and washers/lock-nuts.

Not more than two connections shall be made on any one terminal.

25 Terminal Blocks

Terminal blocks (both for power and control circuit) shall be of reputed make specially for

CT and VT circuit. It shall comprise of finely threaded pairs of brass studs of at least 6mm

diameter, links between each pair of studs, washers, nuts and locknuts. The studs, shall be

securely locked within the mounting base to prevent their turning. Insulated barriers shall

be provided between adjacent terminals.

Terminals for circuits with voltage exceeding 125 V shall be shrouded. Terminal blocks

shall be grouped depending on circuit voltage. Different voltage groups of terminal blocks

shall be segregated.

Terminal blocks shall be adequately rated to carry the current of the associated circuit.

Minimum rating of the terminal block is 10A.

Terminals shall be numbered for identification. Engraved white-on-black labels shall be

provided on the terminal blocks, describing the function of the circuit. Where duplication

of a terminal block is necessary it shall be achieved by solid bonding links.

Terminal blocks for CT secondary lead wires shall be provided with shorting and

disconnecting/earthening facilities.

Terminal blocks shall be arranged with at least 100mm clearance between two sets of

terminal blocks.

Control terminals for external connections shall be suitable for terminating at least two

conductors each of 2.5 sq.mm size.

26 Labels

All labels shall comprise white letters one a black background.

Labels shall be made of non-rusting metal or 3-ply lamicoid, or engraved PVC.

Labels shall be properly fixed, with provision to prevent distortion due to expansion.

Size of lettering shall be 6mm.

27 Earthing

Each MCC and LCC shall be provided with an earth bus bar running along the entire length

of the board. Material and size of the earth bus bar shall be as specified in data sheets. At

either end of the earth bus, one (1) clamp type terminal with nuts, bolts and washers shall

102

be provided for bolting the main earthing copper conductor of size and material indicated

in data sheets. In case the earth bus is provided near top of the switchgear, one down

comer at either end shall be provided for connection to the main earthing conductor.

Earth busbars shall be supported at suitable intervals.

Positive connection between all the frames of equipment mounted in the switchboard and

earth busbar shall be provided by using insulated copper wires/bare busbars of cross

section equal to that of the busbar, or equal to half the size of circuit load current carrying

conductor, whichever is smaller.

All instrument and relay cases shall be connected to the earth busbar using 1100/650 V

grade, 2.5 sq.mm stranded, copper, earthing conductor.

28 Local Push Button Stations

Constructional Features

The constructional features of the local push button stations shall be as follows :

a) Metal enclosed, weather-proof suitable for mounting on wall or steel structures. The

enclosure shall be die cast aluminium or sheet metal of 2mm thickness.

b) Dust and vermin proof.

c) Provide a degree of protection of not less than IP:54.

d) Metal parts shall be given tropicalizing treatment as per standards and painted with one

coat of epoxy primer and two coats of light grey epoxy paint.

e) Provided with inscription plates of rear engraved perspex with white letters on black

background. The letter size shall be 6mm.

f) Provided with two earthing terminals suitable for 12 SWG G.I. wire.

g) Provided with removable undrilled gland plate and adequate members of cable glands

for PVC insulated, armoured cable. The cable entry shall be from the bottom.

h) All local push button stations shall have locking facility. The lock switch shall have two

positions "locked" and "unlocked". When in unlocked position the switch shall allow

individual starting of the equipment. Start/stop push buttons provided for local operation

of the equipment shall be provided on the same enclosure and stop rush buttons shall be

locakable in stop position. The lock switch shall be key operated.

Push Buttons

a) The Open/Close/Start push buttons shall be of the momentary contact push to

actuatetype.

b) The stop push buttons shall be stay put type with mushroom knob. c) All push buttons shall be :

i) Fitted with two (2) normally open and two (2) normally closed contacts rated to carry and

break 6 Amps at 415 Volts. (10A at 240 AC).

ii) Provided with integral escutcheon plates marked with its function.

d) 'Open/Close/Start' push buttons shall be green colour.

e) 'Stop' push button shall be red in colour.

103

Wiring

The push button stations shall be as follows : Push button station Type-A - Each P.B.,

station shall comprise three push buttons viz. 'OPEN' 'CLOSE' and 'STOP' for control of

reversible motors.

Push button station type B - Each P.B. station shall comprise two push buttons viz. `START'

and 'STOP' for control of non-reversible motors.

Push button station type-C - Each P.B. station shall comprise only one push button i.e.

`STOP' for emergency stop function.

Power - Electricity at specified voltage (415/220V).

29.2 The controls shall be complete with actuators, probes, relays, transformers, wiring,

etc.

Safety controls of chilled water unit shall be as under :

a) Compressor - High/Low pressurestat/manual reset type high

bearing temperature safety.

b) Chiller thermostat - Manual reset type antifreeze.

c) Oil pressure - Differential safety switch with manual

reset button. it should have a time delay relay for

start up of the compressor.

d) Main motor - Thermal relay to avoid overloading of motor &

overheating of winding.Interlocks for refrigeration unit shall be :

a) Flow switches in condenser and chiller lines to prevent compressor starting without water

flow.

b) Oil temperature to be maintained at set point.

c) Condenser and chilled water pumps and cooling tower fans shall be interlocked with

chilling units to prevent operation without pump and cooling tower fan running.

30 Tests

Switchgear shall be subjected to following tests :

a) Temperature rise test on power circuits.

b) Short time current tests on power circuits.

c) Mechanical operation test.

d) High voltage test.

e) Electrical control interlock and sequential operation tests.

f) Verification of wiring as per approved schematic.

Type tests and routine tests shall be carried out on all associated equipment as per

relevant standards.

Certified copies of all type and routine test certificates shall be submitted for the Engineers

approval before despatch of the switchgear.

104

31 Drawings And Data

As part of proposal BIDDER shall furnish the following drawings and data :

For each switchgear, overall dimension drawing showing front view, plan, elevation

and cross-section.

All drawings and data sheets shall be annotated in English.

Electrical Cabling Works

CABLES:

1100 Volt Grade XLPE insulated, armoured, sheathed aluminium conductor power / control along with PVC insulated aluminium conductor Armoured cables shall be used for connecting motors.

CABLE GLANDS:

Heavy duty compression type cable gland alongwith the cable lugs shall be used for termination of cables. The cable glands shall be of cadmium plates brass. For all power cables, crimped type copper cable lugs shall be provided.

The cable trays shall be channel type made out of M.S. sheets (slotted) having a minimum thickness of 2mm duly painted. (Cable trays exposed to atmosphere shall be hot dip galvanised). The Clamps used shall be Aluminium with G.I/Cadmium plated nut-bolts. The size of these trays shall be selected considering the number of cables and leaving minimum 20% spare area. The arrangement of cables in these trays shall be in Single Tier Formation.

Sharp bending of the cables shall be avoided. The radius for bending PVC insulated cable and sheath armoured cable shall not be less than 10D where "D" overall diameter of the cable. Wherever cable rises from concrete trenches, these shall be taken in G.I. pipes of suitable size. The Contractor shall make sure that the 40% area of pipe shall be free after the cable is laid.

WIRE SIZES

Final connection to the equipment shall be through flexible wiring enclosed in galvanised flexible conduit rigidly clamped at both ends. An isolator shall be provided near each motor/equipment wherever the motor/equipment is separated from the supply panel through a partition barrier or through ceiling construction. P.V.C. insulated single strand hard drawn copper conductor wires shall be used inside the control panel for connecting different components and all the wires inside the control panel shall be neatly dressed and plastic beads shall be provided at both the ends for easy identification. All the wires shall be suitably sized for motor duty.

EARTHING

Main power upto the Electrical panels in Plant rooms shall be provided by THSTI. All necessary copper and aluminium ground industrial earthing shall be in the scope of the turnkey contractor. Each panel shall be earthed properly as per B.O.Q and specifications. All the motor, Pumps, MCC, control devices etc. shall be double earthed to the panel. All three phase motors/equipment shall be earthed with two independent earth conductors as per the requirement of Indian Electricity Rules and Regulation - 1956.

105

DRAWINGS

Shop drawing for control panel and wiring of equipment showing the route of conduit/cables shall be got approved by the Consultant/Architect before starting the fabrication of panel and starting the work.On completion four sets of completion/"As installed" drawings incorporating all details like conduit routes, number of wires in conduit, location of panels, switches, junction/pull boxes and cable route etc. shall be furnished by the Contractor.

TESTING

Before commissioning of the equipment the entire Electrical Installation shall be tested in accordance with code of Practice IS:732-1963 (Revised) and test report furnished by a qualified and authorised person. The entire electrical installation shall be got approved by Electrical Inspector and certificate from Electrical Inspector shall be submitted. All tests shall be carried out in presence of Consultant/Architect.

Painting

All sheet steelwork shall undergo a process of degreasing, pickling in acid, cold rinsing, phosphatising passivating and then sprayed with a high corrosion resistant primer. It shall then be baked in an oven. The finishing treatment shall be by application of synthetic enamel paint of approved shade.

Mode of Measurement

1 General

This specification covers measurement of various items/materials at site.

2 Unit Prices in the Schedule of Quantities

The item description in the Schedule of Quantities is in the form of a condensed resume.

The unit price shall be held to include every thing necessary to complete the work covered

by this item in accordance with the specifications and drawings. The sum of all the

individual item prices shall represent the total price of the installation ready to be handed

over.

The unit price of the various items shall include All equipment, machinery, apparatus and

materials required as well as the cost of any tests which the consultant may request in

addition to the tests generally required to prove quality and performance of equipment.

All the labour required to supply and install the complete installation in accordance with

the specifications.Use of any tools, equipment, machinery, lifting tackle, scaffolding

ladders etc. required by the contractor to carry out his work. All the necessary measures to

prevent the transmission of vibration.

106

The necessary material to isolate equipment foundations, from the building structure,

wherever necessary and suggested by the Engineer.

Storage and insurance of all equipment apparatus and materials.

The Contractor's unit price shall include all equipment, apparatus material and labour

indicated in the drawings and/or specifications in conjunction with the item in question, as

well as all additional equipment, apparatus, material and labour usual and necessary to

complete the system even though not specifically shown, described or otherwise referred

to.

3 Measurements of Sheet metal ducts, grilles/diffusers, etc.

a) Sheet Metal Ducts

All duct measurements shall be taken as per actual outer duct surface area including

bends, tees, reducers, collars and other fittings. Gaskets, nuts, bolts vibration isolation

pads, vanes are included in the basic duct items of the B.O.Q.

The unit of measurements shall be the finished sheet metal surface area in metre squares.

No extra shall be allowed for overlaps. All the guide vanes, deflectors access panels, splitter dampers within the duct work shall

be considered as part of the duct and nothing will be paid extra on this account.

The unit duct price shall include all the duct hangers, supports and `Hilti' metallic fasteners

as well as any materials and labour required to complete the duct frame.

b) Box Dampers

Box dampers wherever shown or required in ducts shall be measured as per finished

inside cross-sections and paid as per the calculated are in sq.m.

c) Grilles/Diffusers

All measurements of grilles/diffusers shall be the nominal outlet size excluding the outer

flanges.

The square or rectangular grilles/diffusers shall be measured in plain sq.m.

All round diffusers shall be measured by their diameters in centimetre.

All linear diffusers shall be measured as per actual length in meters.

4 Measurements of Piping, Fittings, Valves, Fabricated Items

a) Pipe

(Including Water Piping, Oil Piping, L.P. Gas Piping, Air Piping, Vacuum Piping, etc.)

All pipes shall be measured in linear meter (to the nearest Cm.) along the axis of the pipes

and rates shall be inclusive of all fittings e.g. tees, bends, reducer, elbows, hanger support

bracket, etc. Deduction shall be made for valves in the line.

The rate quoted shall be inclusive of cutting holes, `Hilti' metallic fasteners and inclusive of

all items as specified in specifications and Schedule of Quantities.

Rates quoted shall be inclusive of providing and fixing vibration pads and wooden pieces,

wherever specified or required by the Engineer-in-Charge.

107

Flexible connections, wherever required or specified shall be measured as part of straight

length of same diameter, with no additional allowances being made for providing the

same.

The length of the pipe for the purpose of payment will be taken through the centre line of

the pipe and all fittings (e.g. tees, bends, reducers, elbows, etc.) as through the fittings are

also presumed to be pipe lengths. Nothing extra whatsoever will be paid for over and

above the fittings. For valves and flanges, section 1.16.3.2 below applies:

b) Valves and Flanges

All the C.I. and G.M. valves shall be measured according to the nominal size in mm and

shall be measured by number. Such valves shall not be counted as part of pipe length

hence deduction in pipe length, will be made wherever valves occur. All gate and globe valves shall include two nos. of flanges and two numbers 150 mm long

M.S. nipples, with one side threaded matching one of the valves, and other welded to the

M.S. slip-on- flanges.

Rate for all valves shall also include the necessary number of bolts, nuts and washers,

3mm thick insertion gasket of required temperature grade companion flanges and all

items specified in the specification.

The rates quoted shall be inclusive of making connections to the equipment, tanks, pumps,

etc. and the connection made with an installed pipe line shall be included in the rates as

per the B.O.Q.

c) Structural Supports

Structural supports including supports fabricated from pipe lengths for pipes shall be

measured as part of pipe line and hence no separate payment will be made. Rates shall be

inclusive of hoisting, cutting, jointing, welding, cutting of holes and chases in walls, slabs or

floors, painting supports and other items as described in specifications, drawings and

schedule of quantities or as required at site by Engineer-in-Charge.

d) Copper Connections for Fan Coil Units

Copper connection assembly for making connections to the fan coil units shall be

measured, as part of the fan coil unit price and shall include brass flare nuts, brass tees,

brass reducers, fittings, fixing of automatic 3 way valve, making connections and leak

testing, complete assembly as per specifications and drawings. Nothing extra shall be

payable on account of any variation in the length of copper pipe.

5 Painting

Painting of all pipes, supports, valves and fittings shall be included with the cost of these

items. Nothing extra shall be paid for this work. Painting of grilles/diffusers, tanks and

equipment wherever required shall be in the cost of these items.

6 Insulation

Measurement of insulation for vessels, piping, equipment and ducts shall be made over

the bare un insulated surface area of the metal.

a) Pipes

108

The measurements for insulation of piping shall be made in linear meters through all

valves, flanges, and fittings. Pipes/bends shall be measured along the centre line radius

between tangent points. If the outer radius is R1 and the inner radius is R2, the centre line

radius shall be measured as (R1+R2)/2. Measurement of all valves, flanges and fittings

shall be taken in running metre of pipe line as if they are also pipe lengths. Nothing extra

over the above shall be payable for insulation over valves, flanges and fittings in pipe

ine/routings. Fittings that connect two or more different sizes of pipe shall be measured as

part of the larger size. b) Ducts

The measurements for insulation of ducts shall be made in actual square meters of bare

uninsulated duct surface.

In case of bends the area shall be worked out by taking an average of inner and outer

lengths of the bends. Measure-ments for damper, flanges, fittings shall be for the surface

dimension for the connecting duct. Nothing extra over the above shall be payable for

insulation over dampers, flanges and fittings in duct routing.

c) Vessels

The area of standard dished and flat ends of vessels shall be measured as the uninsulated

body of the shell. Areas for other shapes shall be the actual calculated area. There shall be

no deduction or additions for nozzles, handle ribs, dampers, expansion joints etc. all

projections on vessels or tanks shall be measured separately as pipe/duct.

d) Accessories Insulation

The unit of measurement for accessories such as expansion tank, pumps, chiller heads etc.

shall be of uninsulated area in square meters. In case of curved or irregular surfaces,

measurements shall be taken along the curves. The unit insulation price shall include all

necessary adhesives, vapour proofing and finishing materials as well as additional labour

and material required for fixing the insulation.

109

(D) BMS Controls & SECURITY SYSTEM

General :

Building Management System envisaged to monitor and control of HVAC System, Life Safety System (LSS) which consist of Surveillance System (CCTV), Fire Detection & Fire Monitoring, Fire Clean Gas Suppression System (For BSL 3 lab area only) & Water Sprinkler suppression system for all other facility area System (FAS), and Access Control System

1. Following are the sub-systems shall be monitor and control from BMS system:

2. Heating Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC) Monitoring & Control.

3. Integration of BMS with Access Control, Fire Alarm system, CCTV,

3.1 The various controls listed below shall be electrically operated and generally comply with the specifications listed below:

3.2 In case of low voltage controls necessary step down transformers shall be provided with each control as required.

4. Chilling Unit Control:

The Chilling machines controls shall be generally standard as per the selected

manufacturer standards.

5. Air Handling Unit and Exhaust Air Unit controls:

5.1 Building Management System addressable type for hassle free automatic operation for maintaining desired BSL 3 facility laboratory internal conditions like Temperature, Pressure and Humidity with required accuracy.

5.2 3- way motorized Valve with actuator for AHU manifolds :

The motorized water valve shall be globe type and consist of CI/gunmetal valve body

with SS trim and equal percentage of flow characteristics, modulating motor and linkage.

The valve shall be of 3 way mixing type. 5.3 The water pressure gauges shall be of robust construction 100 mm dial of suitable range

and occupancy range.

5.4 The thermometers shall be mercury filled industrial stem type with metal casing and threaded fixing arrangement.

NOTE: REFER B.O.Q SECTION FOR DETAILED SPECIFICATION & SCOPE

( E ) Fire detection, address & suppuration system

SCOPE OF WORK:

1.1 Work under this section shall consist of furnishing all labour, materials, equipment and appliances necessary and required to completely install electrically operated and diesel driven fire pumps, wet riser, fire hydrant system/fire extinguishing as required by the drawings and specified hereinafter or given in the Bill of Quantities.

110

1.2 Without restricting to the generality of the foregoing, the work shall include but not limited to the following:-

1.2.1 Fire Pumps, Motor, Engine and Accessories:

a) Electrically operated and diesel driven fire fighting pumps with motors, base

plate and accessories. b) Pressure gauge with isolation valves. c) M.S./Galvanized Pipes, fittings, valves, suction strainers, suction & delivery headers

&accessories d) Foundations, vibration eliminator pads and foundation bolts. e) Pressure vessel, pressure switches etc.

1.2.2 Fire Hydrant System:

a) Piping for wet riser/hydrant systems. b) Fire Hydrant valves, canvas hose pipes, hose reels, hose cabinets, connections to fire mains. c) Isolation & non-return valves, pipe supports/welding/Fire Brigade inlet and accessories.

1.2.3 Fire Sprinkler System:

a) Piping for sprinkler systems. b) Fire Alarm control valves/Installation Control Valve (ICV) c) Sprinkler heads, Spare Sprinkler. d) Inspection & Testing assemblies.

1.2.4 Hand Appliances /Fire Extinguishers: Supply and installation of fully charged and tested fire extinguishers hand appliances water CO2, foam, dry chemical powder type, ABC stored pressure type, CO2 gas cartridge type as required by these specification and drawings. 2.0 HYDRANT SYSTEM DESCRIPTION:

2.1 The Hydrants System shall consist of one main electric pump of capacity as per

BOQ with suitable Motor, standby diesel engine driven pump of capacity as per BOQ and jockey pumps of capacity as per BOQ with suitable Motor. An underground tank for Hydrants & Sprinkler System of required capacity as per NBC for this type of project has been provided. The system shall be complete with all required accessories including valves, strainers, special fittings, instrumentation, control panels and any other components required to complete the system in all respects.

2.2 The Hydrant system shall be kept pressurized all the times.

2.3 In the event of fire when any of the hydrant valves in the network is opened, the resultant fall in the pressure shall start the jockey pump first through pressure switch automatically. In case jockey pump fails to maintain the pressure hydrant pump shall start at the preset pressure. In case of further drop in pressure the diesel standby pump shall start.

111

2.4 The hydrant risers shall be terminated with air release valve at the highest points

to release the trapped air in the pipe work.

2.5 To provide for an air cushion for counteracting pressure surges/ water hammer, an air vessel shall be furnished in the pump room near the fire pumps. The air vessel shall normally be kept partly full of water.

2.6 One No. four way Fire Brigade Inlet Connections shall be provided for filling of

Underground Fire tank in case of emergency and in addition one no. two way Fire

Brigade connection shall be made to internal Fire riser in case fire pumps fail to

start.

3.0 SPRINKLER SYSTEM DESCRIPTION:

3.1 The automatic sprinkler system will be installed to protect the entire building with

permitted exception e.g. electrical switch room, power transformer, DG room and

AC Plant room as identified. There is a separate sprinkler pump of capacity as per

BOQ in the pump house to be provided and other than that, Hydrant Pump and

Diesel Engine shall also support the sprinkler system.

3.2 The Sprinkler System shall be fed both from an underground tank and also from the

overhead tank.

3.3 Installation control valve shall be provided for alarming in case of fire.

Installation control valve comprising of main stop valve, alarm valve with

accessories, strainer and water motor gong.

3.4 For the sprinkler system the building shall have a riser of 150 mm dia, tapped on

each floor to feed the sprinkler system. On each floor, at the tapping from the

sprinkler riser, there shall be butterfly valve of suitable diameter and flow switch.

The flow switch shall be connected to the Annunciation Panel through electrical

cables.

4.0 FIRE PUMPS, MOTORS, ENGINE AND ACCESSORIES:

4.1 General:

4.1.1 The pumps shall be single stage/multistage/centrifugal type designed for continuous

operation and shall have a continuously rising head characteristic without any zone

of instability and shall confirm to IS: 1520 . 4.1.2 Pumps (excluding the jockey pump) shall be able to operate sequentially. The head

vs. capacity, input power vs. capacity characteristics, etc. shall match to ensure load

sharing and trouble free operation throughout the range.

4.1.3 In case of accidental reverse flow through the pump the driver shall be capable

of bringing the pump to its rated speed in the normal direction from the point of

maximum possible reverse speed.

4.1.4 The Pump with motor, base plate, coupling device and coupling guard shall be

coupled at the work of the manufacturer. 4.1.5 The otor shall have a 15% margin of power rating over the rated pump input power.

112

4.1.6 The pumps shall be capable of delivering a minimum of 150 percent of rated

capacity at a total head of not less than 65% of the total rated head. The total shut-

off head shall not exceed 120 percent of total rated head on the pump. 4.1.7 The pump shall be tested at the factory and test curve shall be submitted

showing the performance and horse power requirement based on this test before

final acceptance.

4.1.8 Contractor shall provide necessary test certificates, type test certificates, technical

data sheets performance curves and NPSH curves of the pumps, dimension detail,

foundation detail from the manufacturer while submitting data sheet for approval. 4.1.9 Pumps coupled with motor or engine on a common platform shall perform

smoothly without any excessive noise or vibration.

4.1.10 Each pump shall be provided with a plate giving, in the case of centrifugal

pumps, the delivery head, capacity and the number of revolutions per minute,

and in the case of reciprocating pumps, the diameter of the steam cylinders and

water plungers and the length of the stroke, as also the ratios of the effective

aggregate areas of the suction and the delivery valves to the area of the water

plungers.

4.2 Pump:

4.2.1 The pump shall be horizontal /vertical type, as described in the schedule of quantities.

4.2.2 The impeller shall be secured to the shaft and shall be retained against circumferential

movement by keying, piping or lock rings. 4.2.3 All screwed fasteners shall tighten in the direction of normal rotation.

4.2.4 Pump shall be provided with approved type of mechanical seals.

4.3 Pumps Casing:

4.3.1 The casing of horizontally /vertically pumps shall be hydrostatically tested to 1.5 times the

maximum working pressure but in no case less than 250 PSI.

4.3.2 Pressure classification of flange connections shall correspond to casing working pressures.

4.3.3 Casing material shall be close grained, accurately machined, cast-iron, and

precision manufactured for best performance and long-term duty and fitted with

gunmetal wearing ring.

4.3.4 Water discharge diffusers shall be included to reduce radial torque to impellers.

4.4 Wearing Ring:

4.4.1 Wearing rings shall be suitable for an individual application. Rings shall be

replaceable, and positively keyed to prevent rotation.

4.5 Bearing:

113

4.5.1 Bearings shall be heavy-duty ball bearings with a minimum average life of 100,000

hours. The bearings shall be self-sealed, and housed in malleable-iron housing

aligned to bearing bracket by means of large precision registers. Bearings shall

be removable without dismantling any rotating element or pumps.

4.6 Impeller:

4.6.1 Impeller shall be one-piece, phosphor bronze, and the bush of gun metal. The

impeller shall be hydraulically and dynamically balanced.

4.6.2 Impellers of pumps shall be fully enclosed suction type and hydraulically balanced.

4.6.3 Impellers shall be accurately keyed to the shaft and positioned axially by shaft sleeves

and separate snap rings.

4.6.4 Impellers shall be fully protected against damage from reverse rotation.

4.7 Pump Shaft-Motor Shaft Coupling:

All shafts shall be of stainless steel & shall be accurately machine and the shaft shall be connected with adequately sized flexible couplings of suitable approved design. Necessary guards shall be provided for the couplings.

4.8 Base Plate:

A common base plate mounting both for the pump and drive shall be provided. The base plate shall be rigid construction, suitably ribbed and reinforced.

Base plate and pump supports shall be so constructed and the pumping unit so mounted as to minimize misalignment caused by mechanical forces such as normal piping strain, hydraulic piping thrust etc.

4.9 Vibration & balancing:

The rotating elements shall be so designed to ensure least vibration during start and throughout the operation of the equipment. All rotating components shall be statically and dynamically balanced at workshop.

4.10 Installation:

Installation of the Fire Fighting Pump set shall be carried out exactly as per manufacturer recommendation.

4.11 Foundation:

The foundation of Fire Fighting Pumps & Electrical motor shall be constructed as per the requirement/recommendation of manufacturer of Fire Fighting Pumps / motor / Diesel Engine.

4.12 Anti-vortex Plates:

Anti-vortex plates shall be installed at the end of the Fire Pump suctions inside tanks.

4.13 Instruction Manual & Tools/Spares:

114

A comprehensive instruction manual shall be provided by the contractor indicating detailed requirements for operation, dismantling and periodic operation and maintenance procedures.

5.0 ELECTRIC MOTORS:

5.1 Electrically driven pumps shall be provided with totally enclosed fan cooled induction

motor. The motor shall be full load duty & shall be capable of handling the required starting torque of the pumps. Speed of motor shall be compatible with the speed of the pump.

5.2 Motors shall have a dust tight construction with suitable means of breathing.

5.3 All Components shall be of adequate mechanical strength and robustness and shall be

constructed of metal unless otherwise approved.

5.4 The rating and design shall conform to (IS : 325) specification.

5.5 The motors shall be wound for Class-F insulation and the winding shall be vacuum

impregnated with head and moisture resisting varnish and glass wool insulated to withstand tropical conditions.

5.6 Two independent earthings points shall be provided on opposite sides of the motor

for bolted connections.

5.7 415 Volt power terminals shall be suitable for receiving 1.1 KV grade armoured

power cables.

5.8 The cable boxes and terminations shall be designed to enable easy disconnection and

replacement of cables. 5.9 Provide other specific requirements required by governing energy conservation codes.

6.0 DIESEL ENGINE:

6.1 General:

6.1.1 The engine rating shall be decided considering the de-rating factors which are based on

Site conditions as per BS: 5514 /BS: 649 /IS: 1601 /IS: 10002.

6.1.2 The diesel engine shall be of multi cylinder type four/six stroke cycle with mechanical

(airless) injection, cold starting type.

6.1.3 The Engine shall be turbo-charged and water cooled.

6.1.4 The Engine shall be capable of operating continuously on full load at the site elevation for a

period of 12 hours and no major overloads before 300 hours of operation.

6.1.5 The Engine shall be provided with an adjustable governor to control the Engine speed

within 10% of its rated speed under any condition of load upto the full load rating. The governor shall be set to maintain rated pump speed at maximum pump load.

6.1.6 The Engine shall be provided with an in-built tachometer to indicate R.P.M. of the Engine.

6.1.7 Engine, after correction for altitude and ambient temperature, shall have bare engine horse power rating equivalent to the higher of the following two values :-

115

a) 20% in excess of the maximum brake horse-power required to drive the pump at

its duty point.

b) The brake horse power required to drive the pump at 150% of its rated discharge.

6.1.8 The coupling between the Engine and pump shall allow each unit to be removed without disturbing the other.

6.1.9 The engine shall be designed with regard to ease of maintenance, repair, cleaning and

inspection.

6.1.10 All parts susceptible to temperature changes shall have tolerance for expansion and

contraction without resulting in leakage, misalignment of parts or injury to parts.

6.2 Starting:

6.2.1 The engine shall be capable of both automatic and manual start. Generally the engine

shall start automatically, but in case of the auto-start system failure the engine shall be capable of manual start.

6.2.2 Provision shall be made for two separate methods of Engine starting viz.

a) Automatic starting by means of a battery powered high torque D.C. electric starter

motor incorporating the axial displacement type of pinion, having automatic repeat start facilities initiated by a fall in pressure in the water supply pipe to the hydrant installation.

b) Manual starting by

c) Electric Starter motor.

Note: The starter motor used for automatic starting may also be used for manual starting

provided there are separate batteries for manual starting.

6.2.3 Engine shall be able to start without any preliminary heating of combustion chamber,

manual cranking mechanism shall also be provided. All controls/mechanisms, which have to be operated in the starting process, shall be within easy reach of the operator.

6.2.4 The high torque D.C motor charged by battery shall initiate automatic start of diesel

engine. The battery shall hold adequate retainable charge to provide the starting of the diesel engine. Starting power will be supplied from storage batteries. The battery capacity shall be adequate for ten consecutive starts without recharging with a cold engine under full compression. Battery shall be lead acid type of 12 V, 180 Ah capacity.

6.2.5 The battery banks shall be used for no other purpose other than starting of the engine and

shall be fully charged at all times with provision for trickle & boost chargers. After start of the engine the charger shall be disconnected. The battery being fed from the engine alternator.

6.3 Governing System:

6.3.1 The engine shall have a speed control device, which will control the speed under all

conditions of load.The governor shall be suitable for operation without external power supply.

116

6.3.2 The Governor shall offer following features:

6.3.2.1 An adjustable governor to regulate engine speed within a range of 5% between shut-off and maximum load conditions of the pumps. The governor shall be set to maintain rated pump speed at maximum pump load.

6.3.2.2 An over speed shutdown device to shutdown the engine at speed approximately 20%

above rated engine speed with manual reset, so that the automatic engine controller will indicate an over speed signal until the device is manually reset to normal operating position.

6.4 Fuel System:

6.4.1 The Engine fuel oil shall be of quality and grade specified by the Engine manufacturer.

6.4.2 The diesel engine shall be suitable to run on High Speed Diesel (HSD), the tank provided

being enough to hold the volume required for 8 hours (minimum) continuous operation. The tank shall be of MS sheet of 3.0 mm thickness.

6.4.3 The fuel tank shall be of welded steel construction to relevant Indian Standard. The

tank shall be mounted above the Engine fuel pump to give gravity feed otherwise recommended by the manufacturer. The tank shall be fitted with an indicator showing the level of the fuel in the tank.

6.5 Cooling System:

6.5.1 The engine shall be water cooled with cooling water drawn from the discharge side of

the pump and with pressure reducing valve, strainer and all necessary accessories.

6.5.2 A heat exchanger, the raw water being supplied from the fire pump discharge (taken

off prior to the pump discharge valve) via a pressure reducing device, if necessary, to limit the applied pressure to a safe value as specified by the engine manufacturer. The raw water outlet connection shall be so designed that the discharged water can be readily observed. The water in the closed circuit shall be circulated by means of an auxiliary pump driver from the engine and the capacity of the closed circuit shall not be less than that recommended by the engine manufacturer. If the auxiliary pump is belt driven there shall be multiple belts so that should half of the belts break, the remaining belts shall be capable of driving the pump.

6.6 Tachometer:

A tachometer shall be provided to indicate revolutions per minute of the engine.

6.7 Oil Pressure Gauge:

The engine shall be provided with oil pressure gauges indicating lubricating oil pressure.

6.8 Temperature Gauge:

The engine shall be provided with a temperature gauge to indicate cooling water temperature.

6.9 Automatic Control Wiring:

All connecting wires for automatic controllers shall be harnessed or flexibly enclosed, mounted on the engine and connected in an engine junction box to terminals numbered to

117

correspond with numbered terminals in the controller, for ready wiring in the field between the two/sets of terminals.

6.10 Signal for Engine Running and Crank Termination:

The engine shall be provided with a speed sensitive switch to signal engine running and crank termination. Power for these signals shall be taken from a source other than the engine generator.

6.11 Engine Exhaust Pipes:

The exhaust pipe shall be galvanized steel pipe and sized in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. The exhaust pipe shall be insulated with 50 mm of fibreglass with 1 mm thick aluminium sheet cladding for its entire length.

A stainless steel flexible connection shall be provided between the engine exhaust outlet and the exhaust pipe. An exhaust silencer shall be provided as required to satisfy the acoustic requirements.

6.12 Battery Charging:

The means of charging the batteries shall be by a 2-rate trickle charger with manual selection of boost charge and the batteries shall be charged in position. Where separate batteries are provided for automatic and manual starting, the charging equipment shall be capable of trickling charging both the batteries simultaneously. Voltmeter shall be provided to enable the state of charge of the batteries to be determined.

6.13 Installation:

Installation of the Diesel Engine shall be carried out exactly as per divertion of engineer – in - charge.

6.14 Foundation and Anti Vibration Mounting:

6.14.1 Foundation :

The foundation shall be constructed as per the divertion of engineer – in – charge/ Manufacturer.

6.14.2 Anti Vibration Mounting :

Suitable vibration mounting duly approved by the authorised representative shall be employed for mounting the unit so as to minimise transmission of vibration to the structure. The isolation efficiency achievable shall be clearly indicated.

6.15 Accessories:

6.15.1 The engine shall be mounted on a base plate of fabricated steel construction. Adequate

access shall be provided to the big end and main bearing, camshaft and governor drives, water jackets etc.

6.15.2 The engine shall be provided with inlet filter and silencer, outlet muffler, expansion joints,

dampers etc. as necessary for efficient operation. Intake air shall be taken from inside the building in which the engine is located, but the exhaust shall be discharged into the air at location as desired by the employer.

118

6.15.3 The contractor shall provide all accessories, fittings and fixtures necessary and required for a complete operating engine set.

6.16 Instrumentation:

6.16.1 The diesel engine shall be provided with instrumentation as under:-

6.16.1.1 Engine Starting System:

It shall be with lead acid batteries heavy duty of minimum 180 AH capacity, higher if so required by the engine manufacturer, 2 Nos. and self-starter switch.

6.16.1.2 Engine Instruments and Standard Control Panel:

It shall be complete with required connections and comprising of following items:

a) Inlet and outlet water temperature gauge (dial type) with key.

b) Lubrication oil pressure gauge.

c) Lubrication oil temperature gauge.

d) Automatic start stop device (push button type).

e) Auto /Manual Selector switch shall also be provided.

f) Manual: the Engine can be manually operated by means of Push Buttons.

g) Start Stop and failure control device.

h) Start key for manual starting.

i) Stop Push Button for manual stopping of engine.

j) Starting failure indication by lamp and horn unit.

k) Engine temperature control with failure indication by red lamp indication.

l) Engine temperature ‘very high’ indication by audio alarm and automatic stopping of engine.

m) Engine set is ‘running’ and ‘in operation’ indication by green lamp. n)

Mains supply available indicated by yellow lamp.

o) Push Button for Audio Alarm reset.

p) Push Button Failure indication by lamps.

q) The Panel shall also have an auto/manual/test/off selector switch.

119

7.0 CODES AND STANDARDS FOR PUMPS, MOTORS AND DIESEL ENGINE:

7.1 PUMPS:

7.1.1 The pumps shall conform to the standards and codes as given below:

a) IS: 1520 Horizontal centrifugal pumps for clear, cold and fresh water.

b) BS: 599 methods of testing pumps.

c) PTC: 8 ASME Power test Codes – Centrifugal Pumps.

7.2 MOTOR:

7.2.1 The following codes shall be applicable for the motor :-

a) IS: 325 Induction motor, three – phase.

b) IS: 900 code of practice for induction motors, installation and maintenance.

c) IS: 7816 guide for testing insulation resistance of rotating machines.

d) IS: 4029 guide for testing three phase induction motor. e) IS: 3043 code of

practice for earthing.

f) Further to those stated above, the design, manufacture, installation and performance of motors shall conform to the latest Indian Electricity Act and Indian Electricity Rules.

8.0 M.V. PANEL AND SUB PANELS

8.1 Scope

8.1.1 The scope of this section covers design, manufacture, supply/installation, testing and

commissioning of Power Distribution Panels including ACBs/ MCCBs/ MCBs rated upto 1000 volts. The panel should conform to IS 8623 and other relevant code.

8.2 Electrical characteristics of Factory Built Assemblies: 8.2.1 When the components are mounted in the enclosures, appropriate derating factors shall

be allowed for the effect of other components and interconnections.

8.3 Enclosures of factory Built Assemblies:

8.3.1 Unless otherwise indicated, enclosures shall provide a minimum degree of protection of IP 42

8.3.2 Door shall have adequate fastenings with provision for locking in the closed position.

8.3.3 Fixing holes for equipment may be inside or outside the enclosure.

8.3.4 Earthing terminals shall be fitted to each enclosure, suitable for internal and external connection to enable the exposed conductive parts of the protective conductor.

8.3.5 Where the enclosure has a painted finish, provision shall be made for earthing terminal to

be electrically connected to the enclosure without need to remove any paint from ferrous metal.

120

8.3.6 Cable terminals shall be suitable for the number, size and type of cables as indicated.

Adequate spacing shall be allowed for spreading of cable tails to avoid stress on the insulation or terminals; if necessary, extension boxes shall be fitted to standard enclosures. Terminals for neutral conductors for three phase and neutral circuits shall be the same size as for phase conductor, except where reduced section neutral cable cores are indicated.

8.3.7 2 Nos. of Gland Plates for cable entry made of 3 mm thick CRCA sheet, complete with

required Knock Outs shall be provided at top or bottom with number and size of knock outs to be sufficient for the incoming and outgoings as specified in the panel details as per site conditions.

8.3.8 Metallic enclosures for location within buildings shall have a stove dried painted

finish of the manufacturer’s standard colour, unless otherwise indicated. Ferrous parts shall be degreased and adequately rust protected immediately prior to painting.

8.3.9 The compartment door shall be interlocked mechanically with the switch so that the door cannot be opened unless the switch is in OFF position. Means shall be provided for releasing this interlock at any time.

8.3.10 All MCCBs shall be provided with Rotary handle on the front door unless

specifically mentioned otherwise.

8.4 Construction:

8.4.1 Basic Structure:

a) All electrical panels will be fabricated from 2mm thick CRCA sheet steel for robust construction properly supported with angles and channels.

b) Panels shall be totally enclosed, dust and vermin proof, fully compartmentalized, cubical

design modular construction. The covers and doors shall be very well gasketted with neoprene rubber gaskets so as to obtain dust proof enclosure.

c) The cubicle will be floor-mounted type unless specified otherwise.

d) The cabinet will be welded construction and not of jointing construction.

8.4.2 Doors:

a) Door shall be made of 2mm sheet steel, with foamed seal polyurethane gasket, square section under tabular frame with punching in DIN pitch pattern.

b) The door will be provided with concealed hinges and panel locks of superior quality. The hinges will be union joint type to facilitate easy removal of the doors when necessary. Neo-prene gaskets shall be provided beneath all doors and corners and also between adjacent sections, and on gland plates.

c) The doors will be provided in a similar fashion as generally provided for the outdoor cabinet,

where water cannot enter in the cabinet from the door.

d) The door will be provided with strengthening arrangement to avoid wobbling and distortion.

e) Wherever the doors are opened on horizontal hinges, an arrangement will be provided to latch the doors in an open condition for inspection of the wiring.

f) Generally meter, relays push buttons, signal lamps and control components will be

provided on a separate compartments for in-comer feeders only.

g) The circuit components will be mounted on sectionalized 3 mm thick CRCA sheet with suitable threading in the sheets to facilitate easy maintenance, future addition etc..

121

h) The panels shall be manufactured with separate busbar chamber isolated from unit feeder

chambers and cable alleys, to provide extra safety for working personnel.

8.5 Dimensions:

8.5.1 The height of the panel will be as per the drawing but not be more than 2000 mm. Depth of the panel will not be less than 300 mm and width of the panel will be given in the particulars of panel specifications or as per actual site conditions. Shop drawings shall have to be approved by the Engineer-in-charge before fabrication is taken up by hand.

8.6 Adaptor Chambers for all cable entries:

8.6.1 Wherever necessary, sheet metal adaptor chambers with angle frame and minimum depth of 300 mm will be supplied with panel. All the covers of adaptor box will be removable type. The box can be mounted horizontally or vertically. The pattern of cable entry, wherever not specified will have to be

confirmed by the manufacturer/ Supplier/ Contractor in writing after placement of order. The cable entry shall be as per actual site conditions and approved.

8.7 Powder Coating Treatment:

8.7.1 The cubicle will undergo the process of Powder Coating treatment to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in- Charge.

8.7.2 The panels shall be treated for degreasing, derusting, phosphating and passivating

by adopting seven/nine tank process. As per the Indian Standard Specification. Power coating process with a final coating shall be of 80-120 microns.

8.7.3 The painting of panel shall be carried out in a dust free atmosphere then baked in oven.

8.8 Busbars:

8.8.1 The bus bars will be of Aluminium with a current density of 1.0 Amp per Sq. mm. The busbars will be insulated with heat shrinkable sleeves and properly supported. All live parts shall be shrouded by means of acrylic / steel /FRP sheets to ensure no accidental contact with live parts during maintenance and provide simultaneous inspection. The busbar supports will be designed to withstand short circuit current equivalent to 35 MVA at 415 volts. The busbars will be adequately insulated and protected to prevent accidental contact during operation and maintenance.

8.8.2 Non-hygroscopic SMC supports shall be used for busbar to give better mechanical

and electrical strength and to ensure capability to withstand specified fault current.

8.9 Insulation:

8.9.1 The insulation between phases and between phases and ground of the power conductors will be made of synthetic resin board/molding, resistant to dust and dampness. All insulating material will be non- hygroscopic, fungus-proof and treated with suitable synthetic varnishes.

8.10 Terminals:

8.10.1 Upto 35 sq. mm cables, the terminal will be provided of clip-on type generally manufactured by M/s Elmex or M/s Technoplast and above 35 sq. mm, cable end terminals will provide of brass stud type designed of rugged construction.

8.11 Wire ways:

122

8.11.1 PVC extruded wire ways of required size will be provided for wiring in the control panel.

8.12 Ferruling and colour code:

8.12.1 Cabling for power circuit should be red, Yellow and blue or otherwise proper colored sleeving will be provided at both ends of cables. For control cables every conductor will be provided with the identification ferrule matching with the one in the drawing.

8.12.2 All power and control wiring shall be done by using thimbles ferrules of proper size and

quality at both ends for identification. The wiring shall be neatly bunched for easy identification.

8.13 Cable Termination:

8.13.1 Every cable, either for control or power duty will be provided with crimped type of lugs of suitable size as specified.

8.13.2 All power and control wiring terminals shall be brought out in the cable Alley for easy Cable

Termination.

8.14 Cables (Internal Wiring)

8.14.1 All the cables will be PVC insulated FRLS of ISI approved and reputed make. The cables will be copper conductor as specified in the drawings and will be stranded and minimum number of strands will be three. The ratings will conform to IEE regulations.

8.14.2 All internal wiring inside the cubicle shall be carried out with 1100V grade, PVC insulated

copper wires duly ferruled at either end. The power wiring above 100A shall be carried out through the PVC insulated aluminium links.

8.15 Earthing:

8.15.1 The earth busbars should be GI/AI unless otherwise specified. Bolts to be of cadmium plated with washers. Earth busbars will be provided all around the cubicle at the bottom with duplex external earth connection arrangement.

8.16 Cable Glands and Lugs:

8.16.1 The cable glands will be of brass cone grip type. These glands will be provided for all the outgoing connections at both the ends for power as well as control circuits provided in the panel and also for the incoming cable or cables. Lugs will be crimped for termination of outgoing cable at both ends (i.e. load end and panel end) with each outgoing feeder.

8.17 Feeder Units:

8.17.1 The feeder units shall be of compartmental design comprising of cubicles assembled together and shall incorporate cubicle MCCB and MCB having rupturing capacity of minimum 25 KA and 10 KA at 440 volts respectively unless specifically mentioned.

8.17.2 The MCCB shall be quick break and trip free type with magnetic thermal release or as

specified in the BOQ. Protection Devices shall be as specified in BOQ.

8.17.3 Individual MCCB (with ammeter, selector switch, CTs) small wiring where provided should be easily removable from the front of the switchboard for servicing and maintenance. The connections to MCCBs from the busbars and cables should be terminated in pressure bolted joints inside the switch contacts.

8.17.4 The MCCB on main LT Panel shall have ratings: 63A, 100A, 125 A, 160 A, 200 A, 250A,

320A, 400A /630A with 36 KA (minimum) rupturing capacity unless specifically mentioned in the BOQ.

123

8.17.5 Bus bar should have sufficient mechanical strength to with stand the effects of short circuit

until it can be cleared by appropriate protecting device. All busbars should be clearly marked with appropriate colour code to enable immediate identification of the phase and neutral. (Mechanical strength up to 70KA/1Sec)

8.17.6 The vertical bus bar should have a number of laminations to give appropriate current rating

and can be graded to suit the current rating required at each point by omitting laminations at the points of current decrease.

8.17.7 Arrangements should be provided to receive PVC cables either from the topside or from

the bottom (as specified). End plates should be mounted inside the busbar at unit level for cables from above or below

8.17.8 All sheet-steel parts used in the construction of a cubicle board should have undergone

rigorous rust proofing process which must comprise of alkaline degreasing descaling in dilute sulphuric acid and a recognized phosphating process. The steel work shall be finished with powder coating paint. The equipment when assembled shall form a neat and compact unit and shall be complete with supporting framework, mounting channels, and foundation bolts etc. and shall be designed so as to ensure complete interchangeability of component

9.0 LT POWER DISTRIBUTION CABLES:

9.1 Scope:

9.1.1 The scope of this section covers the supply, laying, testing and commissioning of overhead and under ground LT cables as specified in Bill of Quantities.

9.2 LV cables:

9.2.1 Cables shall be PVC/XLPE insulated and shall be of 650/1100 volts grade or as specified and shall have been manufactured confirming to BS 6346 and Indian Standard Specifications IS-694 and IS-1554 as applicable. These shall be of approved types accepted by the Fire Insurance Association of India for use in Industrial risks and to the following specifications. The contractor shall submit the Manufacturer’s catalogues giving electrical characteristics of the cables.

9.2.2 The fire retardant low smoke (FRLS) cables shall be 650/1100V grade multicore having

annealed tinned copper wires, insulated with special polymeric material suitable to withstand 150 degree for 30 minutes, cores laid up melinex taped, special low halogen and low smoke elastometric material inner sheathed black, armoured with G.I. Wires/cast steel strips, melinex taped outer sheathed with special low halogen and low smoke elestomeric material unless otherwise specified.

9.3 Multi-core cables:

9.3.1 These shall be as specified and small comprise of plain, circular, solid/ stranded Al conductors. PVC insulated and having an inner sheath of PVC compound, galvanized flat steel tape or round steel wire, armouring and PVC sheath overall and shall comply with IS:.1554-1961.

9.4 Flexible cables:

9.4.1 Twin flexible cables used for pendants and connections to other lighting fixtures shall have cross-section area or should be of 0.001sq. Inch (equivalent to 23/0.0076) or larger and be insulated in accordance with relevant IS specifications. The metric equivalent size for 23/0.0076 wherever mentioned may be noted as 23/0.20mm. All wires and cable shall be of FRLS type.

9.5 Jointing and Terminating Cables:

124

9.5.1 Joints and terminations shall comply with the following clauses as appropriate to the type 0f cable. The Engineer-in-Charge shall be informed where it is proposed to install joints that are not indicated.

9.5.2 The Engineer-in-Charge shall be given evidence that the joint or termination manufacturer

has stated the materials to be employed are suitable for the type of cable to be jointed or terminated.

9.5.3 Cable shall not be cut until the jointing or terminating commences and the work shall

precede continuity until it is completed. All necessary precautions shall be taken to prevent damage and ingress of moisture and impurities; cable ends shall be free from moisture before jointing commences. Where circumstances prevent, completion the cable ends shall sealed. In the case of lead sheathed cables this shall be by plumbing and for aluminium sheathed cables by hermetically sealing.

9.5.4 The Contractor shall employ for this work, staff who is fully qualified and competent or the

types of joints and terminations to be made.

9.5.5 Core identification shall be matched at each joint without twisting or crossing of the cores. Where numbered cores are jointed to coloured all cable runs and on sites with existing installations consistent with the system already in use

9.5.6 For joints in armoured cables, a bonding conductor shall be connected across the

armouring. A spilt ferrule shall be placed under the armouring to prevent deformation of the cable by the clamp.

9.5.7 At terminations, armouring and metal sheaths shall be connected directly to the

external earthing terminal of the equipment by a bonding conductor. For LV cables the bonding conductor shall have a cross sectional area in accordance with Table 54P of IEE wiring Regulations. Metal sheaths of single core cables shall be bonded and earthed at one point only, as indicated, insulated glands shall be used at the open- circuit end or ends.

9.5.8 At terminations, cable tails shall be formed by separating and bringing out the cores. Each

tail shall be long enough to connect to the terminals of the equipment.

9.5.9 At the terminations of single core cables, gland plates shall comply with relevant clause. For three phase circuits the phase conductors shall be arranged, if possible, in trefoil formation where they pass through the enclosure of equipment

9.5.10 Core identification at terminations shall be by coloured or numbered plastic stretch or shrink

ferrules.

9.5.11 Continuity of spare cores shall be maintained at joints and at terminations, the cores shall be connected to spare terminals.

9.5.12 Solder shall be used only for connecting or terminating paper-insulated cables. All other

connections and terminations shall be by means of compression fittings or mechanical clamps.

9.5.13 Compression connectors and associated dies for compression tools shall be of correct

type and size.Tools shall be so designed that the correct compression must be applied before it can be released.

9.6 Cable Identification:

9.6.1 For multi core cables, PVC ferrule type indicators or tags shall be provided at both ends for core identification. For phase identification of 2/3/3.5/4 core cables, coloured PVC tapes shall be used at both ends.

125

9.6.2 All cables shall be provided with aluminium tags of approved design, spaced not less than 7.5 meters. Apart and these shall contain the following: Feeder No Size No of Cores

9.7 Sleeves, Tapes and Sealing Compounds:

9.7.1 Sleeves shall be of the shrink type applied cold by mechanical device or by the use of heat, they shall provide a sufficient thickness of insulation to suit the particular application.

9.7.2 Insulating tapes used in joints and terminations shall be compatible with and have a

temperature rating and insulating property not less than the cable insulation. They shall be complying with BS 3925.

9.7.3 Impregnated cotton tapes shall be double selvedged.

9.7.4 All tapes shall be stored in sealed containers until required.

9.7.5 Resin filling should be, as far as is reasonably practicable, safe and without risk to health.

Each pack shall include warnings as to any hazards in its use, e.g. dermatic or toxic properties with details of precautions, which the user must take to minimize these.

9.7.6 Hot pouring sealing compound shall be hard setting and comply with BS 1858:1973 (1986).

Selection of the compound shall take account of the ambient temperature of installation as well as characteristics of the joint.

9.7.7 Care shall be taken to prevent voids occurring in consequence of too rapid cooling.

9.7.8 Resin filling shall be used with PVC/ XLPE type cables and hot poured compound shall be

used with paper insulated lead covered cables.

9.8 Cable Supports:

9.8.1 Unless otherwise indicated the type of cable supports used shall be selected by the Contractor to suit the circumstances of the installation, but they shall comply with these specification and the following preferences shall be taken into account:

For Horizontal runs Cable Tray

For vertical runs Clabber Cleats Where marshalling of cables occurs e.g. at switchboards Cable Racks.

9.8.2 Unless otherwise indicated all ferrous metal for cable tray, cable racks, and cable ladder,

cable hangers and their fixings and suspensions shall have a galvanized finish.

9.8.3 For general use inside buildings the galvanised finish shall be a coating equivalent to and not less than type G275 to BS 2989, but manufacturer’s standard finishes will be accepted for slotted angles. All metal exposed during fabrication shall be given a coat of zinc-rich paint, brushed on or finished to match the manufacturer’s finish.

9.8.4 Metal cable tray shall be used unless otherwise indicated and it shall comply with these

specifications where cables are laid in the cable tray they shall be secured by ties, each tie securing the cables of only one circuit. The ties shall be of a proprietary type not requiring screws or bolts for fixing the use of wire or similar material will not be permitted. Ties shall be spaced at not greater than 600 mm along each cable and within 100 mm of each bend or set.

9.8.5 Where cable tray is installed in the veritable plane, cables shall be supported by cable cleats.

126

9.8.6 Cable tray shall be fixed at regular internals not exceeding 1200 mm and at 225 mm from bends and intersections. A minimum clear space of 20 mm shall be left behind all cable trays.

9.9 Cable cleats:

9.9.1 Cable cleats shall be made from materials, which are resistant to corrosion without the need for treatment of special finish.

9.9.2 Cable cleats shall be of a size such that they can be tightened down to grip the cables

without exerting undue pressure or strain on them. For vertical cable two bolt cable cleats shall be used which shall grip the cables firmly enough to prevent them slipping.

9.9.3 The spacing of cable cleats shall comply with the IEE Wiring Regulations. At bends in the

cable, cleats shall be located immediately on each side.

9.10 Cable Racks:

9.10.1 Cable racks shall comply with these specifications and shall be constructed from proprietary systems using channel sections with return lips and compatible fixing accessories, factory formed cable ladder may also be used

9.10.2 Cable shall be fixed to the racks and ladders by cable cleats.

9.11 Cable Hangers: 9.11.1 Cable hangers shall be used only where indicated. They shall be made from mild steel flat

bar complying with these specifications.

9.12 Suspensions and Fixings:

9.12.1 It is preferred that proprietary suspension systems comprising channel sections with

return lips and compatible fixing accessories or slotted angles should be used, Where necessary fixing may be fabricated from mild steel flat bar. Metal arc welding shall comply with BS 5135.

9.12.2 Unless otherwise indicated fixing to the building fabric shall comply with table below:

TABLE-FIXING FOR CABLE SUPPORTS

Building fabrics Type Fixing

Structural Steel work Purpose made clamps

(Type to be approved by Engineer-in-Charge)

Non-structural steel work Bolts, Washers and nuts. Expanding anchors Concrete brick or building Blocks, Timber Coach bolts

Note: Where cable cleats are fixed direct to concrete, brick or building block, fiber plugs and screws may be used as appropriate.

9.12.3 No shot firing shall be used and no drilling or welding of structural steel shall be done without approval of the Engineer-in-Charge.

127

9.12.4 Suspensions and fixings shall be comply with relevant clause.

9.12.5 Bolts, nuts, washers and screws shall be cadmium or zinc Electroplated or passivated.

9.13 Bonding:

9.13.1 Supplementary bonding shall be installed between component parts of cable trays, racks or ladders where the method of mechanical connection does not provide permanent and reliable metal to metal joints of negligible impedance.

9.14 Cable Installation:

9.14.1 Unless the routes of cables are indicated on drawings, they shall be determined by the contractor and approved by the Engineer-in-Charge before work is started.

9.14.2 Cable installation on the surface shall be parallel with the lines of building construction

and properly aligned.

9.14.3 A minimum clearance of 150mm shall be allowed from any equipment, pipe work or duct work. The distance shall be measured from external surface of any lagging.

9.14.4 In the event of difficulty in achieving these requirements, Engineer-in-Charge shall be

informed.

9.14.5 Spacing between cables shall comply with relevant table, but where indicated account must be taken of any grouping necessary to maintain the current carrying capacities of cables.

9.14.6 Space shall be allowed along cables routes for future additions where indicated and cable

supports shall be of adequate size for the ultimate load.

9.14.7 Adequate space shall be left between cable runs, the building fabrics and other services to allow for future removal or installation of cables.

9.14.8 Cables shall be adequately supported by one of the methods specified in clause 9.8

throughout cable ducts or are buried direct in the ground. Fixing direct to building fabric by cable cleats may be adopted for single runs subject to the approval of Engineer-in-Charge, and where indicated.

9.14.9 Cables shall be supported within 30mm of their termination at equipment; the weight of

the cable shall not be carried by the terminal box gland. 9.14.10 Where cables cross expansion and settlement joints in the building structure, they shall be

fixed 300 mm each side of the joint and sufficient slack left between to allow for movement. Where the cables are buried in the building fabric suitable provision shall be made to allow for movement of the structure. The contractor shall submit his proposals for approval of Engineer-in-Charge.

9.15 Handling of cables:

9.15.1 Cables shall be handled with care and every effort made to avoid damage to the cables, to other services and to building fabric. Recommendations or instructions available from the cable manufacturers concerning the installation of cables shall be taken into account. In particular co-axial cable shall not be bent in radius less than six times the overall diameter. Any damage shall be reported immediately to Engineer-in-Charge.

9.16 Marking of cables:

128

9.16.1 Cables located in switch rooms, ducts and spaces designated solely for electrical services or have orange over sheaths, they shall be identified by adhesive bands coloured orange, complying with BS 1711. The bands shall not be less than 100 mm long, located at least once within each separate compartment through which the cables pass at intervals not exceeding 12 m.

9.16.2 Except where cables are buried or enclosed in conduit, trunking or ducting, they shall be

permanently identified by discs. Discs shall be of laminated plastic materials with black characters on white: characters shall be not less then 3 mm high. The inscription shall indicate nominal voltage, designation of load, number and cross sectional area of cores and rated voltage of cable.

9.16.3 Cable identification discs shall be attached to the cables with ties. Discs shall be located

within 500 mm of terminations and joints, at least once within each separate compartment through which cables pass and at intervals not exceeding 24 m, they shall coincide with the colour bands.

9.17 Laying Cables in Ground:

9.17.1 Cables shall be laid by skilled experienced workmen using adequate rollers to minimize stretching of the cables. The cable drums shall be placed on jacks before unwinding the cable. With great care it shall be unrolled on over wooden rollers placed in trenches at intervals not exceeding 2 meters. Cables shall be laid at depth of 0.75 meters below ground level. The Bricks and a cushion of sand total of 250mm shall be provided both above and below the cable, joint boxes and other accessories. Cable shall not be laid in the same trench or along side a water main.

9.17.2 The cable shall be laid in excavated trench over 80mm layer of sand cushion. The relative

position of the cables, laid in the same trench shall be preserved. At all changes in direction in horizontal and vertical planes, the cables shall be bent smooth with a radius of bent not less than 12 times the diameter of cables. Minimum 3 meter long loop shall be provided at both end of cable.

9.18 Laying in Pipes / Closed Ducts :

9.18.1 The size of the pipe shall be decided by the Engineer-in-Charge and shall not be less than 10 cm, in diameter for a single cable and not less than 15 cm for more than one cable. These pipes shall be laid directly in ground without any special bed except for SW pipe which shall be laid over 10 cm, thick cement concrete 1:5:10 (1 cement : 5 coarse sand: 10 graded stone aggregate of 40 mm nominal size) bed. No sand cushioning or tiles need be used in such situations. Unless otherwise specified, the top surface of pipes shall be at a minimum depth of 1m from the ground level when laid under roads, pavements etc.

9.18.2 Where steel pipes are employed for protection of single core cables feeding A.C. load, the

pipe should be large enough to contain both cables in the case of single phase system and all cables in the case of polyphase system.

9.18.3 The pipes on road crossings shall preferably be on the skew to reduce the angle of bend as the cable enters and leaves the crossing. This is particularly important for high voltage cables.

9.18.4 Manholes of adequate size as decided by the Engineer-in-Charge shall be provided to

facilitate feeding/drawing in of cables and to provide working space for persons. They shall be covered by suitable manhole covers with frame of proper design.

9.18.5 Pipes shall be continuous and clear of debris or concrete before cable is drawn. Sharp

edges at ends shall be smoothened to prevent injury to cable insulation or sheathing.

9.18.6 Pipe for cable entries to the building shall slope downwards from the building and suitably sealed to prevent entry of water inside the building. Further the mouth of the pipes at the building end shall be suitably sealed to avoid entry of water.

129

9.18.7 All chases and passages necessary for the laying of service cable connections to buildings shall be cut as required and made good to the original finish and to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge.

9.18.8 Cable grips / draw wires and winches etc. may be employed for drawing cables through

pipes/closed ducts etc.

9.19 Laying in Open Ducts:

9.19.1 Open ducts with suitable removable covers shall be preferred in sub-stations, switch rooms, plant rooms, workshops etc.

9.19.2 The cable ducts should be of suitable dimensions so that the cables can be

conveniently laid. If necessary, cables may be fixed with clamps on the walls of the duct or taken in troughs in duct. The duct should be covered with removable slabs or chequered plates.

9.19.3 Ducts may be filled with dry sand after the cable is laid and covered as above or finished

with cement plaster specially in high voltage applications.

9.19.4 Splices or joints of any type shall not be permitted inside the ducts.

9.19.5 As far as possible laying of cables with different voltage ratings in the same duct shall be avioded.

9.19.6 Where considered necessary, hooks or racks shall be provided for supporting the cables in

masonary / concrete cable ducts, cable troughs. Otherwise cables shall be laid direct in the trench or trough etc. While deciding the layout of cables in such ducts, care should be exercised to ensure that unnecessary crossing of cables is avoided.

9.20 Protection of Cables:

9.20.1 The cables shall be protected by bricks laid on the top layer of the sand for the full length of underground cable. Where more than one cables is laid in the same trench, the bricks shall cover all the cables and shall project a minimum of approximately 80mm on either side of the cables. Cable under road crossings and any other places subject to heavy traffic shall be protected by running them through Hume Pipes of suitable size.

10.0 EARTHING: 10.1 Scope:

10.1.1 The scope of this section covers supply installation and testing of earthing system for all non-current carrying metal parts of electrical installation.

10.1.2 The type and number of earth electrodes shall be as indicated and shall comply with clauses as appropriate.

10.1.3 Dedicated earthing shall be provided for the Server Room equipments.

10.2 Earthing System & Equipment Bonding:

10.2.1 Unless otherwise indicated, earth plates shall be 600 mm x 600 mm minimum, of solid or lattice copper not less than 3.0 mm thick and of GI not less than 6.0 mm.

10.2.2 Earthing system shall comprise of earth electrode near sub-station. Test link boxes shall be

provided at each electrode for periodical resistance measurement. All such earth electrodes shall be interconnected forming a main grid.

10.2.3 Where the earth electrodes are formed with tape, the tape shall be to relevant IS, of the

size, length, depth below ground level and layout as indicated.

10.3 Conductors:

130

10.3.1 Earthing conductors, main earthing bars and main equi-potential bonding conductors shall be of the type, size and conductor material as indicated and shall comply with the following clauses.

10.3.2 Tapes shall comply with relevant IS. Where used to interconnect copper electrodes the

tape may be bare, but for interconnecting pipe electrodes and for all other purposes the tap shall have an extruded PVC sheath.

10.3.3 Main earthing bars shall comply with IS 3043 and shall be bare.

10.3.4 Cables shall comply with IS 3043, without sheath, unless otherwise indicated.

10.4 Joints And Connections:

10.4.1 Joints in conductors shall be kept to a minimum.

10.4.2 All contact surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and coated with an anti-corrosive

electrical jointing compound suitable for the conductor materials. For bi-mettallic joints, a separate abrasive shall be used to clean each metal.

10.4.3 Connections shall be made as follows:

to main earthing bars by phosphor bronze set screws and nuts; to earth rods by bronze, gunmetal or copper clamps with phosphor bronze. Edges of clamps shall be rounded; to earth pipes by phosphor bronze bolts and nuts, direct to the flange of the pipe; to earth plates by bolting, rivetting or welding.

10.4.4 Termination of cables shall be by connectors jointed to the cable conductor by the

thermit welding process or by compression joints complying with BS 4579.

10.4.5 Joints which are indicated as test points shall be bolted or clamped. Joints in tape, other than at test points shall be made by the reveting and sweating. Overlap of conductors shall be not less than 100 mm.

10.4.6 Joints and connections shall be protected by a coating which will form a seal and exclude

moisture in all weather conditions. At connections to earth electrodes, the coating shall cover all exposed conductors and in the case of earth pipes, to top surface of the flanges. Protective coatings shall be of a waterproof, inert, tenacious material and of one of the following forms:

a) solvent cutback thixotropic corrosion preventative forming a film of resilient matt petroleum

wax; b) a fast drying durable rubberised sprayed coating; c) a heat shrink clear sheathing

10.4.7 Screws, nuts, washers and rivets for copper conductors shall be of phosphor bronze,

naval brass or copper silicon; for aluminium conductors, they shall be of stainless steel. The minimum provision shall be:

a) for flat strip --- two M8 bolts or four 5 mm diameter rivets; b) for sheet metal --- two M8 bolts; where the sheet metal is less than 2 mm thick,

it shall be backed for an area of at least 1000 mm2.

10.5 Inspection Pits:

10.5.1 Unless otherwise indicated, connection between an earth conductor and its associated earth electrode system shall be in an enclosure.

131

10.5.2 The enclosure shall have a removable top cover which shall be flush with finished ground level. The enclosure shall be a purpose made concrete inspection pit, a galvanised steel inspection pit embedded in concrete, an earthenware pipe or similar, as indicated. The earth electrode connection shall be just below the lid of the inspection pit with adequate access for testing purposes.

10.6 Supports And Fixings:

10.6.1 Cables shall be supported and fixed in accordance with Section Cable laying.

10.6.2 Tapes and bars shall be fixed by spacer bar saddles which shall be of non-metallic material or corrosion resistant alloy compatible with the conductors. Fixing of saddles shall comply with relevant clauses in Cable Laying section. The maximum spacing off fixings shall not exceed 600 mm unless otherwise indicated.

10.6.3 Main earthing bars shall be supported on insulators; they shall be not less then 25 mm

clear of the building fabric.

10.6.4 For general areas inside buildings, screws and nuts shall be of cadmium electroplated steel or stainless steel; outside buildings, in plant rooms or other locations as indicated, they shall be of stainless steel.

10.6.5 No shot firing shall be used and no drilling or welding structural steelwork shall be done

without the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge.

10.7 Installation:

10.7.1 Electrodes shall be installed in undisturbed ground. The distance between any two electrodes shall be not less than 1.25 times the depth of the longer electrode.

10.7.2 Excavations shall be carried out in accordance with BS 6031 and shall comply with the

construction (General Provisions) Regulations, 1961. Excavations shall be kept free of water and protected against damage or collapse. The safety of persons and the protection of structures, buildings, roads, sewers and services from damage shall be ensured; all necessary sheeting, timbering, strutting and shoring shall be supplied, erected and subsequently removed.

10.7.3 Trenches shall be backfilled in layers and each layer shall be rammed. The first two layers

shall be 100 mm deep and rammed by hand the remaining layers shall be not more than 200 mm deep and power ramming may be used. Warning tapes and covers shall be included as specified in relevant clauses in Cable laying section. Where applicable, top soil and turf shall be replaced and the final level shall be level with or not more than 25 mm above the adjacent ground level.

10.7.4 The earth resistance should be less than 2.0 Ohms. Earth Pits shall be treated with

salt, charcoal /chemicals to be achieve the required result.

11.0 SETTING OF PRESSURE SWITCHES/OPERATING CONDITIONS FOR FIRE PUMPS:

11.1 The fire pumps shall operate on drop of pressure in the mains as given under clause

below. The pump operating sequence shall be arranged in such a manner to start the pump automatically but should be capable of being stopped manually by stop push buttons only.

11.2.1 It is thus to be noted that;

i) Jockey Pumps shall start and stop automatically through pressure switches. ii) Jockey Pump shall stop when main pumps start. iii) Main/Diesel Engine driven fire pumps shall start automatically when pressure

falls below the above specified limits, but stopping shall be manual.

132

12.0 INTERLOCKING AND CONTROL PANEL:

12.1 The System has been designed for operation automatically so that as and when water is

drawn from the system through any hydrant/sprinkler, the pumps will operate automatically and feed water into the system. However once a Fire Pump start working, it will be stopped only manually (except jockey pump) or on account of any fault or non-availability of power supply to electrical pumps or low water level in UG/Terrace tank.

12.1.1 Facility shall also be provided for manual operation. A selector switch for auto/manual

selection shall be provided in each pump.

12.1.2 The Control system shall be designed to provide the following sequence of operation:

a) The Pressurisation Pump shall maintain pressure in the system and shall

operate only on account of slow pressure loss. In case of the sudden pressure loss the Pressurisation Pump shall not operate. The pump shall start when the

water pressure in the system falls to a pre-set value (about 0.35 kg/cm2

below normal system pressure) and shut down when the system pressure reaches the set value. Both limits shall be adjustable.

b) Main Electric Fire Pump shall operate on account of sudden pressure loss. So long as Main Electric Fire Pump is working, other Fire Pumps will not operate. The pump shall start when the water pressure falls to a pre-set value in the system

(about 1 kg/cm2)

c) The Diesel Fire Pump will start on sudden pressure loss, only in case supply to Main Electric Fire Pump is not avaiable or within a pre-set time the Main Electric Fire Pump fails to start or fail during operation. No other pump will be working when Diesel Engine Fire Pump is in operation. Audio-Visual Alarm shall be available to indicate failure of Main Electric Fire Pump.

d) A three attempts starting facility will be provided for diesel pump.

e) If within a pre-set time, the standby pump also fails to start or fails to develop pressure, the standby pump shall also be shut down and locked out. An audio visual alarm indication shall be given at the control panel.

f) Only one pump will be working at a time. In manual mode more than one pump can be started.

g) Water level in UG and terrace tanks shall be monitored and in case of low water

level, pumpsconnected with the tank shall not operate (even on manual mode) or stop operation as the case may be. An audio-visual alarm shall be given at the control panel.

h) The System Controller shall be designed to operate the fire pumps with interlocking and fault indication as brought out above Annunciation window provided in the panel shall indicate following faults:

i) Low water level in UG Tank ii) Low water level in Terrace Tank

iii) Main Pump failed to start

iv) Main pump failed during operation

v) Diesel Pump failed to start

vi) Diesel Pump failed during operation

vii) Supply to main pump failed

viii) Supply to pressurisation pump failed

ix) Supply to terrace pump failed

133

12.1.3 Suitable sensors, differential pressure switches, monitors etc. shall be provided at respective location. The control system shall be operational on 24 Volt DC batteries of engine starting Battery chargers shall be provided to ensure that the batteries remain charged all the time. Batteries shall be sealed maintenance free type.

13.0 PIPE, FITTINGS, VALVES, SUPPORTS AND OTHER ACCESSORIES:

13.1 Pipes, Fittings & Supports:

13.1.1 General:

a) All materials shall be new of the best quality conforming to the specifications and subject to the approval of the Project Manager.

b) Pipes and fittings shall be fixed truly vertical, horizontal as required in a neat workman like manner.

c) Pipes shall be fixed in a manner as to provide easy accessibility for repair and maintenance and shall not cause obstruction in shafts, passages etc.

d) Pipes shall be securely fixed to walls and ceilings by suitable clamps at intervals specified. Only approved type of anchor fasteners shall be used for RCC ceilings and walls.

e) Valves and other appurtenances shall be so located that they are easily accessible for operations, repairs and maintenance.

13.1.2 Pipes and fittings of following types (depending upon the description of item) and ISI

marked only shall be used:

Type of Pipe / (dia)

Size

Grade

Ends/Fitting

Code

MS/ Galvanised Pipes

Upto 50 mm dia Heavy grade

Screwed

IS: 1239 (Part I)

MS/ Galvanised

Fittings

- do-

Heavy grade

MS/Galvanised

Forged,Screwed ends

IS: 1239

(Part II)

MS/ Galvanised

Pipes

65 mm &

above dia and upto 150 mm dia

Heavy grade

Bevel, Butt Welded, 3

layers forms/screwed for Galvanised

IS: 1239

(Part I)

MS/ Galvanised Fittings

-do-

Heavy, machine formed from IS marked heavy grade pipes

-do-

IS: 1239 (Part III)

MS/Galvanised

Pipes

Above 150 mm dia

6.0 mm wall thickness

up to 200 mm

8.0 mm wall thickness up to 300 mm

Bevel, Butt welded, 3 layers

for MS/ screwed for Galvanised

IS: 3589

MS/ Galvanised

Fittings

-do-

Schedule 40

-do-

IS: 3589

13.1.3 For MS/Galvanised pipes upto and including 50 mm dia screwed jointing shall be adopted, while for pipes 65 mm and above welded connections shall be used for MS and screwed connection for Galvanised. Only Electro Galvanised nuts /bolts shall be used.

13.1.4 The piping system and components shall be capable of with standing 150% of the

working pressure including water hammer effects and test pressure upto 16 kg/cm2.

134

13.1.5 Flanged joints shall be used for connections to vessels, equipment, flanged valves and also on suitable straight lengths of pipeline of strategic points to facilitate erection and subsequent maintenance work.

13.1.6 Flange thickness shall be as per table below IS : 6392 – 1971.

Table – 17/18.

250 mm dia : 26 mm ;

200 mm dia : 24 mm ;

150 mm dia : 22 mm ;

125 mm dia : 22 mm ;

100 mm dia : 20 mm ;

80 mm dia : 20 mm ;

65 mm dia : 18 mm .

13.1.7 M.S. Fittings for pipes above 65 mm or and upto 150 mm dia shall be fabricated from

seamless pipe pieces of minimum 5 mm wall thickness. For tees and other fittings where seamless sections are not available, the fittings shall be fabricated from Electric resistant welded pipes as given in the approved makes. However Galvanised fitting will be screwed. The fittings shall have a minimum 5 mm wall thickness. The fittings shall with stand pressure of upto 21 kg/cm2.

.

13.1.8 Fittings below 50 mm or shall be M.S./ Galvanised Forged Screwed ends. The fittings shall

be threaded at both ends. The fittings shall withstand pressure of upto 21kg/cm2.

13.1.9 For tappings of 50 mm/40mm/32mm/25mm from headers, half socket connections

with one side threading shall be employed. The half socket shall be welded at the centre of the header, either on the side or on the top.

13.1.10 Wherever two horizontal headers are to run side by side, the two headers shall be

located at different levels, if possible, so as to avoid unnecessary bends at tapping off from the headers. Accordingly, the supports shall also be staggered to support pipes at two levels.

13.2 Pipe Support:

13.2.1 All pipe clamps and support shall be mild steel.

13.2.2 Pipe shall be hung by means of expandable anchor fastener of approved make and

design (Dash Fasteners or equivalent). The hangers and clamps shall be fastened by means of galvanised nut and bolts. The size/diameter of the anchor fastener and the clamp shall be suitable to carry the weight of water filled pipe and dead load normally encounted.

13.2.3 Hangers and supports shall be capable of carrying the sum total of all concurrently acting

loads. They shall be designed to provide the required supporting effects and allow pipelines movements as necessary. All guides, anchore, braces, damapeners, expansion joints and structural steel to be attached to the building/structure, trenches etc shall be provided by the contractor. Hangers and components for all piping shall be approved by the Client/engineer. Anchoring fasteners shall be rated to take minimum 2 tons load and shall be of approved make.

13.2.4 While all piping shall have clevis type hanger supports from the ceiling with fasteners, for

pipe headers of 100 mm dia and above, additional wall/column mounted supports shall be taken. Clevis type hanger supports shall be at 3.0 m intervals and at every turn, at both ends. MS angle supports at wall and columns shall be at 18 m intervals. The angles shall

135

be cut by gas cutter and evened out by grinder. All welding to angles shall also be cleaned by grinder. Angles shall not be less than 40 x 40 x 6 mm size.

13.2.5 For fixing clevis hanger and angle support, only dash fasteners shall be used. Exposing of

steel reinforcement and welding to them shall not be permitted except in exceptionable circumstances.

13.2.6 Pipes in vertical shafts shall have MS angle brackets at alternate floor level. The

bracket shall be mounted behind the pipe. A baseplate of 50 wide x 6 mm thick shall be welded to the bracket. The baseplate shall be fixed to the wall by means of fasteners GI U clamps shall be used to fix the pipe to the bracket.

13.2.7 Each riser shall also be anchored to the floor slab with MS angles mounted on the slab.

The angles shall be 40 x 40 x 5 size, one mounted before the pipes and the other after the pipes. Extra cleat pipe pieces shall be welded to the pipes at this point which shall be welded to the angle iron support.

13.2.8 Wherever angle type supports are being used, profiled packing materials or wood or

materials as approved by the Engineer shall be used. The packing materials shall be at least 25 mm thick, and tight fitted with the pipe.

13.3 Hose Reel:

13.3.1 Wall mounting the swinging type first aid hose reel with drum shall conform to IS : 884-1985.

13.3.2 The rubber tubing shall be 20 mm dia high pressure rubber hose 36.0 m long as per IS

: 444 with gunmetal shut off nozzle having 6.5 mm dia orifice and control valve, shut off valve of approved make. The wall mounted bracket shall be fixed by means of fasteners. The hose reel shall have a gun metal nozzle.

13.3.3 The hose reel shall be connected directly to the riser by means of 25 mm dia MS pipe

with threaded bends, union & one no. ball valve.

13.3.4 The drum can swing up to 180 degree.

13.4 Hose Cabinets:

13.4.1 Hose cabinet shall be fabricated from 16 gauge MS powder coated sheet of fully

welded construction with hinged single/double door partially glazed door with

suitable locking arrangement, stove enameled fire red paint with ‘Fire Hose’

written on it prominently. Glass panes shall be 4 mm thick.

13.4.2 The hydrant cabinet shall hold double headed hydrant, 2 nos. Hoses and 1 no. branch

pipe.

13.4.3 The cabinet shall have two pipe studs of 200 mm dia in MS with base which shall

be fixed to the back of the cabinet and shall be used to hold the RRL hose.

13.5 RRL Hoses:

13.5.1 The hoses for the internal and external hydrant system should be rubber

impregnated wooven jacketted type conforming to IS:636 Type-A. Each fire hose

shall be provided with quick coupling, branch pipes, nozzles, spanners etc.

136

13.5.2 Hose pipes of all types shall be capable of withstanding an internal water pressure of not less than 35 Kg/Sq.cm without bursting. It must also withstand a pressure of 21 Kg/Sq.cm without undue leakage or sweating.

13.5.3 Each hose shall be fitted with instantaneous spring lock type couplings at both ends. Hose shall be fixed to the coupling ends by copper rivets and the joint shall be reinforced by 1.5 mm galvanised mild steel wires and leather bands.

13.6 Branch Pipes and Nozzle:

Stainless steel Standard Branch Pipe shall be used conforming to IS : 903 with Stainless steel nozzle of 20 mm (nominal internal dia) to fit standard instantaneous type 63mm dia hose coupling. Suitable spanners of approved design shall be provided in adequate numbers for easy assembly and dismantling of various components like branch pipes, nozzles, quick coupling ends.

13.7 Hydrant Valve:

13.7.1 Stainless steel Hydrant valve shall be of oblique pattern provided as per IS: 5290

complete with hand wheel, quick coupling connection, spring and blank cap and chain.

13.7.2 The hydrant shall have flanged inlet of 100 mm dia and 63 mm female instantaneous

type outlet. The hydrant shall have a rubber plug with chain fixed to the main body of the Hydrant.

13.8 Pressure Switch:

13.8.1 The pressure switches shall be employed for starting and shutting down operation

of pumps automatically, dictated by lines pressure. The Pressure switch shall be diaphragm type, it shall be suitable for line pressures upto 15 kg/cm

2.

13.8.2 The switch shall be suitable for consistent and repeated operations without change in

values.

13.8.3 The enclosure shall be of aluminium and pressure element and wetted parts shall be of

stainless steel.The switch shall be snap acting type with 1 no. N O/NC contact.

13.9 Air Vessel:

13.9.1 The air vessels shall be provided to compensate for slight loss of pressure in the

system and to provide an air cushion for counter acting pressure surges whenever

the pumping set comes into operation. It shall be normally partly full of water, the

remaining being filled with air, which will be under compression when the system

is in normal operation.

13.9.2 Air vessel shall be fabricated from MS plate conforming to IS : 2002 grade 2A having 8

mm thickness shell with 10 mm thick dished ends and suitable supporting legs. It shall be provided with a 80 mm dia/100 mm dia flanged connections from pump, one 25 mm drain with ball valve and 15 mm sockets for pressure gauge and pressure switches. The air vessel shall be hydraulically tested to 20 kg/cm

2 pressure for 30 minutes.

13.9.3 The pressure vessel shall be provided for hydrant and sprinkler system. The pressure

switches shall be mounted on the drain end of each air vessel. The air vessel shall also be provided with safety valve mounted at the top. The presser vessel shall be supplied of size 250 mm dia x 1200 mm height.

137

13.10 Fire Department Connections:

13.10.1 Fire Brigade Inlet (4 Way) to Hydrant Ring/Hydrant Riser:

a) Gun Metal four way fire brigade tank filling connection having

63 mm dia instantaneous type inlet and 150 mm dia flange outlet

conforming to IS : 904 with blank cap and chain with necessary 150 mm

dia MS (heavy duty pipe) and flanges, nuts and bolts etc.

b) The inlet assembly shall be in glass fronted wall box and size of wall

box shall be adequate to allow hose to be connected to the inlets, even if

the door cannot be opened and the glass has to be broken.

c) Each box shall have fall of 25 mm toward the front at its base and shall be

glassed with wired grass with “FIRE SUPPLY TO TANK” painted on the

inner face of the glass in

50 mm size block letter. d) Each such box shall be provided with a steel hammer with chain for breaking

the glass.

13.10.2 Tank Filling Connection:

a) Gun Metal four way fire brigade tank filling connection having 63

mm dia instantaneous type inlet and 150 mm dia flange outlet conforming

to IS : 904 with blank cap and chain with necessary 150 mm dia MS

(heavy duty pipe) and flanges, nuts and bolts etc.

b) The inlet assembly shall be in glass fronted wall box and size of wall

box shall be adequate to allow hose to be connected to the inlets, even if

the door cannot be opened and the glass has to be broken.

c) Each box shall have fall of 25 mm toward the front at its base and shall be

glassed with wired grass with “FIRE SUPPLY TO TANK” painted on the

inner face of the glass in 50 mm size block letter.

d) Each such box shall be provided with a steel hammer with chain for breaking

the glass.

13.10.3 The inlets shall be provided with ABS quality plastic blank caps with chain.

13.11 Valves:

13.11.1 Sluice Valves:

13.11.1.1 Sluice valve of 65 NB and above shall be flanged valve with cast iron body. The spindle,

wall seat and wedge nuts shall be of bronze. They shall generally have non-rising spindle and shall be of the particular duty and design called for. All sluice valves will be provided with supervisory switch.

13.11.1.2 The valves shall be supplied with suitable flanges, non-corrosive bolts and asbestos fibre

gasket. Sluice valves shall conform to Indian Standard IS: 14846: 2000 and IS: 2906. Sluice valves for water works purposes suitable for seat test pressure of 16 Kg/Sq.cm.+

138

13.11.2 Butterfly Valve:

13.11.2.1 The butterfly valve shall be suitable for water works and tested to minimum of 15 Kg/Sq.cm

pressure.

13.11.2.2 The body shall be of cast iron to IS : 210 in circular shape and of high strength to

take the water pressure of 10 Kg/Sq.cm. The disc shall be heavy duty cast iron with anti corrosive epoxy or nickel coating.

13.11.2.3 The valve seat shall be of high grade elastomer or nitrile rubber. The valve in its closed

position shall have complete contact between the seat and disc throughout the perimeter. The elastomer rubber shall have a long life and shall not give away on continous applied water pressure. The shaft shall be EN 8 grade carbon steel.

13.11.2.4 Butterfly valve shall be of best quality conforming to IS : 13095 of class specified.

13.11.2.5 The valves shall be supplied with manual gear operated opening/closing by lever.

13.11.2.6 The valves shall be supplied with supervisory switch.

13.11.3 Gun Metal Valves:

13.11.3.1 Gun metal valves shall be used for smaller dia pipes, and for threaded connection. The

valves shall bear certification as per IS: 778-1984 and shall be rated to 15 Kg/Sq.cm pressure.

13.11.3.2 The body and bonnet shall be of gun metal to IS : 318. The steam gland and gland nut

shall be forged brass to IS: 319. The hand wheel shall be of cast iron to IS: 210.

13.11.3.3 The hand wheel shall be of high quality finish to avoid hand abrasions. Movement shall

also be easy.The spindle shall non rising type.

13.11.3.4 All valves shall be approved by the Authority Representative before they are allowed to be

used on the work.

13.11.4 Non-Return Valve:

13.11.4.1 Non-return valves shall be cast iron dual plate type. An arrow mark in the direction of

flow shall be marked on the body of the valve. The valve shall bear IS : 5312 certification.

13.11.4.2 The valve shall be of cast iron body and cover. The internal flap in the direction of water

shall be of cast iron and hinged by a hinge pin of high tensile brass of stainless steel. Cast iron part shall be as per IS : 210

13.11.4.3 The gasket shall be of high quality rubber and flap seat ring of leaded gunmetal. At high

pressure of water flow the flapper shall sit tightly to the seat. The valve shall be capable of handling pressure up to 15 Kg./Sq. Cm

13.11.5 Air Valves:

13.11.5.1 Provide 25 mm dia screwed inlet cast iron single acting air valves, on all high points in

the system as shown on the drawing.

13.11.6 Drain Valve:

13.11.6.1 Provide 50 mm dia between steel pipe to IS : 1239 (heavy duty) with 50 mm gunmetal full

way valve for draining any water in the system in low pockets.

139

13.11.6.2 Drain valves shall be provided at low points of all water riser and mains to ensure that all sections of pipe works and plant can be drained.

13.11.7 Foot Valve: 13.11.7.1 Foot valves of water supply system shall be heavy duty construction with integrated

flanges connection and have cast iron body, all bronze trims with stainless steel spring and stainless steel strainer.

13.11.7.2 The flow area on stainer shall be atleast three times of Pipe size.

13.12 Gate Valve Chamber:

A masonry chamber of internal dimension 1.20m x 1.20m x 1.5m depth shall be built to accommodate sluice valves placed in external ring main, 230mm thick walls shall be of 75 class designation brick work in cement mortar 1:5 (1 cement : 5 fine sand) with CI medium duty manhole cover. The top slab RCC shall be of 1:2:4 mix (1 cement : 2 coarse sand : 4 graded same aggregate 20 mm nominal size) and inside plastering with cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement : 3 coarse sand ) 12 mm thick finished with a floating coat of neat cement all complete.

13.13 Pressure Gauge:

Pressure gauge shall be provided near all connections to hydrant system and isolation valves of sprinkler system and where required. Pressure gauge shall be stainless steel

100 mm dia gunmetal Bourden type with a scale range from 0 to 15 Kg/cm2

and shall be constructed as per IS 3624. Each pressure gauge shall have a siphon tube connection with ball valve, tapping and connecting pipe and nipple. The gauge shall be installed at appropriate level and height for easy readability

13.14 Branch Pipe:

Gun Metal Standard Branch Pipe shall be used conforming to IS : 903 with gun

metal nozzle of 20 mm (nominal internal dia) to fit standard instantaneous type

63mm dia hose coupling.

13.15 Pendent /Upright Type Sprinkler Head:

13.15.1 Sprinkler heads shall be of quartzoid bulb type with bulb, valve assembly,

yoke and the deflector. The sprinkler shall be of approved make and type with 15

mm nominal dia outlets.

13.15.2 The bulb shall be made of corrosion free material strong enough to withstand

any water pressure likely to occur in the system. The bulb shall shatter when the

temperature of the surrounding air reaches at 680

C.

13.15.3 The nominal bore shall be 15 mm dia and colour of liquid shall be Red.

13.15.4 The Sprinkler head shall bear approval of FOC/UL/FM.

13.16 Installation Control Valve for Sprinkler:

13.16.1 The installation control valve shall be double seated clapper type check valve. The

body and cover shall be made from cast iron to IS: 210 grade FG- 200. The seat

140

and seat clamp shall be made from bronze to IS: 318, LTB II grade. The sealing to

the seat shall be neoprene gasket. The hinges pin and ball shall be from stainless

steel.

13.16.2 It shall be vertically mounted and the direction of water travel shall be indicated on

the surface. It shall be rated to 12 kg/cm2 and tested to 25 kg/cm2 pressure.

13.16.3 A by-pass check valve shall be fitted to adjust minor and slow variations in water

pressure for balancing so as to avoid any false alarm.

13.16.4 The valve shall also be provided with a test control box. The box shall house a lever

to test and operate the ICV. A brass strainer shall also be provided at the point

of water supply to the alarm gong. A retarding chamber shall also be provided.

The chamber shall be able to balance the water pressure in case of water line

surges.

13.16.5 Each installation control valve shall have two sets of pressure gauges with brass ball

valve type shut off.

13.16.6 A water motor Alarm shall also be provided. This shall be mechanically operated by

discharge of water through an impeller. The drive bearing shall be weather

resistant. A strainer shall be provided on line before the nozzle.

13.16.7 A brass automatic ball drop valve with the retard chamber shall also be provided.

13.17 Flow Switch:

Flow switch shall have a paddle made of flexible material of the width to fit within the pipe bore. The terminal box shall be mounted over the paddle/pipe through a connecting socket. The switch shall be potential free in either N O or N C operation of a single sprinkler head. The terminal box shall have connections for wiring to the Annunciation panel. The seat shall be of stainless steel. The flow switch shall have IP: 55 Protection. It should operate even with the flow of one Sprinkler bursting

13.18 Fire Man’s Axe:

Fire man’s axe for fire fighting purpose shell be used conforming to IS:926 – 1985

13.19 Painting:

All hydrant pipes shall be finished with post office red colour paint. All M.S. pipes shall first be cleaned thoroughly before application of primer coat. After application of 2 coats of Red oxide primer, two coats of enamel paint shall be applied. Wherever required all pipe headers shall be worded indicating the direction of the pipe and its purpose such as “TO RISER NO 1” etc.

13.20 Testing:

13.20.1 All piping in the system shall be tested to hydrostatic pressure of 13.5 Kg/Sq.cm

without drop in pressure for atleast 2 hours.

13.20.2 Rectify all leakages, make adjustments and retest as required and directed.

141

14.0 IS CODES FOR DESIGN, MANUFACTURE, ERECTION, TESTING AND TRAIL OPERATION OF PIPING VALVES ETC.:

14.1 The following codes and standards and their subsequent modifications shall apply for the

design, manufacture, shop testing, erection, fabrication at site, resting and trial operation of piping, valves and specialties requirements:

14.1.1 IS: 554 : Dimensions for pipe threads where pressure tight joints are required on the

threads. 14.1.2 IS: 638 : Sheet rubber jointing and rubber insertion jointing.

14.1.3 IS: 778 : Copper alloy gate, globe and check valve for water work purposes.

14.1.4 IS: 14846 : Sluice valves for water –works purposes (50 mm to 1200 mm).

14.1.5 IS: 901 : Couplings, double male and double female, instantaneous pattern for fire fighting.

14.1.6 IS: 1239 : Mild steel tubes, tubulars and other wrought (Part I & II ) steel fittings.

14.1.7 IS: 884 : Swinging type wall mounted hose reel with drum.

14.1.8 IS: 388 : Hose tubing.

14.1.9 IS: 4038 : Foot valves for water-works purposes. 14.1.10 IS: 5290 : landing Valves.

14.1.11 IS: 10221 : Anti corrosion treatment for underground MS pipes.

14.1.12 IS: 5312 : Swing check type reflux (non-return) valves.

15.0 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS:

15.1 Scope of Work:

Without restricting to the generality of the foregoing the work shall inter-alia consist of the following:

a) Installation of fully charged and tested fire extinguishing hand appliances CO2 and

dry chemical powder type as required by these specifications and drawings.

15.2 Portable Fire Appliances Requirement, Type and Location as per Fire Authority:

Portable Fire appliances as mentioned below :-

a) ABC Dry Powder fire extinguisher IS : 15683 – 2006 -6 Kg & 9 kg capacity .

b) CO2 Gas Fire extinguisher IS 15683 – 2006 – 4.5 Kg capacity.

c) CO2 Water type Fire extinguisher IS 2878 – 9 litre capacity and

d) Fire bucket IS : 2546 4 Nos. shall be installed at following places :-

142

i) Electric meter Rooms. ii) Lift machine Rooms. iii) Pump Rooms.

15.2.1 Hand appliances shall be installed in readily accessible locations with the appliance

brackets fixed to wall by suitable anchor fasteners or by means of floor mounted supports.

15.2.2 Each appliance shall be provided with an inspection card indicating the date of

inspection, testing, change of charge and other relevant data. 15.2.3 All appliances shall be fixed in a true workman like manner truly vertical and at

correct locations. Identical type of extinguishers shall be of same make and shall have similar method of operation.

16.0 COMMISSIONING & TESTING:

16.1 Hydrant System:

16.1.1 Pressurise the fire hydrant system by running the main fire pump and after attaining

the required pressure shut off the pump.

16.1.2 Open byepass valve and allow the pressure to drop in the system. Check that the jockey

pump cuts-in and cuts out at the pre-set pressures. If necessary adjust the pressure switch for the jockey pump. Close bye-pass valve.

16.1.3 Open hydrant valve and allow the water to flow into the fire water tank in order to

avoid wastage of water. The main fire pump should cut-in at the pre-set pressure and should not cutout automatically on reaching the normal line pressure. The main fire pump should stop only by manual push button. However the jockey pump should cut-out as soon as the main pump starts.

16.1.4 Switch off the main fire pump and test check the diesel engine driven pump in the same

manner as the electrically driven pump.

16.1.5 When the fire pumps have been checked for satisfactory working on automatic controls, open fire hydrant valves simultaneously and allow the hose pipes to discharge water into the fire tank to avoid wastage. The electrically driven pump should run continuously for eight hours so that its performance can be checked.

16.1.6 Check each landing valve, male and female couplings and branch pipes for

compatibility with each other. Any fitting which is found to be incompatible and does not fit into the other properly shall be replaced by the contractor. Landing valves shall also be checked by opening and closing under pressure.

16.2 Sprinkler System:

16.2.1 Start the sprinkler pump and develop the required pressure in the sprinkler pipes.

16.2.2 Open the test valve to test the automatic starting of the pump. If necessary,

make necessary adjustments in the setting of pressure switch. The sprinkler installation valve and associated water gong alarm shall also operate when the test valve is open. This operation is to be done for each and every section of the sprinkler system and the alarm for each section (via flow switch) shall be checked for operation.

16.2.3 After satisfactory operation of the pump the Contractor shall set up mock fire and test the

system.

143

16.2.4 Check all annunciations by simulating the alarm conditions at site. 17.0 HANDING OVER:

17.1 All commissioning and testing shall be done by the contractor to the complete

satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge, and the job handed over to the Engineer-in-Charge, or his authorized representative / client department.

17.2 Contractor shall also handover, to the Engineer-in-Charge, all maintenance & operation

manuals and all other items as per the terms of the contract.

18.0 GUARANTEE:

18.1 The contractor shall submit a warranty for all equipment, materials and accessories

supplied by him against manufacturing defects, malfunctioning or under capacity functioning.

18.2 The form of warranty shall be as approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.

18.3 The warranty shall be one year from the date of commissioning and handing over.

18.4 The warranty shall expressly include replacement of all defective or under capacity

equipment. Engineer-in-Charge may allow repair of certain equipment if the same is found to meet the requirement for efficient functioning of the system.

18.5 The warranty shall include replacement of any equipment found to have capacity lesser

than the rated capacity as accepted in the contract. The replacement equipment shall be approved by the Engineer-in- Charge.

LIST OF BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARD CODES

IS:277-1992 - Galvanised steel Sheet (plain & corrugated)

IS:544-1985 - Dimension for pipe Threads (Reaffirmed 1996)

IS:778 - Valves (gate/globe/check type)

IS:655-1963 - Metal Air Ducts

IS:13095-1991 - Butterfly Valves

IS:659-1964 - Air-conditioning (safety codes)

IS:1239-1990/92 - Mild Steel Pipes

IS:325 - 3 phase induction motor

IS:822 - Code of procedure for inspection of welds

IS:900 - Code of practice for installation and maintenance of motors

144

IS:6392 - Steel Pipe Flanges

IS:1822 - Motor starters for voltage not exceeding 650 Volts

IEC - Relevant Sections

IS:996 - Single phase small A.C. Motors

IS:4894-1987 - Centrifugal Fans

IS:1554(I) - PVC Insulated (heavy duty)electric cables for working

Voltage upto and including 1100 Volts

IS:8623-1993 - Bus Bar Trunking System

IS:8828-1996 - Miniature Circuit Breakers & IEC898-1995

IS:9537-1981 Part II - Rigid steel conduit for electrical wiring

IS:10810-1989 - Method of Test of Cables

IS:13947-1989 - Circuit Breakers

IS:139-1993(Part IV) - Contactors & Motor Starters

IS:13947-1993 - Switches,disconnectors,fuse combination units Duct Fabrication

standards -SMACNA

ASHRAE Handbooks- Application 1995

- fundamentals 1997

- System & equipment 1996

- Indoor Air Quality 62-1982

LIST OF IS CODES (Relating to Fire Fighting works)

The following codes and Indian Standards shall be applicable with amendments up to date.

CODE OF PRACTISE

Code of practice for fire safety of building (general)

fire fighting equipment and maintenance. - IS : 1648

Code of practice for installation of internal fire

hydrant in multistoried buildings. IS : 3844

Recommendations for providing first aid and

145

fire fighting arrangements in public buildings. IS : 2217

Code of practice for the selection, installation

and maintenance of portable first aid and fire appliances IS : 2190

National building code.

FIRE FIGHTING APPLIANCES

External fire hydrants. IS : 5290

Internal landing valves. IS : 5290

2 & 3 way suction collecting heads. IS : 904

First aid hose reels. IS : 884

Dunlop high pressure rubber pipe. IS : 5132

HAND APPLIANCES

Specification for portable CO2 fire extinguisher. IS : 2878

Specifications for portable chemical fire extinguisher foam type. IS : 933

PIPING AND VALVES

MS tubes up to 150 mm IS:1239 (Part –I)

MS tubes 200 mm above IS:3589

G.I. Pipes IS:1239 (Part I)

C.I. double flanged sluice valves class I IS:780`

C.I. double flanged non return valves IS:5312

PUMPS AND MOTORS

Centrifugal pump IS:1520

Electrical motors IS:7538

Code for unfired pressure vessels IS : 2825

Code of practice for lining of vessels and equipment

for chemical processes Part 1 : Rubber lining IS : 4682 (Part 1)

Specification for sewage and drainage pumps IS : 5600

Specification for submersible pump sets for

clear, cold, fresh water IS : 8034

Specification for horizontal centrifugal self priming pumps IS : 8418

146

Specification for horizontal centrifugal pumps for

clear cold fresh water IS : 1520

Steel plates for pressure vessels for intermediate and

high temperature service including boilers IS : 2002

147

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION & SCOPE OF WORK

(A) BSL 3 LAB INTERIOR / CLEAN ROOM SYSTEM

False Ceiling System-

Walk able Double skin sandwich type GSS/CRCA Powder coated Metallic ceiling panels

of 0.6 mm thickness on both sides,80 mm thick PUF in-filled with 40+/-2 Kg/m3 density

insulation. Complete with Extruded aluminium powder coated supports and hanging

arrangement, with aluminium profiles that create uniform seams. The Partition seams are

sealed by RTV silicone with a perfectly flush finishing. PUF insulation material is

sandwiched between the two skin layers and sealed from the exterior by the GI frame

work including all cutouts factory fitted, for Air terminals/Diffusers and lighting etc.

Wall Panel System with In-built Exhaust Air Riser-

Self supported, Double skin sandwitch type GSS/CRCA Powder coated Metallic Wall

panels of 0.6 mm thickness on both sides with 100 mm thick PUF in-filled with 40+/-2

Kg/m3 density insulation. Complete with in-built (25mm / 32mm dia) conduit including

service panel, Aluminium / GI floor track system, factory fitted cutouts for necessary

Doors, Windows, hatch openings for lab or process equipment, power/communication

sockets etc. In-built Exhaust air Risers of suitable size complet with 10 micron Filter and

factory perforated diffuser terminals (locking key arrangement for front operation should

be considered) should be an integral part of the wall panel system.

Wall to Wall & Wall to Ceiling coving of R-50 mm in PVC / Aluminium Powder coated

(clip-on type) construction, all corners should be finished with 3-D corner profile.

Wall to Floor coving of radius R-50 mm in sand-silica- epoxy

2 mm thick Ardex- Epoxy Flooring with self leveling compound, primer coating and

screed to be laid on levelled floor to provide a seamless finish and suitable for BSL 3

Laboratoryapplication.

Door System : Clean Room Doors should be designed to fit flush into the 100 mm thick

wall panel system on both sides and are supplied in different dimensions as per drawing.

Doors are fabtricated from GI sheets duly powder coated. Shutter has sheet thickness of

0.8mm and the frame of 1.2mm. Standard 50 mm panel has frame width of 50 mm and

shutter width of 46mm. Sizes as per the requirement stated here. The following

accessories are a part of the door: , SS ironmongery, DORMA make Model TS 68 door

closers, SS 304 D type handles of 300 mm size on one side and Push plate fixed with D/A

tape on other side , SS 304 butt hinges, side seal & Automatic drop seal and other

accessories.Sizes mentioned herein are total sizes including the door frame. Emergency

exit and the Main Door shall have bottom sil as well (all doors directly opening to

atmosphere should be air leak proof type with cam arrangement and to be tested with

soup-bouble solution during validation and testing).

148

SCHEDULE OF APPROVED MAKES

S NO. ITEM DESCRIPTIOPN MANUFACTURER / SUPPLIER

1 Water Cooled Chiller Carrier / York / Trane / McQuay

2 Cooling Tower Paharpur / Mihir / Advance

3 CHW & Cond. Water Pump – Split Casing Grundfos/CGL/Kirloskar/Mather Platt

4 Hot water generator Rapidcool / Heatex / Spirex marshal

4 Motor ABB/Siemens/Crompton/GEC/Equv.

5 Double skin Air handling units ZECO/Flaktwoods/Citizen

6 CHW / HW Coil ZECO/Citizen/Flaktwoods

7 Plug Type Fan Kruger/Nicotra/Punkar/Comefri

8 Centrifugal Fan Kruger/Nicotra/Comefri

9 Pre-fabricated Ducting Rolastar/Zeco

10 GI sheet SAIL/TATA/Bhusan

11 Closed Cell Nitrile Rubber Insulation Aluminium faced – Class “O”

Armacell / Armaflex/Vidoflex

12 BMS & Automation Honeywell/Siemens/Johnson Controls

13 3-way modulating valve + actuator Honeywell/Siemens/Johnson Controls

14 Air filters (Pre, Micro & HEPA) Thermadyne/AAF/Dyna

15 MS Pipe “Class-C” TATA/Jindal-Hissar

16 MCC Panel Tricolite/Khokar/Trident

17 Power Cable Polycab/CCE/Finolex/Skytone

18 Control Cable Polycab/Finolex/Kalinga

19 Capacitor & Relays EPCOS/ABB/Siemens

20 Cable Tray Indiana/Profab

21 Telephone & Communication Cable Grandlay/Deltron/ITD/Finolex

22 Clean room light fixture/fittings Optico/Superlite

23 General light fittings Wipro/Phillips

24 Switch Sockets with SS cover Plate North west/Clipsel/Crabtree

25 MCCB Siemens/Schneider/L&T/GE

26 VFD ABB/Dahfoss

27 PUSH BUTTON STN Siemens/Schneider/ABB

29 High pressure Industrial Exhaust air Fan GEC/Alstom/CGL

149

30 Cable conduits & conduit accessories King/NEC/HERA

31 Metal Cald Socket BCH/CGL

32 Earthing Material Ashlok/ISI

33 Building Lightening Arrestor ABB

34 Clean room Modular Panels iClean/Fabtech/GMP

35 Epoxy Flooring Material Ardex/Epoxy

36 Vinyl Flooring Forbo/Tatkit/Wonderfloor

37 Static & Dynamic Pass Box Iclean/Fabtech/GMP

38 Clean room compatible Doors Shaktiman/Iclean/Fabtech/GMP

39 SS-304 Lab furniture Aligro/Citizen/Mohit

40 Fire Panel (multi zone) addressable & accessories Johnson Controls/Saurter/Honeywell

41 CCTV Camera (IP based) Sony/Samsung

42 BMS Control PC IBM/DELL/LG/Wipro

43 CHW & HW Expansion Tank Sintex/Unitex

44 Butterfly Valve Audco/Advance

45 Balancing Valve Audco/ Advance

46 POT Strainer with Brass wire mesh Emarald/Sant

47 Y-Strainer Sant/H-Guru

48 Fire Damper Motorized Caryair/Zeco

49 Extruded aluminium Grill/Diffuser/ Damper Caryair/Suvidha

50 Ceiling mounted HEPA terminal – Aluminium AAF/Dyna/Thermadyne

51 DDC Controller / Field Sensors Johnson Controls/Saurter/Honeywell

52 Industrial Dial type Temp. / Pressure Gauge H-Guru/Emarald

53 Ceiling type Cassette AC units Hitachi/Diekin/Carrier

54 Bio-safety Cabinet-Type 2 B-II (100% exhaust) Esco/Labconco

55 Double door high pressure autoclave Natt steel/Staris

150

Technical data Sheet to be filled by tenderer

(Contractor shall submit catalogues of the equipment offered by them):

Sr.No. Equipment description unit Condition of service

1. Water Cooled Screw Compressor Type Chilling Machines

a. Manufacturer /Make&Country of origin

b. Model No.

c. Type(Hermatic/semihermatic)

d. No.of compressors

e. Rated Capacity ( Nominal)

f. Actual capacity (conditions of tender)

g. Refrigerant

h. Working Pressusre (PSI)

Suction

Discharge

i. Maximum (RPM)

j. Mode of start

k. Quantity of refrigerant for initial charge

l. Power Consumption

a) Total power consumption at full load Including fans/heater etc.

IKW/TR (actual for the chilling machines)

100% Load 90% Load 75% Load 50% Load 25% Load

m. Starting Current per compressors

n. Running current per compressor

o. Type of capacity control

q. Range of capacity control

r. safety Devices/controls

s. Monitoring Devices

t. Type of Bearings

151

Compressor Motor :

a. Motor Manufactures

b. Type

c. HP

d. Electrical characteristics

e. Method of starting

f. class of insulation

g. starter manufacturer

h. full load current

i. starting current

j. no load current

k. Type of vibration isolation for chilling machine

Condenser :

a. Manufacturer/Make

b. Model

c. Type

d. Coil Face area

e. No.of coil rows

f. Tube length

g. wall thickness of tube

h. tube diameter inner/outer (mm)

i. tube surface (inside)ft2

j. tube surface (outside)ft2

k. total no. of tubes

l. Type of fins

m. Material and spacing of fins

n. Refrigerant temp (F)

o. No. of rows

152

p. air flow (cfm)

q. Air velocity (fpm)

r. Type of fan

s. cfm of each fan

t. no.of total fans for each package

u. static pressure of fan (mm)

v. Air temperature

Entering –F Leaving – F

w. Type of control / safety

x. Condensing temperature F

y. Overall Dimension of the chilling machine (in meter)

z. Operating Weight of the chilling Machine (Kg)

Hot water Generator :

i. Heat out put (KW) :

ii. Total Heating Surface (m2) :

iii. Max.Outlet Temperature (F) :

iv. Temperature rise (Delta T) F :

v. Pressure Drop (m) :

vi. Power supply (V/Hz/PH)

vii. Total connected Load

viii. Dimension (LXWXH mm)

Pumps:

i. Water hold-up (ltrs) _______________

ii. Dry Weight (kg) CHW HW________ Pr. / Suc._____________________

a. Manufacturer :

b. Model No. :

c. Capacity USGPM

153

d. Head Meter

e. Speed RPM

f. Motor Rating KW

g. Type of Motor

Air Handling Units :

a. Manufacturer -

b. Casing -

c. Coil -

d. Blower -

e. Type -

f. Overall Dimension -

g. Unit Weight -

h Air Quantity -

i. Fan oulet velocity -

j. Design static pressure -

k Fan balancing static/and or Dynamic -

h. Fan motor output -

i. Motor location i.e inside or outside the fan section -

j. Type of casing finish -

k. Type of drive/vibration Isolators -

AHU Coil Data :

a. Cooling Coil Area -

b. No.of Rows -

c. No.of fins/cm -

154

d. Tube Material -

e. Tube dia -

f. Coil Header materia -

g. Thickness of tube -

5. CASSETTE A/C UNITS :

a. Manufacturer -

b. Casing -

c. Blower -

d. Type -

e. Overall Dimension -

f. Unit Weight -

g Air Quantity -

h. Cooling Coil Area -

i. No.of Rows -

j. No.of fins/cm -

k. Tube Material -

l. Tube dia -

m. Coil Header material -

n. Thickness of tube -

o. Fan motor output -

p. Impeller dia -

q. material of Impeller -

r. No.of fans & Speed -

s. Capcities(cfm/TR) -

t. Type & make of Automatic controls -

155

u. Type of vibration isolators -

6. Exhaust Fan /Fan section :

a. Make -

b. Air Quantity at Operational speed -

c. Static Pressure -

d. Diameter/size

e. Type -

f. Current characteristics -

g. Motor Rating -

h. Type of Motor -

i. Fan outlet Speed -

j. Fan Speed -

k. Motor Speed at the duty conditions -

l. Operating Weight -

m. Type of vibration isolators -

o. Type of bearings -

p. Performance curves -

q. Motor Efficiency -

r. Class of Insulation -

7. BMS & Electrical Controls

Make and Model of the following :

a. Flow Switch -

b. 2/3 – way Valves -

c. Operating Voltage -

d. Field Sensors (Pressure, Temp. & RH) -

156

e. Pessure Guage -

f. Thermometer -

g. DDC Controller / software -

h. Central Control Station / PC configuration & Monitor -

8. Electrical Accessories :

Make of the following

a. Motor Control Centre (MCC) -

b. Air Circuit Breaker -

c. MCCB -

d. MCB -

e. Rotary Switch -

f. Soft Starter -

g. Auto-transformer starter -

h Direct on line starter -

i. Contactor -

j. Current transformer -

k. Single phase preventor -

l. Push botton/changeover switch -

m. Ammeter/Voltmeter -

n Relays -

o Indicating Lamps -

p. Cables/wires -

9. Water Piping ;

a. Make of pipes/class of pipes -

b. Pipe wall thickness -

157

c. Valves & Strainers Make Material

i. Butterfly Valve

ii. Balancing Valve

iii. Ball Valve

iv. Ball valve with strainer

v. Pot Strainer

vi. Flexible connections

vii. Check Valve

viii. Gate Valves

ix. Globe Valves

x. Y-Stariners

pressure Guage

i) Make

ii) Model

iii) Stem type Industrial Thermometer

Galvanised Steel Sheets :

a. Make

b. Gauge/Thickness

c. Class of galvanizing

9. Grilles/Diffusers & Dampers/Louvers -

Make/Material/Guage

Insulation

a. Manufacturer

b. Duct Insulation Material/Density

c. Duct Acc. Lining Material/Density

d. Pipe Insulation Material/density

Modular Clean room syste

a) Manufacturer

b) Detailed specifications (wall / ceiling)

c) Double toughened glass air tight window system

d) Clean room compatible double skin door with closer

e) Air tight “0”leak door system

f) Emergency door with panic bar

g) Flooring system details

h) SS-304 Laboratory furniture as per GA Drg -

158

Access Control & Door Interlock system

a. Manufacturer -

b. Detailed specifications -

c. Compatible interface with central BMS system -

d. Emergency de-activation system of electro-magnetic locking-

e. Security and display system -

g. Accessibility management protocol -

159

(PART- F)

(PROPOSED DRAWINGS)

170

(PART- G)

(PRICE BID)

171

Price Bid

Name of work :- Design, construction, testing, commissioning, validation and other associated works of the Bio-Safety Level-3 (BSL-3) laboratory facility on turnkey basis and its comprehensive operation during the defect liability period of two years at NCR Biotech Science Cluster (NCR-BSC), Faridabad, Haryana.

Item

No.

Description of item Unit Amount in Fig.

(In Rs.)

Amount in

words (In

Rs.)

01

Design, construction, testing, commissioning,

validation and other associated works of the Bio-

Safety Level-3 (BSL-3) laboratory facility on

turnkey basis and its comprehensive operation

during the defect liability period of two years at

NCR Biotech Science Cluster (NCR-BSC),

Faridabad, Haryana

The works shall be executed as per the

scope of works, approved designs and

detailing, specifications, drawings, samples,

prototypes etc. Any work not specifically

mentioned but essentially required for

meeting the purpose and intent of setting

up of the proposed BSL-3 Laboratory

shall be deemed to be included in the

scope of works. All fixed equipment’s like

Autoclaves, Bio-Safety Cabinets, Pass

Boxes, HVAC system components, Hot

water generator, Air compressor,

Computers, Laboratory work stations and

all other equipment’s and systems

required for making the laboratory

operational and functional shall be provided

and included in the scope of works except

for the equipment’s used for scientific research

purpose.

01 Job

(Turnkey

lump sum

basis)

Total

1. The prices are to be quoted in the above mentioned form and shall include the cost of all the material, equipment’s , tools & tackles ,labor accessories etc. required for the successful execution and completion of the work in all respect as required as per the scope of works ,approved specifications, designs and drawings on “Turnkey Basis”

2. The bidder shall quote the rates in figures and in words and extend the amount to the ‘AMOUNT’ column.

3. The bidder shall submit breakup of Lump Sum price along with description of all items, quantity, rate and amount details etc. in enclosed BOQ along with this sheet.

172

Detail description of all items, quantity, rate and amount as per bill of quantity(BOQ)

S No Item Description Unit Qty. Rate Amount

(Rs.)

Sub- Head - I , Earth Work

1.1 Earth work in excavation by mechanical means

(Hydraulic excavator) / manual means over areas

(exceeding 30cm in depth. 1.5m in width as well as 10

sqm on plan) including disposal of excavated earth, lead

upto 50m and lift upto 1.5m, disposed earth to be

levelled and neatly dressed.

All kinds of soil cum 1121


(Hydraulic excavator) / manual means over areas

(exceeding 30cm in depth. 1.5m in width as well as 10

sqm on plan) including disposal of excavated earth, lead

upto 50m and lift upto 1.5m, disposed earth to be

levelled and neatly dressed.

Hard rock (blasting prohibited) cum 748


(Hydraulic excavator) / manual means in foundation

trenches or drains (not exceeding 1.5 m in width or 10

sqm on plan) including dressing of sides and ramming of

bottoms, lift upto 1.5 m, including getting out the

excavated soil and disposal of surplus excavated soil as

directed, within a lead of 50 m.



(Hydraulic excavator) / manual means in foundation

trenches or drains (not exceeding 1.5 m in width or 10

sqm on plan) including dressing of sides and ramming of

bottoms, lift upto 1.5 m, including getting out the

excavated soil and disposal of surplus excavated soil as

directed, within a lead of 50 m.

Hard rock (blasting prohibited) cum 94

173

1.5 Filling available excavated earth (excluding rock) in

trenches, plinth, sides of foundations etc. in layers not

exceeding 20cm in depth, consolidating each deposited

layer by ramming and watering, lead up to 50 m and lift

upto 1.5 m.

cum 141

1.6 Extra for every additional lift of 1.5 m or part thereof in

excavation /banking excavated or stacked materials.


Ordinary rock or hard rock : cum 285

1.7 Supplying and filling in plinth with Jamuna sand under

floors, including watering, ramming, consolidating and

dressing complete.

cum 98

1.8 Disposal of surplus earth with in NII campus with in

1.00 kilometre lead inclusive of all lift complete as per

direction of Engineer in-Charge.

cum 1121

1.9 Disposal of excavated rock with in NII campus with in

1.00 kilometre lead inclusive of all lift complete as per

direction of Engineer in-Charge.

cum 842

TOTAL

Sub - Head - II , Concrete Work

2.1 Providing and laying in position cement concrete of

specified grade excluding the cost of centering and

shuttering - All work up to plinth level :

a 1:4:8 (1 Cement : 4 coarse sand : 8 graded stone

aggregate 40 mm nominal size).

cum 137

b 1:5:10 ( 1 Cement : 5 coarse sand : 10 graded stone

aggregate 40 mm nominal size)

cum 10

2.2 Providing and laying cement concrete in retaining walls,

return walls, walls (any thickness) including attached

pilasters, columns, piers, abutments, pillars, posts,

struts, buttresses, string or lacing courses, parapets,

coping, bed blocks, anchor blocks, plain window sills,

fillets, sunken floor,etc., up to floor five level, excluding

the cost of centering, shuttering and finishing :

1:2:4 (1 Cement : 2 coarse sand : 4 graded stone

aggregate 20 mm nominal size)

cum 1

174

2.3 Providing and laying damp-proof course 40mm thick

with cement concrete 1:2:4 (1 cement : 2 coarse sand :

4 graded stone aggregate 12.5mm nominal size).

sqm 69

2.4 Extra for providing and mixing water proofing material

in cement concrete work @ 1kg per 50 Kg of cement.

per 50

Kg of

Cement

18

2.5 Applying a coat of residual petroleum bitumen of grade

of VG-10 of approved quality using 1.7kg per square

metre on damp proof course after cleaning the surface

with brushes and finally with a piece of cloth lightly

soaked in kerosene oil.

sqm 69

2.6 Making plinth protection 50mm thick of cement

concrete 1:3:6 (1 cement :3 coarse sand : 6 graded

stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size) over 75mm thick

bed of dry brick ballast 40 mm nominal size, well

rammed and consolidated and grouted with fine sand

including finishing the top smooth

sqm 107

TOTAL

Sub - Head - III , RCC Work

3.1 Centering and shuttering including strutting, propping

etc. and removal of form for :

a Foundations, footings, bases of columns, etc. for mass

concrete.

sqm 292

b Walls ( any thickness) including attached pilasters,

butteresses, plinth and string courses etc.

sqm 31

c Suspended floors, roofs, landings, balconies and access

platform.

sqm 1539

d Lintles, beams, plinth beams, girders, bressumers and

cantilevers.

sqm 1343

e Columns, Pillars, Piers, Abutments, Posts and Struts. sqm 925

f Stairs, (Excluding landings) except spiral -staircases. sqm 36

3.2 Extra for additional height in centering, shuttering

where ever required with adequate bracing, propping

etc. including cost of de-shuttering and decentering at

all levels, over a height of 3.5 m for every additional

height of 1 metre or part thereof (Plan area to be

175

measured.)

Suspended floors, roofs, landing, beams and balconies

(Plan area to be measured).

sqm 1084

3.3 Steel reinforcement for R.C.C. work including

straightening, cutting, bending, placing in position and

binding all complete upto plinth level.

Thermo - Mechanically Treated bars kg 31495

3.4 Steel reinforcement for R.C.C. work including

straightening, cutting, bending, placing in position and

binding all complete above plinth level.

Thermo - Mechanically Treated bars kg 58303

3.5 Add for plaster drip course/ groove in plastered surface

or moulding to R.C.C. projections.

metre 832

3.6 Providing and laying in position machine batched and

machine mixed design mix M-25 grade cement concrete

for reinforced cement concrete work, using cement

content as per approved design mix, including pumping

of concrete to site of laying but excluding the cost of

centering, shuttering, finishing and reinforcement,

including admixtures in recommended proportions as

per IS: 9103 to accelerate, retard setting of concrete,

improve workability without impairing strength and

durability as per direction of Engineer-in-charge.

(Note :- Cement content considered in this item is @

330 kg/cum. Excess/less cement used as per design mix

is payable/recoverable separately).

a All works upto plinth level. cum 270

b All works above plinth level upto floor V level. cum 368

3.7 Extra for providing richer mixes at all floor levels.

Note:- Excess/less cement over the specified cement

content used is payable /recoverable separately.

a Providing M-30 grade concrete instead of M-25 grade

BMC/RMC. (Note:- Cement content considered in M-30

cum 84

176

is @ 340 kg/cum).

3.8 Add (or deduct) for using extra ( or less) cement in the

items of design mix over and above the specified

cement content therein.

quintal 64

TOTAL

Sub- Head IV - Brick Work

4.1 Brick work with common burnt clay F.P.S. (non modular)

bricks of class designation 7.5 in foundation and plinth

in:

Cement mortar 1:6 (1 Cement : 6 coarse sand) cum 46

4.2 Brick work with non modular fly ash lime bricks (FALG

Bricks) conforming to IS:12894-2002, class designation

10 average compressive strength in super structure

above plinth level up to floor V level in :

Cement mortar 1:6 (1 cement : 6 coarse sand) cum 303

4.3 Half brick masonry with common burnt clay F.P.S. (non

modular) bricks of class designation 7.5 in

superstructure above plinth level up to floor V level.

Cement mortar 1:4 ( 1 cement :4 coarse sand) sqm 1036

4.4 Extra for providing and placing in position 2 Nos. 6 mm

dia. M.S. bars at every third course of half brick

masonry.

sqm 1036

4.5 Brick edging 7cm wide 11.4cm. deep to plinth protection

with common burnt clay F.P.S. (non modular) bricks of

class designation 7.5 including grouting with cement

mortar 1:4 (1 cement : 4 fine sand).

metre 119

TOTAL

Sub Head - V Stone Work

5.1 Stone work (machine cut edges) for wall lining etc.

(veneer work) backing filled with a grout of 12mm thick

cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement : 3 coarse sand) including ,

pointing in white cement mortar 1:2 (1 white cement : 2

stone dust) with an admixture of pigment matching the

stone shade : (To be secured to the backing by means of

177

cramps which shall be paid for separately) :

White sand stone - Exposed face machine cut and table

rubbed with rough backing.

30 mm thick. sqm 485

5.2 Providing and fixing copper pins 7.5 cm long 6 mm

diameter for securing adjacent stones in stone wall

lining in cement mortar 1:2 (1 cement : 2 coarse sand)

including making the necessary chases.

each 1940

5.3 Stone work, plain in copings, cornices, string courses and

plinth courses, upto 75 mm thick in Cement mortar 1:6

(1 cement : 6 coarse sand) including pointing with white

cement mortar 1:2 (1 white cement : 2 stone dust) with

an admixture of pigment matching the stone shade.

White sand stone cum 1

5.4 Making chases up to 7.5x7.5 cm in walls including

making good and finishing with matching surface after

inserting copings, cornices, string courses and plinth

courses, complete

metre 119

5.5 Extra for pre finished full round moulding in sand stone

coping /bands etc.

metre 119

5.6 Providing and fixing cramps of required size & shape in

RCC/ CC / Brick masonry backing with cement mortar 1:2

( 1 cement :2 coarse sand) including drilling necessary

hole in stones and embedding the cramp in the hole

(fastener to be paid separately).

Stainless steel cramps. kg 427

5.7 Providing and fixing expansion hold fasteners on C.C.

/R.C.C./Brick masonry surface backing including drilling

necessary holes and the cost of bolt etc complete.

Wedge expansion type

Fastener with threaded dia 10 mm. each 1940

5.8 Forming "L" groove of uniform size upto 10mm x10mm

on the edge of sand stone slab cladding and finishing

the groove in white cement mortar 1:2 (1 white cement

: 2 stone dust) with an admixture of pigment matching

metre 119

178

the stone shade, complete as per direction of the

Engineer-in-charge :

5.9 Extra for champering the exposed edges of stone slabs

cladding to make "V" grooves between adjascent

stones as required as per drawings complete

metre 238

TOTAL

Sub Head - VI Marble Work

6.1 Providing and fixing 18mm thick gang saw cut mirror

polished premoulded and prepolished) for wall lining

(veneer work), backing filled with a grout of average 12

mm thick in cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement : 3 coarse

sand) including pointing with white cement mortar 1:2

(1 white cement : 2 marble dust) with an admixture of

pigment to match the marble shade: (To be secured to

the backing by means of cramps, which shall be paid for

separately).

Granite of any colour and shade

a Area of slab upto 0.50 sqm. sqm 16

6.2 Providing and fixing 18mm thick gang saw cut mirror

polished premoulded and prepolished) machine cut for

kitchen platforms, vanity counters, window sills , facias

and similar locations of required size of approved shade,

colour and texture laid over 20mm thick base cement

mortar 1:4 (1 cement : 4 coarse sand) with joints treated

with white cement, mixed with matching pigment,

epoxy touch ups, including rubbing, curing, moulding

and polishing to edges to give high gloss finish etc.

complete at all levels.

a Raj Nagar Plain white marble/ Udaipur green marble/

Zebra black marble.

Area of slab upto 0.50 sqm. sqm 8

Area of slab over 0.50 sqm. sqm 10

b Granite of any colour and shade

Area of slab upto 0.50 sqm. sqm 6

179

6.3 Providing edge moulding to 18mm thick marble stone

counters, Vanities etc. including machine polishing to

edge to give high gloss finish etc. complete as per design

approved by Engineer-in-Charge.

a Marble work metre 72

Granite work metre 8

6.4 Extra for fixing marble /granite stone over and above

corresponding basic item, in facia and drops of width

upto 150 mm with epoxy resin based adhesive including

cleaning etc. complete.

metre 8

6.5 Extra for providing opening of required size & shape for

wash basins/ kitchen sink in kitchen platform, vanity

counters and similar location in marble/Granite/stone

work including necessary holes for pillar taps etc.

including moulding, rubbing and polishing of cut edges

etc. complete.

each 12

6.6 Providing and fixing stone slab table rubbed, edges

rounded and polished of size 75x50 cm deep and 1.8 cm

thick fixed in urinal partitions by cutting a chase of

appropriate width with chase cutter and embedding the

stone in the chase with epoxy grout or with cement

concrete 1:2:4 (1 cement : 2 coarse sand : 4 graded

stone aggregate 6 mm nominal size) as per direction of

Engineer-in-charge and finished smooth.

Granite Stone of approved shade. sqm 1

TOTAL

Sub- Head - VII Wood Work & PVC Work

7.1 Providing and fixing ISI marked flush door shutters

conforming to IS: 2202 (Part I) non-decorative type, core

of block board construction with frame of 1st class hard

wood and well matched commercial 3 ply veneering

with vertical grains or cross bands and face veneers on

both faces of shutters :

35 mm thick including ISI marked Stainless Steel butt

hinges with necessary screws.

sqm 61

7.2 Extra for providing lipping with 2nd class teak wood sqm 61

180

battens 25 mm minimum depth on all edges of flush

door shutters (over all area of door shutter to be

measured).

7.3 Extra for providing vision panel not exceeding 0.1 sqm in

all type of flush doors (cost of glass excluded) (overall

area of door shutter to be measured) :

Rectangular or square. sqm 27

7.4 Extra for cutting rebate in flush door shutters ( Total

area of the shutter to be measured).

sqm 27

7.5 Providing and fixing aluminium extruded section body

tubular type universal hydraulic door closer (having

brand logo with ISI, IS : 3564, embossed on the body,

door weight upto 36 kg to 80 kg and door width from

701 mm to 1000 mm) with double speed adjustment

with necessary accessories and screws etc. complete.

each 19

7.6 Providing and fixing aluminium sliding door bolts ISI

marked anodised (anodic coating not less than grade AC

10 as per IS : 1868) transparent or dyed to required

colour or shade with nuts and screws etc. complete :

a 300 x 16 mm each 11

7.7 Providing and fixing aluminium tower bolts IS marked

anodised ( anodic coating not less than grade AC 10 as

per is : 1868) transparent or dyed to required colour or

shade with necessary screws etc. complete:

a 300 x10 mm each 34

b 150 x 10 mm each 27

c 100 x 10 mm each 108

7.8 Providing and fixing aluminium pull bolt lock anodised

ISI marked (anodic coating not less than grade AC 10 as

per IS : 1868) transparent or dyed to required colour

and shade with necessary screws bolts, nut and washers

etc. complete.

each 14

7.9 Providing and fixing aluminium handles ISI marked

anodised ( anodic coating not less than grade AC 10 as

per IS : 1868 ) transparent or dyed to required colour or

shade with necessary screws etc. complete :

181

a 125 mm each 68

b 100mm each 108

7.10 Providing and fixing aluminium hanging floor door

stopper ISI marked anodised (anodic coating not less

than grade AC 10 as per IS : 1868) transparent or dyed

to required colour and shade with necessary screws etc.

complete.

Twin rubber stopper each 34

7.11 Providing & Fixing decorative high pressure laminated

sheet of plain / wood grain in gloss / matt / suede finish

with high density protective surface layer and reverse

side of adhesive bonding quality conforming to IS : 2046

Type S including cost of adhesive of approved quality.

1.00 mm thick sqm 122

7.12 Providing and fixing ISI marked oxidised M.S. sliding

door bolts with nuts and screws etc. complete :

250x16 mm each 4

7.13 Providing and fixing ISI marked oxidised M.S. tower bolt

black finish, (Barrel type) with necessary screws etc.

complete :

250x10 mm each 8

7.14 Providing and fixing ISI marked oxidised M.S. handles

conforming to IS:4992 with necessary screws etc.

complete :

125 mm each 8

TOTAL

Sub- Head - VIII , Steel Work

8.1 Providing and fixing 1mm thick M.S. sheet door with

frame of 40x40x6mm angle iron and 3mm M.S. gusset

plates at the junctions and corners, all necessary fittings

complete, including applying a priming coat of approved

steel primer.

Using M.S. angles 40x40x6 mm for diagonal braces. sqm 4

182

8.2 Supplying and fixing rolling shutters of approved make,

made of required size M.S. laths, interlocked together

through their entire length and jointed together at the

end by end locks, mounted on specially designed pipe

shaft with brackets, side guides and arrangements for

inside and outside locking with push and pull operation

complete, including the cost of providing and fixing

necessary 27.5 cm long wire springs manufactured from

high tensile steel wire of adequate strength conforming

to IS: 4454 – part 1 and M.S. top cover of required

thickness for rolling shutters.

80x1.20 mm M.S. laths with 1.20 mm thick top cover. sqm 43

8.3 Providing and fixing ball bearing for rolling shutters. each 8

8.4 Extra for providing mechanical device chain and crank

operation for operating rolling shutters.

Exceeding 10.00 sqm and upto 16.80 sqm in the area. sqm 43

8.5 Extra for providing grilled rolling shutters manufactured

out of 8 mm dia. M.S. bar instead of laths as per design

approved by Engineer-in-charge.(area of grill to be

measured).

sqm 16

8.6 Providing and fixing T-iron frames for doors, windows

and ventilators of mild steel Tee-sections, joints mitred

and welded, including fixing of necessary butt hinges

and screws and applying a priming coat of approved

steel primer.

Fixing with 15x3 mm lugs 10 cm. long embedded in

cement concrete block 15x10x10 cm of C.C. 1:3:6 (1

Cement : 3 coarse sand : 6 graded stone aggregate 20

mm nominal size).

kg 122

8.7 Providing and fixing circular / Hexagonal cast iron or M.S

sheet box for ceiling fan clamp of internal dia 140mm,

73mm height, top lid of 1.5mm thick M.S. sheet with its

top surface hacked for proper bonding, top lid shall be

screwed into the cast iron/ M.S sheet box by means of

3.3 mm dia. round headed screws, one lock at the

corners. Clamp shall be made of 12 mm dia M.S bar

bent to shape as per standard drawing.

each 320

8.8 Steel work welded in built up sections/ framed work

including cutting, hoisting, fixing in position and

183

applying a priming coat of approved steel primer using

structural steel etc. as required.

In gratings, frames, guard bar, ladder, railings, brackets,

gates and similar works.

kg 72

8.9 Designing, providing, fabricating,and fixing in position

tubular steel frame work using RHS/SHS of TATA TUBE

for supporting polycorbonate sheet (at all heights)

including the cost of RHS / SHS tubes and its cutting

revitting,bolting / welding,hoisting and fixing in position

to RCC members with MS plates applying a primary coat

of approved steel primer special shaped washers and

bending of RHS/SHS sections to required curvature (as

per approved design) complete as per approved design

and direction of Engineer in charge. The rate includes all

labour, material, T&P machinery for hoisting scaffolding

etc. to complete the item). The weight of RHS/SHS tubes

used with MS plates,only shall be measured in this

item for payment) Nothing extra shall be paid to bend

the members as per design.

kg 875

8.10 Providing and Fixing of sky lights consisting of Multi

cell/tight cell Polycarbonate Panel System of approved

colour, 16mm thick (minimum) having uniform in color

with an integral Tight-Cell core constructed not to

exceed 4mm x 4mm in a cross section,Vertical Standing

Seam manufactured at both sides of the panel. Snap-on

connector to interlock the panels shall have a grip-lock

double tooth locking mechanism to ensure maximum

uplift capability & shall be of same color as that of

panel. Panel shall be factory sealed/end welded panels

with additional End-cap/Aluminium U-Profile (mill

finish) for ends. Panel shall be co-extruded with special

anti glare compound and UV protected. The full system

shall be fitted on MS purlins perpendicular to direction

of sheeting with purlin spacing as specified by

Manufacturer. The weight of the panel only shall not be

less than 3250 gram per square metre.

The rate includes cost of all the operations,labour & all

materials and tests (as applicable) involved such as bolts

nuts and screws etc. and labour for cutting bending to

required profile, necessary scaffolding, hoisting in

position etc. for proper completion of the work etc.

complete as per specification drawings and direction of

Engineer in charge . Finished surface area of roofing

sqm 35

184

fixed over steel tublar structure shall be measured for

payment. MS tabular frame work shall be measured

seperately for payment )

8.11 Providing and fixing carbon steel galvanised ( minimum

coating 5 micron ) dash fastener of 10 mm dia double

threaded 6.8 grade (yield strength 480 N/mm2), counter

sunk head, comprising of 10 m dia polyamide PA 6 grade

sleeve, including drilling of hole in frame , concrete/

masonry, etc. as per direction of Engineer-in-charge.

10 x80 mm each 414

8.12 Providing and fixing stainless steel ( Grade 304) railing

made of Hollow tubes, channels, plates etc. including

welding, grinding, buffing, polishing and making

curvature (wherever required) and fitting the same with

necessary stainless steel nuts and bolts complete i/c

fixing the railing with necessary accessories & stainless

steel dash fasteners , stainless steel bolts etc., of

required size, on the top of the floor or the side of waist

slab with suitable arrangement as per approval of

Engineer-in-charge. ( for payment purpose only weight

of stainless steel members shall be considered excluding

fixing accessories such as nuts, bolts, fasteners etc.)

kg 475

8.13 Providing and fixing 10 mm thick bevelled edge,

toughened glass of Saint Gobain, Modiguard or

approved equivalent make i/c drilling of holes etc in

railing complete.

sqm 24

TOTAL

Sub- Head - IX Flooring

9.1 Kota stone slab flooring over 20mm (average) thick

base laid over and jointed with grey cement slurry

mixed with pigment to match the shade of the slab

including rubbing and polishing complete with base of

cement mortar 1 : 4 ( 1 cement : 4 coarse sand):

25 mm thick. sqm 509

9.2 Kota stone slabs 25 mm thick in risers of steps, skirting,

dado and pillars laid on 12 mm ( average) thick cement

mortar 1: 3 ( 1 cement : 3 coarse sand) and jointed with

grey cement slurry mixed with pigment to match the

sqm 18

185

shade of the slabs, including rubbing and polishing

complete.

9.3 Extra for pre finished nosing in treads of steps of

granite stone slab

metre 390

9.4 Extra for marble /granite stone flooring in treads of

steps and risers using single length up to 2.00 metre .

sqm 176

9.5 52 mm thick cement concrete flooring with concrete

hardener topping, under layer 40 mm thick cement

concrete 1:2:4 (1 cement : 2 coarse sand : 4 graded

stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size) and top layer 12

mm thick cement hardener consisting of mix 1:2 (1

cement hardener mix : 2 graded stone aggregate 6 mm

nominal size) by volume, .hardening compound mixed

@ 2 litre per 50kg of cement or as per manufacturers

specifications. This includes cost of cement slurry, but

excluding the cost of nosing of steps etc. complete.

sqm 27

9.6 Cement plaster skirting (up to 30 cm height) with

cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement : 3 coarse sand) finished

with a floating coat of neat cement.

18 mm thick. sqm 5

9.7 Providing and fixing glass strips in joints of terrazo/

cement concrete floors.

40 mm wide and 4 mm thick. metre 49

9.8 Providing and fixing Ist quality ceramic glazed wall tiles (

rectified edges , 300x200mm size) conforming to IS :

15622 (thickness to be specified by the manufacturer )

of approved make in all colours, shades except

burgundy, bottle green, black of any size as approved by

Engineer-in-Charge, in skirting, risers of steps and dados

over 12 mm thick bed of cement Mortar 1:3 (1 cement :

3 coarse sand) and jointing with grey cement slurry @

3.3kg per sqm including pointing in white cement mixed

with pigment of matching shade complete.

sqm 268

9.9 Providing and laying gangsaw cut 18 mm thick mirror

polished prepolished machine cut granite stone of

required size and shape of approved shade , colour and

texture in flooring laid over 20mm average thick base

of cement mortar 1:4 (1 cement : 4 coarse sand) laid

sqm 208

186

and jointed with white cement mixed with matching

pigment epoxy touchups etc complete as per direction

of engineer in charge .

9.10 Providing and laying gangsaw cut 18 mm thick mirror

polished prepolished machine cut granite stone of

required size and shape of approved shade , colour and

texture in risers of steps, skirting, dado and pillars laid

on 12 mm ( average) thick cement mortar 1: 3 ( 1

cement : 3 coarse sand) and jointed with grey cement

slurry mixed with pigment to match the shade of the

slabs, including rubbing and polishing complete.

sqm 43

9.11 Extra for making edge chamfered of kota stone skirting

as per drawing

metre 171

9.12 Providing and laying 60 mm thick factory made cement

concrete interlocking paver block of M-30 grade made

by block making machine with strong vibratory

compaction and of approved size and design/shape laid

in required colour and pattern over and including 50

mm thick compacted bed of coarse sand, filling the

joints with coarse sand etc. all complete as per the

direction of Engineer -in -charge

sqm 114

TOTAL

Sub- Head - X Roofing

10.1 Making khurras 45 x 45 cm with average minimum

thickness of 5 cm cement concrete 1:2:4 ( 1 cement: 2

coarse sand : 4 graded stone aggregate of 20 mm

nominal size ) over P.V.C. sheet 1mx1mx400 micron,

finished with 12 mm cement plaster 1:3 (1 cement : 3

coarse sand) and a coat of neat cement rounding the

edges and making and finishing the outlet complete.

each 36

10.2 Providing and fixing on wall face unplasticised Rigid PVC

rain water pipes conforming to IS : 13592 Type A

including jointing with seal ring conforming to IS : 5382

leaving 10 mm gap for thermal expansion.(i) Single

socketed pipes.

110 mm diameter metre 90

10.3 Providing and fixing on wall face unplasticised - PVC

moulded fittings/ accessories for unplasticised Rigid PVC

rain water pipes conforming to IS : 13592 Type A

187

including jointing with seal ring conforming to IS : 5382

leaving 10 mm gap for thermal expansion.

a Bend 87.5°

110 mm bend each 10

b Shoe

110 mm shoe each 10

10.4 Providing and fixing unplasticised -PVC pipe clips of

approved design to unplasticised - PVC rain water pipes

by means of 50x50x50mm hard wood plugs, screwed

with M.S. screws of required length including cutting

brick work and fixing in cement mortar 1:4 (1 cement : 4

coarse sand) and making good the wall etc. complete.

110 mm each 50

10.5 Providing and fixing to the inlet mouth of rain water

pipes cast iron grating 15 cm diameter and weighing

not less than 440 grams.

each 10

TOTAL

Sub- Head - XI Finishing

11.1 12 mm cement plaster of mix :

1 : 6 (1 cement : 6 fine sand ) sqm 1618

11.2 15 mm cement plaster on the rough side of single or

half brick wall of mix:

1 : 6 (1 cement : 6 fine sand ) sqm 1813

11.3 6 mm cement plaster to ceilings of mix :

1 : 3 ( 1 cement : 3 fine sand) sqm 1701

11.4 Washed stone grit plaster on exterior walls of height

upto 10 metre above ground level in two layers, under

layer 12mm cement plaster 1:4 (1 cement: 4 coarse

sand ), furrowing the under layer with scratching tool,

applying cement slurry on the under layer @ 2 Kg of

cement per square metre, top layer 15mm cement

plaster 1:1/2:2 (1 cement: 1/2 coarse sand : 2 stone

chipping 10mm nominal size), in panels with groove all

sqm 1133

188

around as per approved pattern including scrubbing and

washing the top layer with brushes and water to expose

the stone chippings ,complete as per specification and

direction of Engineer-in- charge (Payment for providing

grooves shall be made separately).

11.5 Forming groove of uniform size from 12x12mm and

upto 25x15mm in the top layer of washed stone grit

plastered surface as per approved pattern, including

providing and fixing aluminum channels of appropriate

size and thickness (not less than 2 mm), nailed to the

under layer with rust proof screws and nails and

finishing the groove complete as per specifications and

direction of the Engineer-in-Charge.

metre 2266

11.6 Providing and applying plaster of paris putty of 2 mm

thickness over plastered surface to prepare the surface

even and smooth complete

sqm 3431

11.7 Distempering with 1st quality acrylic distemper, having

VOC (Volatile Organic Compound ) content less than 50

grams/ litre, of approved brand and manufacture,

including applying additional coats wherever required,

to achieve even shade and colour.

Two coats. sqm 3431

11.8 Finishing walls with textured exterior paint of required

shade :

New work (Two or more coats applied @ 3.28 ltr/10

sqm) over and including priming coat of exterior primer

applied @ 2.20kg/10 sqm.

sqm 500

11.9 Painting with synthetic enamel paint, having VOC

(Volatile Organic Compound) content less than 150

grams/ litre, of approved brand and manufacture,

including applying additional coats wherever required to

achieve even shade and colour.

Two coats. sqm 200

TOTAL

Sub- Head - XII , Aluminium Work

189

12.1 Providing and fixing aluminium work for doors,

windows, ventilators and partitions with extruded built

up standard tubular sections/ appropriate Z sections

and other sections of approved make conforming to IS:

733 and IS: 1285, fixing with dash fasteners of required

dia and size, including necessary filling up the gaps at

junctions, i.e. at top, bottom and sides with required

EPDM rubber/ neoprene gasket etc. Aluminium sections

shall be smooth, rust free, straight, mitred and jointed

mechanically wherever required including cleat angle,

Aluminium snap beading for glazing / paneling, C.P.

brass / stainless steel screws, all complete as per

architectural drawings and the directions of Engineer-in-

charge. (Glazing, paneling and dash fasteners to be paid

for separately) :

a For fixed portion

b Anodised aluminium (anodised transparant or dyed to

required shade according to IS 1868 minimum anodic

coating grade AC 15

kg 1256

c For shutters of doors, windows & ventilators including

providing and fixing hinges / pivots and making

provision for fixing of fittings wherever required

including the cost of PVC/ neoprene gasket required (

Fittings shall be paid for separately).

d Anodised aluminium (anodised transparant or dyed to

required shade according to IS 1868 minimum anodic

coating grade AC 15

Kg 640

12.2 Providing and fixing glazing in aluminium door, window,

ventilator shutters and partitions etc. with PVC/

neoprene gasket etc. complete as per the Architectural

drawings and the direction of Engineer - in - Charge

(Coast of aluminium snap beading shall be paid in basic

item) :

a With float glass panes of 4.0 mm thickness sqm 10

b With float glass panes of 5.50 mm thickness sqm 83

12.3 Filling the gap in between aluminium frame & adjacent

RCC/ Brick/ Stone work by providing weather silicon

sealant over backer rod of approved quality as per

architectural drawings and direction of Engineer-in-

190

charge complete.

Upto 5mm depth and 5 mm width metre 392

12.4 Providing and fixing double glazed hermetically sealed

glazing in aluminium windows, ventilators and partition

etc. with 6 mm thick clear float glass, Light transmission

27% to 30% Reflection external 17% to 20%, Reflection

Internal 12% to 33%, solar factor 0.20 to 0.21, Shading

coefficient 0.23 to 0.24 and U vlaue 1.6 to 1.8) or

equivalent both side, having 12 mm air gap, including

providing EPDM gasket, perforated aluminium spacers,

desiccants, sealant (Both primary and secondary

sealant) etc. as per specifications, drawings and

direction of Engineer-in-charge complete.

sqm 32

12.5 Providing and fixing stainless steel (SS 304 grade)

adjustable friction windows stays of approved quality

with necessary stainless steel screws etc. to the side

hung windows as per direction of Engineer-in-charge

complete.

b 510 X 19 mm each 108

12.6 Providing and fixing anodised aluminium (anodised

transparent or dyed to required shade according to IS :

1868 Minimum anodic coating of grade AC 15) sub

frame work for windows and ventilators with extruded

built up standard tubular sections of approved make

conforming to IS : 733 and IS : 1285 fixed with rawl plugs

and stainless steel screws etc.

kg 353

TOTAL

Sub- Head - XIII , Water Proofing

13.1 Providing and laying water proofing treatment to

vertical and horizontal surfaces of depressed portions of

W.C kitchen and the like consisting of :

a Ist course of appying cement slurry @ 4.4 Kg/sqm mixed

with water proofing compound conforming to IS 2645in

recommended proportions including rounding off

junction of vertical and horizontal surface.

b IInd course of 20 mm cement plaster 1: 3 (1 cement :3

coarse sand) mixed with water proofing compound in

recommended proportion including roudnign off

191

junction of vertical and horizontal surface

c IIIrd course of applying blown or residual bitument

applied hot at 1.7 kg. per sqm of area.

d IVth course of 400 micron thick PVC sheet. ( Overlaps at

joints of PVC sheet should be 100 mm wide and pasted

to each other with bitument @ 1.7 kg/sqm.)

sqm 62

13.2 Providing and laying integral cement based water

proofing treatment including preparation of surface as

required for treatment of roofs, balconies, terraces etc

consisting of following operations :

a) Applying a slurry coat of neat cement using 2.75

kg/sqm. of cement admixed with water proofing

compound conforming to IS. 2645 and approved by

Engineer-in-charge over the RCC slab including

adjoining walls upto 300 mm height including cleaning

the surface before treatment.

b) b) Laying brick bats with mortar using broken bricks

/brick bats 25 mm to 115 size wiht 50 % of cement

mortar 1:5 (1 cement : 5 coarse sand) admixed with

water proofing compound conforming to IS : 2645 and

approved by Engineer -in-charge over 20 mm thick layer

of cement mortar of mix 1:5 (1 cement : 5 coarse sand )

admixed with water proofing compound conforming to

IS : 2645 and approved by Engineer-in-charge to

required slope and treating similarly the adjoining walls

upto 300 mm height including rounding of juncitons of

walls and slabs.

c) After two days of proper curing applying a second coat

of cement slurry using 2.7 kg/sqm of cement admixed

with water proofing compound conforming to SI : 2645

and approved by Engineer -in-charge.

d) Finishing the surface with 20 mm thick jointless cement

mortar of mix 1:4 ( 1 cement : 4 coarse sand) admixed

with water proofing compound conforming to IS : 2645

and approved by Engineer -in-charge including laying

glass fibre cloth of approved quality in top layer of

plaster and finally finishing the surface with trowel with

neat cement slurry and making pattern fo 300 x 300 mm

square 3 mm deep.

192

e) The whole terrace so finished shall be flooded with

water for a minimum period of two weeks for curing

and for final test. All above operations to be done in

order and as directed and specified by the Engineer -in-

charge.

With average thickness of 120mm and minimum

thickness at khurra as 65 mm.

sqm 746

TOTAL

SUB HEAD – XIV Plumbing Work

14.1 Providing and fixing white vitreous china extended wall

mounting water closet of size 780x370x690 mm of

approved shape including providing & fixing white

vitreous china cistern with dual flush fitting, of flushing

capacity 3 litre/6 litre (adjustable to 4 litre/8 litres),

including seat cover, and cistern fittings, nuts, bolts and

gasket etc complete.

each 6

14.2 Providing and fixing white vitreous china battery based

infrared sensor operated urinal of approx. size 610 x 390

x 370 mm having pre & post flushing with water ( 250 ml

& 500 ml consumption), having water inlet from back

side, including fixing to wall with suitable brackets all as

per manufacturers specification and direction of

Engineer-in-charge..

each 4

14.3 Providing and fixing wash basin with C.I. brackets, 15

mm C.P. brass pillar taps,32 mm C.P. brass waste of

standard pattern, including painting of fittings and

brackets, cutting and making good the walls wherever

require :

a White Vitreous China Wash basin size 550x400 mm

with a pair of 15 mm C.P. brass pillar taps.

each 8

b Extra for providing & fixing chrome brass low flow pillar

cock , having foam flow technology. for Item No DSR-

14.3

each 8

14.4 Providing and fixing 600x450 mm beveled edge mirror

of superior glass (of approved quality) complete with 6

mm thick hard board ground fixed to wooden cleats

with C.P. brass screws and washers complete.

each 8

193

14.5 Providing and fixing 600x120x5mm glass shelf with

edges round off supported on anodised aluminium

angle frame with C.P. brass brackets and guard rail

complete fixed with 40 mm long screws, rawl plugs etc.,

complete.

each 5

14.6 Providing and fixing toilet paper holder :

a C.P. brass each 6

14.7 Providing and fixing soil, waste and vent pipes :

a 100 mm dia.

Centrifugally cast (spun) iron socketed pipe as per IS:

3989.

metre 75

14.8 Providing and fixing M.S. holder-bat clamps of approved

design to Sand Cast iron/cast iron (spun) pipe

embedded in and including cement concrete blocks

10x10x10cm of 1:2:4 mix (1 cement : 2 coarse sand : 4

graded stone aggregate 20mm nominal size) including

cost of cutting holes and making good the walls etc. :

a For 100 mm dia. Pipe each 24

14.9 Providing and fixing bend of required degree with access

door, insertion rubber washer 3 mm thick, bolts and

nuts complete.

a 100 mm

b Sand cast iron S&S as per IS - 3989 each 5

14.1

0

Providing and fixing plain bend of required degree.

a 100 mm

Sand cast iron S&S as per IS - 3989 each 20

14.1

1

Providing and fixing heel rest sanitary bend

a 100 mm dia


14.1

2

Providing and fixing single equal plain junction of

required degree :

194

100x100x100 mm


14.1

3

Providing and fixing terminal guard:

a 100 mm


14.1

4

Providing lead caulked joints to sand cast

iron/centrifugally cast (spun) iron pipes and fittings of

diameter:

a 100 mm each 75

14.1

5

Providing and fixing M.S. stays and clamps for sand cast

iron/centrifugally cast (spun) iron pipes of diameter :

a 100 mm each 4

14.1

6

Providing and fixing trap of self cleansing design with

screwed down or hinged grating with or without vent

arm complete, including cost of cutting and making

good the walls and floors :

100 mm inlet and 100 mm outlet

a Sand cast iron S&S as per IS: 3989. each 8

14.1

7

Painting sand cast iron/ centrifugally cast (spun) iron

soil, waste vent pipes and fittings with two coats of

synthetic enamel paint of any colour such as chocolate

grey, or buff etc. over a coat of primer (of approved

quality) for new work :

a 100 mm diameter pipe metre 10

14.1

8

Providing and fixing PTMT Bottle Trap for Wash basin

and sink.

a Bottle trap 31mm single piece moulded with height of

270mm, effective length of tail pipe 260mm from the

centre of the waste coupling 77mm breadth with 25mm

minimum water seal, weighing not less than 260gms.

each 8

14.1

9

Providing and fixing PTMT liquid soap container 109mm

wide, 125mm high and 112mm distance from wall of

standard shape with bracket of the same materials with

each 8

195

snap fittings of approved quality and colour. weighing

not less than 105 gms.

14.2

0

Supply and fixing of approved make CP brass Double

Coat Hook and fixed by using CP brass counter sunk

screws etc., complete. (CAT No. 1191 N of Jaguar make

Continental Range) / Equivalent.

each 6

14.2

1

Providing and fixing 100mm dia S.S grating (with or

without hole) for , floor or Nahani trap.

each 12

14.2

2

Providing and fixing G.I floor drain consisting of

100x50mm G.I elbow (grating and G.I pipe to be paid

separately), complete as per instructions.

each 4

14.2

3

Providing and fixing G.I. pipes complete with G.I. fittings

and clamps, including cutting and making good the walls

etc.

a Internal work – Exposed on wall.

d 25 mm dia. nominal bore metre 25

c 32 mm dia. nominal bore metre 25

14.2

4

Providing and fixing G.I. Pipes complete with G.I. fittings

and clamps i/c making good the walls etc. concealed

pipe including painting with anti corrosive bitumastic

paint, cutting chases and making good the wall.

a 15 mm dia nominal bore metre 35

b 20 mm dia nominal bore metre 15

14.2

5

Providing and fixing Ball valve with hard chrome plated

ball inside PTFE (Teflon) seat & ring with chrome plated

center handle with female BSP threads complete in all

respects.

a 20 mm dia. each 4

b 25 mm dia each 2

c 32 mm dia each 5

14.2

6

Providing and fixing 45 cm long uplasticised PVC

connection pipe with brass unions :

a 15 mm nominal bore each 18

196

14.2

7

Providing and fixing C.P. brass stop cock (concealed) of

approved quality conforming to IS standards 8931.


14.2

8

Providing and fixing C.P. brass angle valve for basin

mixer and geyser points of approved quality conforming

to IS:8931

a 15mm nominal bore each 18

14.2

9

Providing and fixing hand held ablution fitting (health

faucet) with one meter long flexible tube and wall hook,

all complete of following make or equivalent ( CAT No.

ALD-573 of Jaguar ) / Equivalent.

each 6

14.3

0

Supply and fixing of 15mm CP brass 2 Way Bib Cock with

wall flange and suitable length CP brass extension pipe

all of approved make (CP fittings CAT No. CON-041 of

Jaguar – Continental Range) / Equivalent

each 6

14.3

1

Providing and fixing ball valve (brass) of approved

quality, High or low pressure, with plastic floats

complete :


14.3

2

Providing and placing on terrace (at all floor levels)

polyethylene water storage tank ISI : 12701 marked with

cover and suitable locking arrangement and making

necessary holes for inlet, outlet and overflow pipes but

without fittings and the base support for tank

litre 6000

14.3

3

Providing, laying and jointing glazed stoneware pipes

class SP-1 with stiff mixture of cement mortar in the

proportion of 1:1 (1 cement : 1 fine sand) including

testing of joints etc. complete :

a 150 mm diameter metre 25

14.3

4

Providing and laying cement concrete 1:5:10 (1 cement

: 5 coarse sand: 10 graded stone aggregate 40 mm

nominal size) all-round S.W. Pipes including bed

concrete as per standard design:

a 150 mm diameter S.W. pipe metre 25

197

14.3

5

Providing and fixing square-mouth S.W. gully trap class

SP-1 complete with C.I. grating brick masonry chamber

with water tight C.I. cover with frame of 300 x300 mm

size (inside) the weight of cover to be not less than 4.50

kg and frame to be not less than 2.70 kg as per standard

design :

a 180x150 mm size P type

b With common burnt clay F.P.S. (non modular) bricks of

class designation 7.5

each 4

14.3

6

Providing and laying non-pressure NP2 class (light duty)

R.C.C. Pipes with collars jointed with stiff mixture of

cement mortar in the proportion of 1:2 (1 cement : 2

fine sand) including testing of joints etc. complete :

a 150 mm dia. R.C.C. pipe metre 10

b 250 mm dia. R.C.C. pipe metre 90

14.3

7

Constructing brick masonry manhole in cement mortar

1:4 ( 1 cement :4 coarse sand ) with R.C.C. top slab with

1:2:4 mix (1 cement : 2 coarse sand : 4 graded stone

aggregate 20 mm nominal size),foundation concrete

1:4:8 mix (1 cement : 4 coarse sand : 8 graded stone

aggregate 40mm nominal size), inside plastering 12mm

thick with cement mortar 1:3 (1 cement : 3 coarse sand)

finished with floating coat of neat cement and making

channels in cement concrete 1:2:4 (1cement : 2 coarse

sand : 4 graded stone aggregate 20mm nominal size)

finished with a floating coat of neat cement complete as

per standard design :

14.3

8

Inside size 90x80 cm and 45 cm deep including C.I.

cover with frame (light duty) 455x610 mm internal

dimensions, total weight of cover and frame to be not

less than 38 kg (weight of cover 23 kg and weight of

frame 15 kg) :

14.3

9

With common burnt clay F.P.S. (non modular) bricks of


each 5

a Extra for depth for manholes

b Size 90x80 cm

c With common burnt clay F.P.S. (non modular) bricks of metre 0.5

198


14.4

0

Providing M.S. foot rests including fixing in manholes

with 20x20x10 cm cement concrete blocks 1:3:6 (1

cement : 3 coarse sand : 6 graded stone aggregate 20

mm nominal size) as per standard design :

a With 20x20 mm square bar each 6

14.4

1

Constructing brick masonry road gully chamber

50x45x60 cm with bricks in cement mortar 1:4 (1

cement : 4 coarse sand) including 500x450 mm pre-cast

R.C.C. horizontal grating with frame complete as per

standard design :

a With common burnt clay F.P.S. (non modular) bricks of


each 10

TOTAL (A) COST OF CIVIL & ARCHITECTURE:

199

SCHEDULE OF QTY – BSL 3 LAB (INTERIOR & CLEAN ROOM)

S

No Item Description Unit Qty. Rate Amount(Rs.)

1

False Ceiling System- Walk able Double skin

sandwich type GSS/CRCA Powder coated Metallic

ceiling panels of 0.6 mm thickness on both sides,80

mm thick PUF in-filled with 40+/-2 Kg/m3 density

insulation. Complete with Extruded aluminium

powder coated supports and hanging

arrangement, with aluminium profiles that create

uniform seams. The Partition seams are sealed by

RTV silicone with a perfectly flush finishing. PUF

insulation material is sandwiched between the two

skin layers and sealed from the exterior by the GI

frame work including all cutouts factory fitted, for

Air terminals/Diffusers and lighting etc.

Sqm. 490

2

Wall Panel System with In-built Exhaust Air Riser-

Self supported, Double skin sandwitch type

GSS/CRCA Powder coated Metallic Wall panels of

0.6 mm thickness on both sides with 100 mm thick

PUF in-filled with 40+/-2 Kg/m3 density insulation.

Complete with in-built (25mm / 32mm dia) conduit

including service panel, Aluminium / GI floor track

system, factory fitted cutouts for necessary Doors,

Windows, hatch openings for lab or process

equipment, power/communication sockets etc. In-

built Exhaust air Risers of suitable size complet

with 10 micron Filter and factory perforated

diffuser terminals (locking key arrangement for

front operation should be considered) should be

an integral part of the wall panel system.

Sqm. 820

3

Wall to Wall & Wall to Ceiling coving of R-50 mm

in PVC / Aluminium Powder coated (clip-on

type)construction, all corners should be finished

with 3-D corner profile .

Sqm. 756

4 Wall to Floor coving of radius R-50 mm in sand-

silica- epoxy . Sqm. 450

5 Clean Room Lights: Clean room compatible '0'

Leak, Light fittings with 3x36W -CFL with mirror No 78

200

optic finish reflector and taughened clear glass

bottom.

6

2 mm thick Ardex- Epoxy Flooring with self

leveling compound, primer coating and screed to

be laid on levelled floor to provide a seamless

finish and suitable for BSL 3 Laboratory

application.

Sqm. 490

8

Door System : Clean Room Doors should be

designed to fit flush into the 100 mm thick wall

panel system on both sides and are supplied in

different dimensions as per drawing. Doors are

fabtricated from GI sheets duly powder coated.

Shutter has sheet thickness of 0.8mm and the

frame of 1.2mm. Standard 50 mm panel has frame

width of 50 mm and shutter width of 46mm. Sizes

as per the requirement stated here. The following

accessories are a part of the door: , SS

ironmongery, DORMA make Model TS 68 door

closers, SS 304 D type handles of 300 mm size on

one side and Push plate fixed with D/A tape on

other side , SS 304 butt hinges, side seal &

Automatic drop seal and other accessories.Sizes

mentioned herein are total sizes including the door

frame. Emergency exit and the Main Door shall

have bottom sil as well (all doors directly opening

to atmosphere should be air leak proof type with

cam arrangement and to be tested with soup-

bouble solution during validation and testing).

8.1 Single leaf door of size : 1200(W) x 2100(H) mm No 12

8.2 Double leaf door of size : 1500(W) x 2100(H) mm No 8

8.3

Mechanical Locking CAM fitted ‘0' Leak- Single

leaf EMERGENCY Door of size : 1500(W) x 2100(H)

mm , complete with Panic Bar and other access. No 2

9

WINDOW / VIEW PANEL: Double side 6 mm Thick

Taughened Glass flashed type view pane / window.

All joints should be sealed with silicon sealant and

air tight finish.

9.1 1100(W) x 1000(H) mm Set 14

9.2 2000(W) x 1000(H) mm Set 8

201

Sub Total:

SCHEDULE OF QTY – BSL 3 LAB (INTERIOR & CLEAN ROOM)

1 Chiller:

1.1 Chiller: water cooled water chilling machine of

170 TR nominal capacity (screw chiller),

Environment Sustainability – consideration for

GWP (global warming plan) & ODP (Ozone

depletion Potential). NO STANDBY CONSIDERED.

Quoted price should be inclusive of necessary

civil and structural cost for foundation in all

respect as required

Nos 2

2 Cooling Tower:

2.1 FRP Induced draft cooling tower complete with

weather proof motor, GI ladder, hot dip

galvanized support structure, FRP basin, Flow 600

US GPM ( 36.5 deg C to 32 deg C ) WBT 28,33 deg

C . Quoted price should be inclusive of necessary


respect as required

Nos 2

3 Chilled Water Pumps:

3.1 Chilled Water Pump Capacity 400 US GPM at 35

M head (1+1) 2 set. Base mounted

Horizontal/Vertical split casing End suction.

Pumps completely factory fitted, mounted on

mild steel channel base with electric motor for

circulation of water. Pumps shall be aligned, and

suitable for 415±10% volts, 50 cycles 3 phase

power supply. One No. 3 phase isolator switch in

weather proof (IP-55) enclosure shall be provided

near each motor.Pump motor should be selected

for 1450 RPM. Quoted price should be inclusive

of necessary civil and structural cost for

foundation in all respect as required

Nos 4

4 Condenser Water Pumps:

202

4.1 Condenser Water Pump Capacity 600 US GPM at

30 M head (1+1) 2 set. Base mounted

Horizontal/Vertical split casing End suction.

Pumps completely factory fitted, mounted on

mild steel channel base with electric motor for

circulation of water. Pumps shall be aligned, and

suitable for 415±10% volts, 50 cycles 3 phase

power supply. One No. 3 phase isolator switch in

weather proof (IP-55) enclosure shall be provided

near each motor.Pump motor should be selected

for 1450 RPM. Quoted price should be inclusive



Nos 4

5 Hot Water Generator:

5.1 Horizontal Heating Element type , HOT Water

Generator (12 USGPM) complete with

temperature control valve, isolation valve, copper

piping, strainer. Temperature rise of water shall

be 10 deg C. Quoted price should be inclusive of

necessary civil and structural cost for foundation

in all respect as required

Nos 2

6 Hot Water Pumps:

6.1 Hot water pump (normal temperature 50 deg C

and maximum temperature 80 deg C / open Back

pullout type) complete with C.I. casing, Bronze

Impeller, mechanical seal, TEFC motor (IP:55),

base frame, coupling, coupling guard etc. (

1Working+1 Standby).Water flow 90 USGPM

each at 35 M Head. Quoted price should be

inclusive of necessary civil and structural cost for


Nos 4

7 Chilled WaterExpansion Tank:

7.1 Chiller water Expansion tank (PVC) for

dedicatedly (sintex 1000 Ltrs) with Make-up, over

flow and inlet connection provision with float

valve, Drain pipe with valve and connection to

piping duly insulated with aluminium foil backed

Nitrile rubber sheet/Pipe Section.

Set 2

8 Hot WaterExpansion Tank:

203

8.1 Make-up tank (for hot water generator) of HDPE

material complete with Makeup connection,

Quickfill, outlet connection, drain with valve,

overflow connection, air-vent, brass ball float

valve etc. alongwith necessary Structural

supporting arrangement and insulation as per

specification finally cladded with 28G aluminium

cladding.500 Ltr.Capacity. Quoted price should be



Set 2

9 AIR HANDLING UNITS (AHU) - Filtered & Treated

Fresh Air Supply

Modular Double skin AHU complete in

single/double tier construction with Thermal

break profile having various sections like

Aluminium Fresh air louver section with louver,

filter section, fan section, coil section and supply

air plenum etc. AHU should have pre filter, fine

filter (5 microns), Micro filter (EU9), HEPA filter

(EU13), PLUG type fan, TWIN TEFC motor with

VFD, Cooling & heating coil, moisture eliminator.

AHU should be designed for maximum 2.5m/s

face velocity on filters & coils and sections having

filters should be provided with necessary port for

measuring pressure differential with the help of

magnehelic gauge mounted over the AHU itself

for regular monitoring / maintenance of filters.

All bypass dampers should be of "TROX" make so

that pressure drop across coil & damper should

be equal for controlling the flow of air through

them. AHU should be provided service windows

of suitable width for maintenance of various

sections and inspection windows should be

provided glass panels for viewing inside the AHU.

AHU panel thickness should be 43+/-2mm

injected with PUF and sheet thickness should be

22/24 guage GI. Drain pan of all the AHUs should

be dully insulated and material of construction

should be 1mm SS304. Additional safety

accessories like Cushy foot mountings, Limits

witches for access doors, inspection lamp, Fire

proof double canvass connections (Fungal

resistant and Lint free) should also be provided

along with AHU.(Quoted price should be inclusive

204


foundation in all respect as required)

9.1 (AHU-01) S.A.FAN 2800 CFM @ 150 mm WC Set 2




10 EXHAUST AIR UNITS (EAU) - Discharge of room air

to atmosphere after treated and HEPA filtered

Modular Double skin Exhaust air Units of 23±2

mm thick PUF injected panels, Thermal break

profile with 24 gauge GI inner skin and pre-

coated GI outer skin. AHUs shall have Exhaust air

Inlet damper, filter section with Fine filter (EU9),

HEPA filter (EU 13), Fan section with DIDW

backward curved centrifugal type fan with

required capacity TWIN type TEFC motor with

VFD. All units should be provided with EU13 -

BIBO type filters and volume control damper at

Inlet and Outlet of Exhaust air Unit. Additional

safety accessories like Cushy foot mountings,

Limitswitches for access doors, inspection lamp,

Fire proof double canvass connections (Fungal

resistant and Lint free) should also be provided

along with EAU. (Quoted price should be inclusive



10.1 (EXU-01) S.A.FAN 2680 CFM @ 140 mm WC Set 2




11 CEILING MOUNTED CASSETTE TYPE TERMINAL

AIR CONDITIONER

11.1 CASSETTE AIR CONDITIONER - Cap. 2 TR

(Complete SITC including necessary CU piping,

insulation, and electrical system along with PVC

insulated drain pipe connection up to specific

Set 10

205

drain point as per layout drawing)

12 AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM

Pre-fabricated Ducting for Supply / Exhaust GI (as

per IS 277 with zinc deposition 120 gms/sqmt)

including duct supports (Epoxy painted ).

Thickness of GI sheet for various sizes shall be as

per IS 655. Ducting shall be sealed with silicon

sealant at all G.S.S. Ducting as per specification

complete with supports, nut-bolts, MS angle

Flanges, neoprene gaskets duly installed. Leak

Testing of ducts at site shall be carried out as per

SMACNA standards.

12.1 24 G Sqm 120

0

12.2 22 G Sqm 350

12.3 20 G Sqm 200

13 DUCT INSULATION:

Duct insulation with Trocellen/Armaflex make

Class "O" type, closed cell- XLPE insulation for

shaded area. All other exposed ducting should be

provided with exposed duct treatment which

includes covering the insulated duct surface with

black colour fiberglass fabric of minimum 210

gsm and thickness 0.18mm and 26G aluminum

cladding. (SR-909 adhesive to be used for fixing of

insulation material on finished duct surface after

testing)

13.1 19 mm thk for Supply / Exhaust Air duct Sqm 162

0

13.2 Extruded Aluminum supply/exhaust/Return air

double deflection 4way diffusers diffusers duly

powder coated with black matt finish aluminium

volume control damper (front operated type).

Sqm 30

13.3 Extruded Aluminium aerofoil type volume

control double deflection type damper for

ducting.

Sqm 10

206

13.4 GI Fire damper (UL 90 Rated) with fusible links

(Damper should have a limit switch and indicator

to show the open/close position) as per

specifications.(Fire damper limit switch to be

interlock with fan motor)

Sqm 8

13.5 RA Riser Grill (Open able Push fit type) in clean

area made out of Aluminium powder coated

perforated plate complete with fixing frame,

gasket, etc. with G4 filter. (Min. 80% open area)

Size: 750 mm x 350mm each

Sqm 14

13.6 Fresh air intake louvers made from 2" wide

Aluminium Extruded Louvers @ 2" pitch with

proper stiffeners complete with G-2 filters &

HDPE insect mesh fixed in a removable frame as

per approved design.

Sqm RO

14 Megnehelic Gauge with SS Box for measuring

diffrential pressure including all accessories

suitable for below mentioned capacities

14.1 '-50 to +50 Pa Set 16

14.2 0 - 50 mm Wc Set 24

15 Chilled Water - Piping, Valves & Insulation

Manifold for Chilled water coils comprising of 6

NOS. isolation valves (Butterfly) valves for sizes >

50 mm and ball valve for sizes < 40 mm), Y-

Strainer, Manual balancing valve, 3-way control

valve with modulating actuators, sensor along

with suitable cable, MS 'C' class piping up to 6

RMT length including piping consumed in making

manifold with necessary flanges, nut-bolts,

supports with PUF block as per the specification,

Dial type pressure gauge (4"dial) Range: (0 - 7

Kg/cm2) in supply & return connection of

manifold, Dial type Temperature gauge (3/8"Bulb

Dia.) Range (0 - 500C) in supply & return

connection of manifold, auto air vent & Cold

Insulation with Trocellen/Thermaflex make PE

foam insulation of suitable thickness as specified

in tender documents.

15.1 AHU 01 (Size- 50 NB) Set 2

207

15.2 AHU 02 (Size- 50 NB) Set 2

15.3 AHU 03 (Size- 80 NB) Set 2

15.4 AHU 04 (Size- 65 NB) Set 2

16 Hot Water - Piping, Valves & Insulation (Manifold)

Manifold for hot water coils comprising of 6 NOS.

isolation valves (Butterfly valves for sizes > 50

mm and ball valve for sizes < 40 mm), Y-Strainer,

Manual balancing valve, 3-way control valve with

modulating actuators, thermostat and sensor

cable, MS 'C' class piping upto 6 RMT length

including piping consumed in making manifold

with necessary flanges, nut-bolts,supports with

wooden / PUF block as per the specification, Dial

type pressure gauge (4"dial) Range: (0 - 7

Kg/cm2) in supply & return connection of

manifold, Dial typeTemperature gauge (3/8"Bulb

Dia.) Range (0 - 1000C) in supply & return

connection of manifold, auto air vent & hot

insulation with Trocellen/Thermaflex make PE

foam insulation of suitable thicknes as specified

in tender documents.

16.1 AHU 01 (Size- 25 NB) Set 2

16.2 AHU 02 (Size- 25 NB) Set 2

16.3 AHU 03 (Size- 40 NB) Set 2

16.4 AHU 04 (Size- 32 NB) Set 2

17 Piping, Valves & Insulation

MS 'C' class piping with flanges, fittings nut-

bolts,supports with Puff block etc duly installed

as per specifications. All pipes shuld be insulated

with Trocellen/Armaflex make PE foam insulation

as per thickness specified under tender

documents. All exposed piping should be cladded

with 5mil fibre cloth and finally provided with 2

coat of epoxy paint for UV protection as specified

in technical specification.

17.1 200 NB Rmt RO 0

208

17.2 150 NB Rmt 110

17.3 125 NB Rmt 76

17.4 100 NB Rmt 80

17.5 80 NB Rmt 80

17.6 65 NB Rmt 90

17.7 50 NB Rmt 65

17.8 40 NB Rmt 65

17.9 32 NB Rmt 50

17.1

0

25 NB Rmt 60

18 GI 'B' class piping with flanges, nut-

bolts,supports with Puff block etc duly installed

as per specifications (For condensate drain pipes

only) & Cold Insulation with Trocellen/Armaflex

make PE foam insulation of suitable thicknes as

specified in tender documents.

18.1 40 NB Rmt 40

18.2 65 NB Rmt 40

19 Butterfly Valve with flanges, fittings nut-

bolts,supports and insulation

19.1 150 NB Nos 24

19.2 125 NB Nos 24

19.3 80 NB Nos 18

20 Ball Valve with fittings nut-bolts, supports and

insulation

20.1 25 NB Nos 30

20.2 20 NB Nos 4

21 Balancing Valve with flanges, fittings nut-bolts,

supports and insulation

21.1 150 NB Nos 4

209

21.2 100 NB Nos 4

21.3 80 NB Nos 4

22 Y Strainer with flanges, fittings nut-bolts,


22.1 125 NB Nos 4

22.2 80 NB Nos 4

23 Pot Strainer with flanges, fittings nut-bolts,


23.1 150 NB Nos 4

24 Flexible Neoprene Expansion joints with flange

ends connections etc duly installed as per

specifications

24.1 150 NB Nos 12

24.2 125 NB Nos 12

24.3 80 NB bo 8

25 Non Return Valve (NRV) Swing wafer type, fittings

nut-bolts, supports and insulaton

25.1 150 NB Nos 4

25.2 125 NB Nos 4

25.3 80 NB Nos 4

26 Automatic air vents Set 20

27 Water flow switch Set 4

28 4" - Dial type temperature gauge (SS) with

thermowell etc dully installed as per

specifications.

Set 30

29 4"- Dial type pressure gauge (SS) with syphon &

ball valve etc dully installed as per specifications.

Set 30

SCHEDULE OF QTY – BSL 3 LAB (ELECTRICAL SYSTEM)

S No Description Unit Qty. Rate Amount (Rs.)

210

ELECTRICALS

1 MCC Panels

Fabrication Details of MCC Panels :

Design, fabrication, assembling, wiring, supply,

installation, testing and Commissioning of 3

phase 415V 4 wire Free Standing Floor mounted

compartmentalized panels made out of 14/16

SWG CRCA sheet (16SWG for partitions only and

all other parts shall be of 14 SWG and gland

plates of 10SWG). Panel shall be painted with

epoxy powder coating paint of approved shade

after undergoing seven tank process. It shall

include all switchgear as detailed below. The

panel shall consist of suitable rating TPN (Triple

Pole Neutral) aluminum bus bar with uniform

cross section through out the length (at the rating

of 0.8A/Sq.mm) supported with Dough Moulding

Compound / Sheet Moulding Compound barriers

and colour coded with heat shrinkable sleeves.

The digital meters shall be provided as standard.

The panel shall have short circuit withstanding

capacity as mentioned in the respective panel

specification. The panel shall be mounted on

channels suitable for grouting to the floor. The

earth bus shall be of aluminum & shall be

extended out side the panel on either side such

that system earth can be connected to it. The

metering & protections shall be provided as

indicated & minimum size of all indicating meters

mounted one the panel shall be 96X96mm.

Incoming feeder(s) shall be designed with

required bus bar chamber or cable alleys to

accommodate incoming cables . All out going

feeders shall be designed with adequate cable

allays to facilitate accommodation of require runs

of cables. The number of runs and size of cable

should be as required.The panels shall have

spare / vacant cubicles of minimum 2 nos.Quoted

price should be inclusive of necessary civil and

structural cost for foundation in all respect as

required

1.1 MCC Panel :

211

MCC - I Panel Consisting of : Set 2

Incoming feeders RAW POWER:

1600Amps 50KA TP&N ACB with Adjustable

Thermal Magnetic based O/C, S/C

Releases, RHOM, Extension Links & Phase

Barriers - 1No

1600 Amps TP&N Aluminium Bus Bar with Heat

Shrunkable Sleeves of size

100mm x 10mm x 2Run for both Phase and

Neutral - 1Set

0-500V, 96Sq.mm Digital Voltmeter with Selector

Switch - 1No

0-400A, 96Sq.mm Digital Ammeter with Selector

Switch - 1No

400/5, 5VA, Class-1 Current Transformer for

Ammeter reading - 3Nos

R,Y,B Led Indication Lamps with Control MCB’s -

3Nos

Incoming feeders DG:

1600Amps 50KA TP&N ACB with Adjustable



Barriers - 1No




Neutral - 1Set

0-500V, 96Sq.mm Digital Voltmeter with Selector

Switch - 1No

0-400A, 96Sq.mm Digital Ammeter with Selector

Switch - 1No

400/5, 5VA, Class-1 Current Transformer for

Ammeter reading - 3Nos

212

R,Y,B Led Indication Lamps with Control MCB’s -

3Nos

Outgoing feeders :

400Amps 36KA TP&N MCCB with Adjustable



Barriers - 5Nos




Barriers - 1Nos




Barriers - 5Nos

32A TP&N 10KA MCB "C" Curve - 4Nos

25A TP&N 10KA MCB "C" Curve - 10No

16A TP&N 10KA MCB "C" Curve - 30Nos

2 HVAC MCC - II Panel Consisting of : Sets 2

Incoming feeders :




Barriers - 1No




Neutral - 1Set

Outgoing feeders :

32 A / 16A TP&N 10KA MCB "C" Curve -12Nos

16A / 6A SP 10KA MCB "C" Curve - 20Nos

213

3 UPS MCC - III Panel Consisting of : Sets 2

Incoming feeders :




Barriers - 1No




Neutral - 1Set

Outgoing feeders :

16A TP&N 10KA MCB "C" Curve -12Nos

6A SP 10KA MCB "C" Curve - 20Nos

4 POWER DISTRIBUTION BOARDS (PDB) Sets 6

24 Way PDB shall be Surface mounting, segment

type with metalic door.

Supply, installation, testing & commissioning of

415V, TPN MCB Distribution Boards with Cu. Bus

bars for phases & neutral.

Incoming

63A, 10kA,TPN MCB - 1 No.

Outgoing

63A,DP 10kA MCB - 2nos

25A SPN 10kA MCB - 5nos



5 12 / 24 Way PDB shall be Surface mounting,

segment type with metalic door.

Sets 4



bars for phases & neutral

214

Incoming


Outgoing





6 LIGHTING DISTRIBUTION BOARD with timer for

pre=defined power off mode

Sets 2

12 / 24 Way LDB shall be Surface mounting,





Incoming

16A, 10kA,4P 300mA ELCB - 1 No.

Outgoing



12 / 24 Way PDB shall be Surface mounting,





Incoming


Outgoing




215


7 UPS POWER DISTRIBUTION BOARDS Sets 2

UPS DB shall be Surface mounting, segment type

with metalic door.

For all critical lab equipments and critical HVAC

system components




Incoming


Outgoing





8 UPS LIGHTING POWER DISTRIBUTION BOARD Sets 2

UPS Lighting DB shall be Surface mounting,

segment type with metalic door. (4 Way)

For 30% of BSL lab floor lighting system




16A, 10kA,4P 300mA ELCB - 1 No.

Outgoing



9 CABLES

SITC of the following 1100 volts grade XLPE

insulated, armoured, sheathed aluminum

conductor power and control cables to be laid on

216

cable trays. It shall also include dressing &

clamping of the cables as mentioned in the

specifications.

9.1 4C X185 Sqmm Al. Ar. Cable Mtr 600

9.2 3.5C X50 Sqmm Al. Ar. Cable Mtr 600

9.2 3.5C X25Sqmm Al. Ar. Cable Mtr 300

9.4 4C X10Sqmm Al. Ar. Cable Mtr 300

9.5 3.5C X95 Sqmm Al. Ar. Cable Mtr 100

10 CABLES TERMINATION

Supply & Installation of single compression/PG

cable gland of approved make and crimping &

Termination of cable leads to the equipment with

proper sized zinc passivated nut bolts along with

spring & Plain washers

10.1 4C X185Sqmm Al. Ar. Cable Sets 16

10.2 3.5C X50Sqmm Al. Ar. Cable Sets 60

10.3 3.5C X25Sqmm Al. Ar. Cable Sets 60

10.4 4C X10Sqmm Al. Ar. Cable Sets 20

10.5 3.5C X95 Sqmm Al. Ar. Cable Sets 20

11 POWER WIRING - (Flexible FRLS)

SITC of 1100 V grade 3, 4, 5 core PVC insulated,

PVC sheathed, copper conductor cables drawn in

16swg rigid MS conduit / wire ways / wall ducts /

Cable trays / SS pipe droppers. Cable identifying

tags made of aluminium strips with engraved

lettering shall be tied to cables on either end with

cable ties.

11.1 3C X 6 Sq.mm, PVC insulated, FRLS, Cu.Flx.Cable Mtr 200

11.2 3C X 4 Sq.mm, PVC insulated, FRLS, Cu.Flx.Cable Mtr 400

11.3 3C X 2.5 Sq.mm, PVC insulated, FRLS, Cu.Flx.Cable Mtr 600

11.4 4C X 2.5 Sq.mm, PVC insulated, FRLS, Cu.Flx.Cable Mtr 110

0

217

11.5 4C x 4 Sq.mm, PVC insulated, FRLS, Cu.Flx.Cable Mtr 450





12 Cables End Terminations (Flexible Cable):

SITC of double compression/PG cable gland,

solder less lugs of approved make and crimping &

Termination of cable leads to the equipment with

proper sized zinc passivated nut bolts along with

spring & plain washers

12.1 3C X 6 Sq.mm, PVC insulated, FRLS, Cu.Flx.Cable Sets 8

12.2 3C X 4 Sq.mm, PVC insulated, FRLS, Cu.Flx.Cable Sets 20

12.3 3C X 2.5 Sq.mm, PVC insulated, FRLS, Cu.Flx.Cable Sets 20

12.4 4C X 2.5 Sq.mm, PVC insulated, FRLS, Cu.Flx.Cable Sets 60

12.5 4C x 4 Sq.mm, PVC insulated, FRLS, Cu.Flx.Cable Sets 40




13 CABLE TRAY

SITC of GI cable tray made of 2 mm thick sheet

steel with a minimum of 3 rungs per meter run of

tray and 50mm side plates and GI Earth flat on

both sides (with galvanizing thickness of

minimum 75 microns) , With factory made " T "

Joints & Bends etc. No Site welding

13.1 300mm X 50mm width cable tray Mtr 80




218


14 PVC Wire Ways

PVC WIRE WAYS with Ventilation slots at the side

14.1 PVC Table Top/Skirting/Dado Trunking - 200 x 50

mm with 3 nos cable retainers per Mtr of

Horizontal length

Mtr 1



Horizontal length

Mtr 1



Horizontal length

Mtr 1



Horizontal length

Mtr 1

15 Point Wiring - Lighting

Supply & fixing of switches, moduler boxes, press

fit reinforced moulded plastic flush plates.

Note :

The electrical contractor shall wire the light

fixtures in single, two lights or three lights

configuration and wire it up to the switches and

to the lighting DB located above the false ceiling,

on the service floor. It must also be noted that

the max. no. of points that may be considered for

one circuit shall be nine points or 700 watts.

15.1 1 light pt. Controlled by 6A switch. Sets 60

15.2 2 light pts. Controlled by 6A switch. Sets 20



15.5 6 to 9 light pts. Controlled by 6A switch. Sets 1

15.6 Two Way Switch Sets 1

15.7 One light pt. Controlled by two way 6A switch. Sets 1

219

15.8 Two light pts. Controlled by two way 6A switch. Sets 1

16 SITC of Master switch control panel made in

16SWG epoxy powder coated CRCA sheet

encloser with contactors of 16A rating(3 phase &

Neutral) and that the coil shall be suitable for

230V AC single phase, fully wired.The control

panel shall be provided with a switch of 6A rating

and wired in such a way that switching On & OFF

of this switch shall energise or de-energise the

contactor coil. When the contactor is energised ,

3phase supply will be made available to lighting

DB.

Sets 2

17 Clean Room Sockets

3Module 1 Socket, 1 Switch assembly with SS304

front plate

17.1 6/16A, 1 Ph, 6 pin (commercial) socket (RAW) Nos 60

17.2 6/16A, 1 Ph, 6 pin (commercial) socket (UPS) Nos 60

17.3 6A, 1 Ph, 3 pin (RAW) Nos 30

17.4 6A, 1 Ph, 3 pin (UPS) Nos 30

18 6Module 2 Socket, 2 Switch assembly with SS304

front plate

18.1 6/16A, 1 Ph, 6 pin (commercial) socket

(RAW+RAW)

Nos 40

18.2 6A, 1 Ph, 3 pin (RAW+UPS) Nos 40

18.3 6A, 1 Ph, 3 pin (RAW+RAW) Nos 30

18.4 6A, 1 Ph, 3 pin (UPS+UPS) Nos 30

19 Industrial Sockets

19.1 63A, 3 Ph. 5 pin Industrial receptacle with spring

loaded cover and On/OFF control.(IP55) (RAW)

Nos 40


loaded cover and On/OFF control.(IP55) (Clean

Room Socket)(RAW)

Nos 20

20 6Module 2 Socket, 2 Switch assembly with press

fit reinforced moulded plastic flush plates

220

20.1 6/16A, 1 Ph, 6 pin (commercial) socket

(RAW+RAW)

Nos 1

20.2 6A, 1 Ph, 3 pin (RAW+UPS) Nos 1

20.3 6A, 1 Ph, 3 pin (RAW+RAW) Nos 1

20.4 6A, 1 Ph, 3 pin (UPS+UPS) Nos 1

21 Industrial Sockets



Room Socket)(RAW)

Nos 4



Room Socket)(RAW)

Nos 8


loaded cover and On/OFF control.(IP55) (Non

Clean Room Socket)(Raw)

Nos 4


loaded cover and On/OFF control.(IP55) (Non

Clean Room Socket)(Raw)

Nos 2

22 Light Fixtures:

Clean room fixture : Supply, installation, testing &

commissioning of following fixtures with

electronic ballast complete with accessories and

lamps. The luminaries should be totally enclosed

and also thermo cycling should be maintained to

enhance life of control gear. The material of

construction and surface treatment should be

non corrosive. Bottom frame of the clean room

fittings shall be of SS 304. The light fittings should

have toughened glass diffuser. Sample fittings

shall be supplied for approval.

22.1 Top/Bottom opening 3x36W CFL Fixture of size

600 x 600 mm (Approx.) recess mounting type

with clear acrylic diffuser is sealed with bottom

frame and non-hygroscopic VHB gasket along

with lamp.

Nos 78

23 Non Clean Room light fixture :

221

23.1 Bottom opening maintenance 2x36W CFL Fixture

of size 600 x 300 mm (Approx.) recess mounting

type, with acrylic diffuser(Garment Preparation

Area)

Nos. 20

23.2 Surface mounted Luminaire with non-yellowing

acrylic diffuser suitable for 2 x36W FTL of size 4

feet( AHU Service Area) (Terrace and AHU Service

Area)

Nos. 36

24 Telephone ,Data & Video Socket points.

Telephone and Data supply, installation, testing

and commissioning of the following items.

24.1 2 pair x 0.5 mm telephone cable in conduit from

the TTB to the telephone outlet.

m 400

24.2 50 pair armoured jelly filled Telephone cable m 1

24.3 30 pair armoured jelly filled Telephone cable m 1

24.4 Sub Distribution Box (30 Pair) nos 2

24.5 Telephone instruments ( Wall mounting Type) nos 12

24.6 Telephone instruments (Polycom/Stentofon) nos 6

24.7 Single module with Telephone socket and face

plate & hardware

nos 18

24.8 Single module with Video socket and face plate &

hardware

nos 10

24.9 Single module with Data socket and face plate &

hardware

nos 24

24.1

0

Suitable telephone Junction Box with accessories

to connect main incoming cable from central

server and distribution onward to internal

communication network in BSL 3 lab facility

building

Sets 2

24.1

1

RJ45,cat 6 Data cable m 100

0

25 Earthing:

Power and Control Earthing System

222

25.1 SITC of CU Earth Electrode Plate type - 600x600

mm x 3 mm thk. Earthing complete with

Perforated GI 40 dia pipe for watering, necessary

salt, charcole, Reducer-funnel and CI cover

arrangement complete with necessary civil work

for formation of Earth-Pit (minimum 3 Mtr deep

under-ground excavation)

Sets 10

25.2 SITC of CU Earth Electrode Plate type - 600x600

mm x 6 mm thk. Earthing complete with

Perforated GI 40 dia pipe for watering, necessary

salt, charcole, Reducer-funnel and CI cover

arrangement complete with necessary civil work

for formation of Earth-Pit (minimum 3 Mtr deep

under-ground excavation)

Sets 8

Supply, laying & installation of GI/Cu Flat earthing

strip on walls/ floor (it shall be secured properly,

joining of the two strips shall be either by welding

or by bolting with overlapping of the length,

double the width of the strip). In case joining is

done by nut bolting minimum two nut bolts shall

be used at the joints. Tapping (earthing) stations

shall be made wherever required (near to

equipments)

25.3 size 50 x 6 mm GI Mtr 150

25.4 size 25 x 5 mm Cu Mtr 450

26 Supply & installation of Cu Wire for earthing of

small equipments to be laid as per standard

practices including nuts & Bolts etc..

26.1 8 SWG Cu Mtr 400

26.2 10 SWG GI Mtr 110

26.3 12 SWG GI Mtr 100

26.4 14 SWG GI Mtr 100

27 Variable frequency Drive (VFD)

Low voltage AC Drives – IP 54

27.1 3.7 Kw/4P Nos 2

27.2 5.5 Kw/4P Nos 4

223

27.3 7.5 Kw/4P Nos 2

28 30.0KVA HγP Series Online UPS System with SMF

Battery for approx. 20-25 Minutes Battery

Backup. Providing, Installation, Testing &

Commissioning of Batteries complete with

standard accessories as required. Input-

3f/Output-3f with Isolation Transformer. INPUT

VOLTAGE f-f,380/400/415VAC-20%+15%.

OUTPUT VOLTAGE 380/400/415VAC ± 1%. ( 2 W +

1S) - UPS system should be inclusive of automatic

change-over mechanism in-built type

Nos 3

Sub Total:

SCHEDULE OF QTY – BSL 3 LAB (BMS & Security SYSTEM)

S No Item Description Unit Qty. Rate Amount(Rs.)

1 Building Management System envisaged to

monitor and control of HVAC System, Life Safety

System (LSS) which consist of Surveillance System

(CCTV), Fire Detection & Fire Monitoring, Fire

Clean Gas Suppression System (For BSL 3 lab area

only) & Water Sprinkler suppression system for

all other facility area System (FAS), and Access

Control System

Following are the sub-systems shall be monitor

and control from BMS system:

Heating Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC)

Monitoring & Control.

Integration of BMS with Access Control, Fire

Alarm system, CCTV,

"DETAILED SPECIFICATION AS FOLLOWS":

Sets 2

Control and monitoring:

In BMS Software Auto / Manual Logic selection:

In Auto Mode Exhaust &

AHU Motor commands are as per Logic

Sequence; in Manual Mode All Commands has to

be on with override commands.

In Filed Auto mode, HVAC Equipment shall be

switched on or switched off from the control

room BMS computer. In manual mode, it shall be

224

switched on/off through the Start / Stop Push

Button provided in field / from respective panel.

BMS shall indicate the on/off and Trip status and

generate the fault reports and gives the print

For maintain the Negative Pressure in LAB; Fist

Exhaust Fan Motor will get On then only Supply

Air Fan Motor will get On.

Always Exhaust VFD Speed is More than Supply

VFD for maintain the Negative Pressure

BMS shall receive input from the Fire alarm

system through the potential free contacts

provided at fire alarm panel and on fire; it shall

trip the concerned HVAC / AHUs.

BMS shall continuously record the LAB room data

Temperature, Humidity and All Rooms pressure.

If Temp is Less than Temp Set point (or) Humidity

is more than Set point then BMS system logic will

switch on the Heater which that particular AHU

is running

With Respective of LAB Room Pressure Exhaust

VFD modulate the Frequency

System Structure

The BMS consist of Work Station, Network

control module, DDC panel and filed primary

sensing devices.

Autonomous Local Networks, Capable of

connecting networked devices and points. Able to

support any number of user terminals, either

LAN, or locally connected.

The structure of the BMS shall have

manufacturers standalone intelligent outstation

controllers, networked to communicate with

each other and with the operation terminal.

System devices shall have the capability to

communicate via the network, to send alarms,

monitor or control data and provide information

on a request or send basis. The receiving device

225

shall acknowledge a message, if not

acknowledged, the sender shall repeat the

message after a predefined time interval.

Control and Monitoring Configuration

The standard software residing in ROM

(firmware) at the outstations shall be structured

so that the users without computer programming

knowledge can configure and modify the control

and monitoring strategies. Engineer’s utility

program shall enable the engineer via a high level

of password access to add/edit the strategies.

Analog input scaling and parameter

identification, high/low limit alarm levels with

adjustable time hysteretic and signal

linearization.

Manual overrides ON/OFF and adjustments of

set points and analogue constants.

Mathematical operations including,

multiplication, division, square root, average,

maximum, minimum, greater/less than, and

logarithmic calculations and shall typically be

capable of calculating efficiency, mass flow and

enthalpy.

Logic, AND, OR NAND, NOR functions.

Date/ Time and Timer operations

Control Functions:

Control function modules incorporating

proportional, integral and derivative action and

having manual override to set a default output.

Output switching to raise/lower, analogue, time

proportion and binary switch actuators.

Adjustments shall be available to change

hysteretic, response speed and max/min levels

and signal inversion.

Alarm history file, used for local fault finding,

shall include all plant and system alarm records.

Alarms shall be generated for variables exceeding

226

set limits.

Trend logs to record direct or calculated

analogue values like temperature, Humidity and

Pressure values can be recorded at intervals

ranging from one second up to Daily readings. A

chart of all trend logs currently recording shall be

available.

System Software:

The software HVAC Package should include

minimum of the software tools for system

management and maintenance

Software tools to allow the audit of the complete

controls strategies and algorithms and identify

changes when compared to original/back-up

configuration.

Software tools to allow full backup of the system

and restoring the backup in later stage.

Maintenance management tool to allow PID

control loops to be manually/automatically

returned /optimized for maximum controllability.

All the basic features are made available to the

user (subject to security password level)

All communications between the user and the

system is in clear languages, without reference to

special code or codes.

Password Access:

None of the features of the BMS terminal

accessible without the user first being required to

log on by entering a password.

Both name and alphanumeric passwords of up to

8 characters unique to identified user for

required to log on to the system:

User defining authorities available with Admin

User only.

Graphical Interface:

227

A graphical event based interface shall be

included and be an integral part of the standard

operating software.

The displays utilize a minimum of 16bit colors

with the facility for shading and have a minimum

resolution or 800 x 600 pixels.

It’s possible for the user to create new

schematics or modify existing ones while the

terminal is on line.

A library of standard symbols representing fans,

pumps, valves, etc., shall be provided for use

when creating new schematics.

Display:

It’s possible to allocate and display a schematic

diagram at any and every level of the system

structure, e.g. building, plant zone and point.

It’s possible to manually override the state or

value of point or return it to its automatic state

directly from the schematic diagram. This

accomplished by the use of a mouse by pointing

at a plant symbol and clicking. This produces a

menu from which the desired function may be

selected.

It’s possible to represent measured values as

symbols rather that text, which change according

to the measured value. Where text is used it shall

utilize engineering values such as temp 21.2 ° C.

It’s possible to allocate areas of the graphic,

which flash in the event of an alarm occurring. In

the event of a critical alarm then the symbol it

self flash and in the event of a non-critical alarm

then a boarder surrounding the symbol shall

flash.

A “print” function is providing which will enable a

hard copy of the screen display to be made. It’s

possible to select main display and /or sub-

display for printing.

It’s possible to create graphic backgrounds from

228

the following sources.

Custom draw background using the supplier

editor

Digital cameras

Scanned in photographs

Architects schematic drawings from Auto CAD

file format

Flow Chart diagrams detailing data flow

Any file saved as a Bitmap format.

Data Logging:

It shall be possible to log the status or value of

system points at regular intervals or on change of

state or change greater than a predefined value

and store these on hard disk at any of the user

terminals.

Following the selection of points to be logged in

the file it’s possible to select either timed

interval, change of state, alarms or reports.

Timed interval logs: log at a specified time

interval (sample interval form 1 second upwards);

Trend view option is available in Text format in

tabular form, Line Graphic mode, and Bar Graph

mode.

Alarms: Creating new alarms with priority level,

with acknowledgement; Auto print option is

available.

User Programmable Software:

The systems have flexible software HVAC

Package to allow the user with minim knowledge

of software programming to construct unique

programs for plant control and management

information.

The system provide run simulation of the

programs to allow user verification before the

program is transmitted to the outstation

229

controller

Arithmetic, Comparison, Logic operations shall

be available for user in the programs as required

e.g. +, -, /, *, %, : =, >,<=, <, AND, OR, NOR, XOR

It’s possible to refer to time and calendar

functions directly such that DATE, TIME, HOUR,

MINUTE functions may be used.

It’s possible to use such syntax as ABS (absolute

value), SQRT (square root), INT (integer), FRAC

(fraction), Near INT (nearest integer), MAX

(maximum), AVG (average), ENTHALPY

(temperature, humidity points), LOG (logarithm)

etc.

Integrated Control:

The system capable of performing proportional

control, integral control, derivative control or any

combination of the three utilizing direct digital

control techniques.

The primary input to a control loop shall be

either a measured value (0 C, %RH, etc.) or

calculated value.

The set point of any control loop shall be capable

of being adjusted by time, event or as a result of

a calculation.

It shall be possible to reference a number of

control loops to the same primary input point to

achieve multi stage control.

Report Generation:

Standard reports shall be provided which shall be

operator selectable to appear on the operator

station, any selected printer or on both.

Facility to be provided to allow the operator to

stop any report in the process being printed.

All the reports shall be capable of being

scheduled to run at a specific time and/or interval

via an operator function supported by necessary

230

data entry templates and interactive messages.

A custom report capability should be provided to

allow the user to format reports of any mix of

text, points with status / value and descriptions,

and with points with status / value only.

Dynamic Trending:

Dynamic trends provide and show the real time

activity of the associated points in a single

window.

The information prints and/or displays in

numeric, bar chart, curve plot, pie chart etc. as

selected by the operator.

Graphic plots shall allow a unique color for each

point. As new values are sampled, they shall be

processed, scaled, and dynamically appended to

any plot displayed. Sample interval of points

selected for dynamic trend shall be user

selectable from one second to 30 minutes.

Display window shall have a horizontal scroll bar

and selectable time periods to display.

History Trending:

It’s possible to assign historic trending to the

points and this trend data store on the fixed hard

disk and it’s possible to display the history data

both in text form as well as graphic formats.

Each point trend file has user assignable selected

duration of a day, a week, a month, or a year.

It’s possible to present the display values in a

spreadsheet (Microsoft Excel) format.

It’s possible to exercise any other standard

spreadsheet; data manipulation options to create

report based custom applications, etc.

2 Surveillance System (CCTV) Set of 8 nos IP based

ceiling mounted dome type cameras complete

with DVR arrangement compatible with central

BMS system

Set 2

231

3 Access control with 2 - Door x 2 sets, Interlock

system complete including Electromagnetic Strike

lock unit + Egress Button and 20 nos Access

Proximity cards reader data-loger (compatible

with central BMS system)

Set 2

Sub Total:

SCHEDULE OF QTY – BSL 3 LAB FIRE ONLY (CLEAN GAS 'NOVAC' SUPPRESSION SYSTEM)


1 Novec 1230, CCOE Approved 120.0 Ltrs. Cylinder

(Quoted price should be inclusive of necessary


respect as required)

Nos. 6

2 Valve Assembly and arrangement for Supervisory

Switch connection for monitoring cylinder

pressure, a pressure gauge with a safety burst

disc and safety cap.

Nos. 6

3 Novec 1230 manufactured by 3M, with Zero

Ozone Depeltion Potential and Very Low Global

Warming Potential of 1 with 20 Years Blue Sky

Warantee against any regulatory Bans and

Restrictions.

Kgs. 594

4 Master Cylinder Kit complete comprises of

Electric Control Head operated electrically from

the detection and control system or locally with a

manual actuator, complete with cylinder

supervisory switch.

Nos. 2

5 Manual Actuator Assembly complete with

Flexible Interconnecting Hose, liver and manual

pull station to activate the system manually.

Nos. 2

6 Wire Braided Flexible Rubber Hose with Elbow

and connectors complete assembly to Connect

Novec 1230 Cylinder Assembly Discharge outlet

with Discharge Pipe or Discharge Manifold.

Nos. 2

7 Warning Signs and Plates for Inside Room and

Outside Room application.

Nos. 2

232

8 Beta Primary Slave Completer Kit complete

comprises of Pneumatic Actuating Valve operated

pneumatically from the master cylinder discharge

pressure , Flexible Interconnecting Hose.

Complete with cylinder supervisory switch.

Nos. 4

9 Beta Manifold Check Valve for Non Return

arrangement of FM 200 Gas after discharge back

into cylinder.

Nos. 4

10 Discharge Nozzles to Discharge Novec 1230 Gas

in the Hazard Area as hydraulic calculation and

flow rate required in 180 Deg/360 Deg Discharge

Pattern.

Nos. 18

11 Cylinder Bracket No. 6

12 Supply, installation,testing& commisioning

of M.S. seamless pipe as per ASTM A 106 Sch. 40

with nescessary fittings like

tees,bends,etc.inclusive of supports

Grade complete in all respec of follows sizes.

12.1 a) 80 mm dia. mtr 12

12.2 b) 40 mm dia. mtr 25

12.3 c) 25 mm dia. mtr 25

12.4 d) 20 mm dia. mtr 12

13 Supply, installation, testing & commissioning

of Manifold 1 way suitable for ( to be mounted on

GI metal structure ) : 1 cylinder etc as required..

Nos. 2

14 Supply, installation, testing & commissioning Gas

Release Module, complete with all necessary

accessories , etc as required

Nos. 8

15 Supply, installation, testing& commisioning of 2

Zone Fire Alarm Control Panel with battery etc,

complete as required

Nos. 2

16 Supply, installation,testing& commisioning of

Manual Gas Release Switch Complete as

required.

Nos. 2


Manual Gas Abort Switch Complete as required.

Nos. 2

233

18 Supplying & Laying of 2X1.5 Sq mm Armoured

Copper Cable complete with saddle & fittings as

required.

mtr 200


Optical Smoke Detectors with base, complete as

required

Nos. 28

Sub Total:

FIRE SYSTEM – ALL AREA EXCEPT BSL 3 LAB (WATER TYPE FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM)


1 SUBHEAD - I, "FIRE PUMPS AND

ACCESSORIES" (Quoted price should be inclusive



1.1 Supplying, Installation, Testing and

Commissioning of electric driven main fire pump

suitable for automatic operation and consisting

of following: complete in all respect as reruired.

Set 1

1.2 Horizontal type, multistage, centrifugal, spilt

casing pump of cast iron body & bronze impeller

with stainless steel shaft, mechanical seal to

ensure a minimum pressure of 3.5 kg/sq. cm. at

highest and farthest outlet at specified flow of

2850 lpm at 90 m. head conforming to IS 1520.

1.3 Suitable HP SQ cage induction motor, TEFC,

Synchronous speed 1500 RPM, suitable for

opertion on 415 volts, 3 phase 50 Hz. AC with

IP 55 class protection for 50 Hz. AC with IP 55

class protection for enclosure, horizontal foot

mounted type with Class - 'F' insulation,

conforming to IS-325.

1.4 M.S. fabricated Common base plate, coupling,

coupling guard, foundation bolts etc. as

required.

1.5 Suitable cement concrete foundation duly

plastered with anti vibration pads.

234

2 Supplying, Installation, Testing and

Commissioning of electric driven sprinkler pump


of following: complete in all respect as required.

Set 1



with stainless steel shaft, mechanical seal to

ensure a minimum pressure of 3.5 kg/sq. cm. at

highest and farthest outlet at specified flow of

2850 lpm at 90 m. head conforming to IS 1520.

2.2 Suitable HP SQ cage induction motor, TEFC,

Synchronous speed 1500 RPM, suitable for

opertion on 415 volts, 3 phase 50 Hz. AC with

IP 55 class protection for enclosure, horizontal

foot mounted type with Class - 'F' insulation,

conforming to IS-325.



required.




Commissioning of diesel engine driven main

fire pump suitable for automatic operation and

consisting of following: complete in all respect as

required.

Set 1

3.1 Horizontal type, multistage, centrifugal, pump

of cast iron body and bronze impeller with

stainless steel shaft, mechanical seal to ensure a

minimum pressure of 3.5 kg/sq. cm at highest

and farthest outlet at specified flow of 2850

lpm at 90 m. head conforming to IS 1520.

3.2 Suitable HP, 1500 RPM water cooled with

radiator, diesel engine conforming to relevant BS

& IS standard complete with auto starting

mechanism, 12/24 volts electric starting

equipment, lead acid battery with battery stand,

exhaust pipe extended upto terrace level 20 mtr

outside pump house duly insulated with 50 mm

thick glass wool with 1.0 mm. thick aluminium

235

sheet cladding, residential silencer, instruments

and protection as per specification, stop solenoid

for auto stop in the event of fault with audio

indications, painted with post office red

colour etc. as required.

3.3 One 200 Ltr capacity day oil storage tank

fabricated from 3 mm thick M.S. plates. Tank

shall be provided with inlet, outlet, overflow, air

vent, drain connections, filling connection & level

indicator. Tank shall be mounted on a suitable

steel structure (Painted with 2 coats of red oxide

paint). Tank shall be provided with two or more

coats of synthetic enamel paint outside over

two coats of red oxide primer.

3.4 M.S. Fabricated Common base plate, coupling,


required.




Commissioning of electric driven Jockey Pump



Set 1

4.1 Horizontal type, multistage, centrifugal, pump

of cast iron body and bronze impeller with

stainless steel shaft, mechanical seal at specified

flow of 500 lpm at 90 m. head conforming to IS:

1520.

4.2 Suitable HP Squirrel cage induction motor TEFC

type suitable for operation on 415 volts, 3

phase 50 Hz. AC with IP 55 Class of protection for

enclosure, horizontal foot mounted type with

Class F' insulation, conforming to IS : 325.


coupling guard, foundtion bolts etc.




Commissioning of electric driven terrace pump

Set 1

236





with stainless steel shaft, mechanical seal and

flow of 900 lpm at 30 m. head confirming to IS :

1520.

5.2 Suitable HP SQ cage induction motor TEFC

type suitable for operation on 415 volts, 3

phase 50 Hz. AC supply with IP 55 Class of

protection for enclosure, horizontal foot

mounted type with Class F' insulation,

conforming to IS : 325.



required.


plastered with anti variable pads.

6 SUBHEAD - II, "FIRE HYDRANT/ AUTOMATIC

SPRINKLER SYSTEM"

Suction / Delivery Header and Interconnectivity

Pipe for Pump:

6.1 Providing, laying, testing & commissioning of 'C'

class heavy duty MS Pipe conforming to IS

1239/3589 i/c fittings like elbows, tees, flanges,

tapers, nuts bolts, gaskets etc., fixing the pipe

on the surface and providing support, painting

with two or more coats of synthetic enamel paint

of required shade complete as required.

a 300 mm dia (6.35mm thick) mtr 22

b 200 mm dia (6.35mm thick) mtr 40

c 150 mm dia mtr 20

d 100 mm dia mtr 10

7 Providing, laying, testing & commissioning of 'C'

class heavy duty MS Pipe conforming to IS 1239

i/c fittings like elbows, tees, flanges, tapers, nuts

bolts, gaskets etc., in ground including excavation

237

and providing cement concrete blocks as support,

anticorrosive treatment with asphalt tape as per

IS 10221, refilling the trench etc. of following

sizes complete as required.

a 150 mm dia mtr 450

8 Providing, laying, testing & commissioning of 'C'

class heavy duty M.S. Pipe conforming to IS 3589

and 1239 including fittings like elbows, tees,

flanges, tapers, nuts, bolts, gaskets etc.fixing the

pipe on the wall/ ceiling with suitable clamps and

printing with two or more coats of synthetic

enamel paint of required shade complete as

required.

a 150 mm dia mtr 140

b 100 mm dia mtr 190

c 80 mm dia mtr 90

d 65 mm dia mtr 300

e 50 mm dia mtr 205

f 40 mm dia mtr 175

g 32 mm dia mtr 175

h 25 mm dia mtr 6

9 G.I. Suction / Delivery Header and

Interconnectivity Pipe for Sump Pump:


G.I. Pipes Class 'C' conforming to I.S. 1239

(Heavy grade) with G.I. Fittings conforming to IS

: 1879 such as tees, crosses, plugh, socket,

elbows, reducers, flange, check nut, flanges &

clamps, hanger, structural steel supports as

required/directed at Site including cutting and

making good the same etc. complete.

a 65 mm dia mtr 12

b 50 mm dia mtr 12

c 40 mm dia mtr 8

238

10 Supplying and fixing single headed internal

hydrant valve with instantaneous Gun metal

couplings of 63 mm dia with cast iron wheel ISI

marked conforming to IS 5290 (Type - A) with

blank Gun metal cap and chain as required.

Nos. 8

11 Supplying and fixing single headed external

yard hydrant valve with 1 No. 63mm dia

instantaneous FM Gun metal coupling and cast

iron wheel, ISI marked conforming to IS 5290

(Type - A) with blank Gun metal cap and chain as

required.

Nos. 12

12 Supplying, fixing, testing and commissioning of

butterfly valve PN 16 with CI Body, Epoxy

coated Disc duly ISI marked complete with Nuts,

Bolts, Washers, Gaskets, conforming to IS 13095,

of following sizes as required.

12.1 200 mm dia Nos. 5

12.2 150 mm dia Nos. 10

12.3 100 mm dia Nos. 6

13 Supplying and fixing orifice plate made of 6 mm.

thick stainless steel with orifice of required size in

between flange and landing valve of internal

hydrant to reduce pressure to working pressure

of 3.5 kg/cm2 complete as per specifications as

required.

Nos. 32

14 Providing, installation, testing and commissioning

of dual plate wafer type non- return valve PN 16

of CI body of following sizes confirming to IS:

5312 complete with rubber gasket, GI bolts, nuts,

washers etc. as required.

a 200 mm dia Nos. 1

b 150 mm dia Nos. 5

c 100 mm dia Nos. 2

15 Providing and fixing gun metal gate valve

confirming to IS : 778 with C.I. wheel of

approved quality (screwed end) :

239

a 40 mm nominal bore Nos. 9

b 50 mm nominal bore Nos. 3

16 Providing and fixing gun metal non- return valve

confirming to IS : 778 or approved quality

(screwed end) :

a 40 mm nominal bore Nos. 6

17 Supplying and fixing 63 mm dia, 15 mtr. long RRL

hose pipe with 63 mm dia Male and Female Gun

metal couplings duly binded with GI wire, rivets

etc. conforming to IS 636 (type-A) as required.

Nos. 22

18 Supplying and fixing First-Aid Hose Reel with

MS construction spray painted in Post Office Red,

conforming to IS 884 with upto date

amendments, complete with the following

as required.

a a) 30 m. long 20 mm (nominal internal) dia water

hose Thermoplastic (textile reinforced) Type - 2

as per IS: 12585

b b) 20 mm (nominal internal) dia gun metal shut

off nozzle.

c c) Drum and brackets for fixing the

equipments on wall.

d d) Connections from riser with 40 mm dia stop

valve (gun metal) and M.S. Pipe.

Nos. 11

19 Supplying and fixing of hose cabinet of size 750

mm x 600 mm x 250 mm made of 2 mm thick MS

sheet with 6 mm thick glazed glass doors i/c

necessary locking arrangement suitable to

accommodate external hydrant with butterfly

valve, 2 Nos. 15 mtr. long Hose pipe, 1No. branch

pipe, mounted on wall OR raised brick platform

and duly painted with Post Office red externally

and white internally with synthetic enamel

paint complete in all respect, for external

hydrant, as required.

Nos. 21

20 Supplying and fixing 63 mm dia Gun metal branch

pipe with 20 mm (nominal internal diameter) size

Gun metal nozzle conforming to IS 903, suitable

Nos. 11

240

for instantaneous connection to inter connect

hose pipe coupling as required.

21 Supplying and fixing 4 way fire brigade

connection of cast iron body with 4 Nos. Gun

metal male instantaneous inlet couplings

complete with cap and chain as required for 150

mm dia MS pipe connection, conforming to IS 904

as required. (For inlet connection )

Nos. 1

22 Supplying and fixing 2way fire brigade connection

of cast iron body with 2 Nos. Gun metal male

instantaneous inlet couplings complete with cap

and chain as required for 150 mm dia MS pipe

connection, conforming to IS 904 as required.

(For draw out connection )

Nos. 1

23 Supplying and fixing air vessel made of 250 mm

dia, 8 mm thick MS sheet, 1200 mm. in height

with air release valve on top and flanged

connection to riser, drain arrangement with 25

mm dia Gun metal wheel valve, with required

accessories, pressure gauge and painting with

synthetic enamel paint of approved shade as

required.

Nos. 3

24 Providing fixing testing and commissioning of 15

mm size quartzoid bulb type sprinklers, of rating

68 degree C. pendent / upright with required

accessories.

Nos. 225

a 25 mm dia Nos. 45

25 Providing fixing testing and commissioning of 15

mm size quartzoid side wall type sprinklers, of

rating 68 degree C. with required accessories.

27 Providing and fixing of Sprinkler flexible joint

of 25 mm diameter, of following length

consisting of - flexible Tube (SS 304) S.S. Slip nut,

Isolated Ring and 'O' Ring for Sprinkler drop,

which shall include necessary support with a

maximum working pressure of 14 Kgs/cm2 and

temperature rating of 2250 F. The lenght of

flexible Sprinklers pipe.

a 1000 mm Nos. 100

241

b 1200 mm Nos. 70

c 1500 mm Nos. 25

27 Providing and fixing Pressure Switch in the MS

pipe Line including connection etc. as required.

Nos. 6

28 Providing and fixing flow switches in

100/150 mm. dia MS Pipe

Nos. 2

29 Supply, installation , testing commissioning of

pressure gauge, 0-21 kg/sq.cm range with 15

mm dia stop cock valve,piping etc as required

Nos. 10

30 Providing and fixing, testing and commissioning

of installation control valve of Cast iron body and

brass/bronze working parts comprising of

water motor alarm, bronze seat clapper and

clapper arm, hydraulically driven mechanical

gong bell to sound continuous alarm when the

Wet riser/Sprinkler system activates, pressure

gauges, emergency releases, strainer, pressure

switch cock valve complete with drain valve and

bypass, test control box, ball valves, MS pipe of

required size, flanges, orifice plate, gasket etc. of

size 150 mm dia as required.

Nos. 2

31 Providing and fixing angle iron (40 mm x 40 mm x

5 mm) door frame and MS sheet (2 mm thick)

cum glass shutter of size 2.1 mtr. x 1.2 mtr. (N.S.)

with 25 mm. x 25 mm. x 3 mm. angle frame all

round and stiffened in between i/c hinges,

handle, locking arrangement, painting with

approved synthetic enamel paint i/c sign

writing on glass at internal hydrant including

providing and fixing M.S. Sheet 2 mm. thick on

remaining portion above door to close

opening i/c painting etc. as required.

Nos. 4

SUB HEAD - III "FIRE EXTINGUISHERS"

32 Providing and fixing Carbon-di-oxide fire

extinguishers consisting of welded M.S cylindrical

body,squeeze lever discharge valve fitted with

internal dischargetube, 30cms long high

pressure discharge hose, discharge nozzle,

suspension bracket, finished externally with red

enamel paint and fixed to wall with brackets

242

with rawl plug/dash fasteners complete with

initial charging .

a Capacity 4.5kg. I.S.I. Marked. (IS : 15683) Nos. 10

b Capacity 9 kg. I.S.I. Marked. (IS : 2878) Nos. 4

33 Providing and fixing Water CO2 (ISI marked)

extinguishers including all accessories as per IS

specification. (IS : 15683) with wall bracket,

CO2 catridge , initial filling etc complete as

required. Capacity 9 litres. (IS : 15683)

Nos. 10

34 Providing and fixing ABC type (Dry Powder Type)

extinguisher as per IS: 15683 consisting of

welded MS cylindrical body ,with discharge

hose, discharge valve, suspension bracket,

initial filling etc complete as required.

a Capacity 6 Kg. Nos. 6

b Capacity 9 Kg. Nos. 6

Sub Total:

SCHEDULE OF QTY – BSL 3 LAB (PROCESS EQUIPMENTS)


1 Biohazard-Safety Cabinet:

4 Ft. - Class II / Type B 2 Biohazard Safety

Cabinets 100% Exhaust - (NSF 49 & EN 12469

certified) Stainless Steel Interior finish, Air

cleanliness: ISO 14664. Complete with Quoted



required

Nos 8

Support Stand with Castor Wheel with ergonomic

foot rest

Electrical Socket outlets – 2 nos

Universal service fitting for;Air, Gas, Nitrozen &

Vacuum

Suitable UV-Lamp

243

‘0” leak type Exhaust air outlet Damper

Bunsen Burning units (ONLY FOR VIRUS BSL 3

LAB cabinets)

2 6 Ft. - Class II / Type B 2 Biohazard Safety

Cabinets 100% Exhaust - (NSF 49 & EN 12469

certified) Stainless Steel Interior finish, Air

cleanliness: ISO 14664. Complete with .Quoted



required

Nos 10

Support Stand with Castor Wheel with

ergonomic foot rest

Electrical Socket outlets – 2 nos

Universal service fitting for;Air, Gas, Nitrozen &

Vacuum

Suitable UV-Lamp

‘0” leak type Exhaust air outlet Damper

3 Double door Steam Starilizer (Autoclave) 200 Ltr: Nos 4

High Pressure Rectangular Steam Sterilizer

complete with Double vertical sliding doors, fully

automatic with in-built steam generator and bio-

seal arrangement. Chamber size 450x450x1000

mm, capacity- 200 ltrs.Quoted price should be



The normal working pressure would be 1.2 - 2.1

Kg/cm2 corresponding to temperature 121 -

134oC. Fully Automatic operation through PLC

with pre-selected and variable programs

The unit would be manufactured as per Bureau of

Indian Standards specifications and ISO 13485:

2003 & CE certified.

4 Animal IVC system: Set 10

Individually Ventilated Cage System – suitable for

bio-containment lab facility complete with

dedicated exhaust air arrangement. Cage-racks

244

should be suitable to house 2000 Mouse / 500

Rabit / 100 Gunipigs.Quoted price should be



I.V.C. ventilator should provide required amount

of HEPA filtered clean air to each cage. It also

extracts contamination air from cages and

exhausts it out of the room after passing through

HEPA filters. The IVC system should maintaining

low level of ammonia and CO2

5 Dynamic Pass Box: Nos RO

Dynamic Pass Box in SS 304 construction of inner

size; 600x600x600, complete with double door

interlocking arrangement, UV lamp with hour

meter and door interlocking system.

Sub Total (NOT INCLUDED IN GR TOTAL) :

SCHEDULE - BSL 3 LAB OPERATION & COMPREHENSIVE MAINTENANCE - EXCLUDING LAB

INSTRUMENTS NOT IN VENDOR'S SCOPE AS SPECIFIED IN B.O.Q


1 Operation & General maintenance of all services

çovered in this tender as per annexture enclosed

installed in the BSL 3 facility, inwhich minimum;

minimum Two skilled technician for 2 Shift & One

skilled technician for 1 Shift (during Night) with

periodical supervision by experienced Engineer.

for the running of facility on 24 x 7days and 24

months ( 2 Years from date of handing over to

THSTI)

2 SYSTEM COMPOSITE - INCLUDING:

High Side comprising of Chiller, Pumps, Hot

Water Generators and Cooling Towers with all

asseaasries

Set 1

Low Side comprising of AHUs, EXUs, Air

distribution system (ducting with insulation), Air

245

control devices like VCD, Registers, Grilles,

Louvres, Terminals with filters, coils, heaters etc.

Water distribution system comprising of CHW /

HW Piping system - (MS and GI), all flow control

devices like valves, fittings, water flow balancing

and Insulation

3 Total Electrical System comprising of MCC and

connected components, Cabling with all

associates and Protection devices

Set 1

4 Building management system including

controllers, field devices and sensors checking

and monitoring including calibration,

replacement if needed

Set 1

5 Fire detection and supression system , Access

Control and Door interlock system

Set 1

6 Bio Safety Cabinets, comprihensive manitenence

including necessary components - Excluding

consumables

Nos 9

7 Double Door Autoclaves, comprihensive

manitenence including necessary

components=Excluding consumables

Nos 2

8 Animal IVC system, comprihensive manitenence

including necessary components-Excluding

consumables

Set 5

9 Operation & comprehensive maintenance of

complete Electrical, automation and Building

Management System including access control and

door interlock arrangement

Set 1

10 Observations & readings to be recorded -

Reporting

Qualified and trained operators along with

technician , electricians will be stationed at site

throughout 365 days and for 24 hrs.

Room Temperature

Respective room pressures in co-ordination with

differancial room pressure

246

Relative humidity

Restricted entry to BSL 3 lab facility for

authorized personel only

11 General stocks ( for Comprehensive AMC) period)

:

Silicon tubes (R 20), General tool box, CFL light

(Philips / Wipro) - 36 W, Electronic Blast: Model

No. EBW 236, Lamp : 2X”TL”D36W, Make

:Philips, Fuses and MCBS: Havells / HRC , Relays

and contactors , Emergency stock of control and

power cabling, glands etc., necessary Pre, Micro

and HEPA filter sets.

12 Periodic Lab Fumigation & Performance

qualification / validation in coordination with

USERS

Sub Total (NOT INCLUDED IN GR TOTAL) :

Engineer IEE

T E N D E R D O C U M E N T

Documents

Transcript of T E N D E R D O C U M E N T